Англійська мова 8 клас Морська 2016 by sloven

ȻȻɄ 81.43.21-922 Ɇ80

Ɋɟɤɨɦɟɧɞɨɜɚɧɨ Ɇɿɧɿɫɬɟɪɫɬɜɨɦ ɨɫɜɿɬɢ ɿ ɧɚɭɤɢ ɍɤɪɚʀɧɢ

Ɇɨɪɫɶɤɚ Ʌ. ȱ. Ɇ80

«Ⱥɧɝɥɿɣɫɶɤɚ ɦɨɜɚ (8-ɣ ɪɿɤ ɧɚɜɱɚɧɧɹ)» ɩɿɞɪɭɱɧɢɤ ɞɥɹ 8 ɤɥɚɫɭ ɡɚɝɚɥɶɧɨɨɫɜɿɬɧɿɯ ɧɚɜɱɚɥɶɧɢɯ ɡɚɤɥɚɞɿɜ. – Ɍɟɪɧɨɩɿɥɶ: Ⱥɫɬɨɧ, 2016. – 298 ɫ. : ɿɥ.

ɉɿɞɪɭɱɧɢɤ ɫɬɜɨɪɟɧɢɣ ɜɿɞɩɨɜɿɞɧɨ ɞɨ ɱɢɧɧɨʀ ɩɪɨɝɪɚɦɢ ɡ ɚɧɝɥɿɣɫɶɤɨʀ ɦɨɜɢ ɞɥɹ ɭɱɧɿɜ 8 ɤɥɚɫɭ ɫɟɪɟɞɧɿɯ ɡɚɝɚɥɶɧɨɨɫɜɿɬɧɿɯ ɧɚɜɱɚɥɶɧɢɯ ɡɚɤɥɚɞɿɜ, ɧɚ ɡɚɫɚɞɚɯ ɤɨɦɭɧɿɤɚɬɢɜɧɨɝɨ ɬɚ ɿɧɬɟɪɚɤɬɢɜɧɨɝɨ ɩɿɞɯɨɞɿɜ, ɩɪɢɧɰɢɩɿɜ ɿɧɬɟɝɪɚɰɿʀ ɭɫɿɯ ɜɢɞɿɜ ɦɨɜɥɟɧɧɽɜɨʀ ɞɿɹɥɶɧɨɫɬɿ (ɚɭɞɿɸɜɚɧɧɹ, ɱɢɬɚɧɧɹ, ɝɨɜɨɪɿɧɧɹ, ɩɢɫɟɦɧɟ ɦɨɜɥɟɧɧɹ), ɫɢɫɬɟɦɧɨɫɬɿ ɣ ɥɨɝɿɱɧɨɫɬɿ, ɞɨɫɬɭɩɧɨɫɬɿ, ɚɤɬɢɜɧɨɫɬɿ, ɟɫɬɟɬɢɱɧɨɫɬɿ. ɋɬɪɭɤɬɭɪɧɚ ɨɪɝɚɧɿɡɚɰɿɹ ɩɿɞɪɭɱɧɢɤɚ ɩɟɪɟɞɛɚɱɚɽ ɪɟɩɪɨɞɭɤɬɢɜɧɭ ɬɚ ɬɜɨɪɱɭ ɿɧɲɨɦɨɜɧɭ ɞɿɹɥɶɧɿɫɬɶ ɭɱɧɿɜ ɭ ɦɟɠɚɯ ɜɨɫɶɦɢ ɫɢɬɭɚɬɢɜɧɨ-ɬɟɦɚɬɢɱɧɢɯ ɪɨɡɞɿɥɿɜ, ɞɨɩɨɜɧɟɧɢɯ ɛɥɨɤɨɦ ɬɟɤɫɬɿɜ ɬɚ ɡɚɜɞɚɧɶ ɞɥɹ ɞɨɦɚɲɧɶɨɝɨ ɱɢɬɚɧɧɹ ɬɚ ɥɟɤɫɢɱɧɢɯ ɿ ɝɪɚɦɚɬɢɱɧɢɯ ɞɨɜɿɞɤɨɜɢɯ ɦɚɬɟɪɿɚɥɿɜ.

ȻȻɄ 81.43.21-922

ISBN 978-966-308-655-2 © Ɇɨɪɫɶɤɚ Ʌ. ȱ., 2016 © ɌɡɈȼ «ȼɢɞɚɜɧɢɰɬɜɨ Ⱥɫɬɨɧ», 2016

REVISION LESSONS

LESSON 1 1. Read the text and answer the questions. Dear pupils! You are going to cover another year of learning English. I hope this experience will give you more confidence in mastering this important language. I am sure you know how necessary it is for you to be able to speak English because almost all people in the world try to learn it. So the world is going to be open for you as well if you practise all the exercises in this textbook properly. The pages of this book will give you ideas on how to talk about your friends and describe their characters, possible modes of communication with your friends. You will have a chance to discuss healthy lifestyles, the importance of reading books. You will also try to look into the world of music, mass media and school life in our country and abroad. You have definitely learnt a lot about your native country, but here you will find some more interesting data about Ukraine and the life of its people. There will also be a lot information about the country where people speak English as their native language - about the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland or the UK. Do you enjoy learning grammar? Of course, you don’t. © But I assure you - there won’t be much of it. And it will be fun for you. So what are you waiting for?! Get! Set! Go!

1. Why is it necessary for you to be able to speak English? 2. What topics will you learn with the help of the book this year? 3. Will you learn about Canada this year? What countries will you learn about? 4. Will there be much grammar to learn this year?

REVISION LESSONS

2. Read the dialogues. Complete them with the words from the box. Act them out with your partner. corner your

miss where

left across

on next

looking down

far lost

A: You lo o k ____ . Can I help? B: Yes. I a m ____ for the Caprice Theatre. Do you know ____ it is? A: It’s on th e ____ of Elm Street and 22nd Avenue. It’s ___ to the Art Gallery. You can’t ____ it. A: Can I get to the Harlton Hotel from here _____ foot? B: Sure. It’s not th a t_____ . Just g o ____ 4th Avenue to Main Street. T u rn ____ on Main. It should be o n ____ right. It’s ____ from the park. 3. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present Perfect tense form. 1. Where_____ (you / be)? - I _____ (be) to the dentist. 2 .______ (you/ see) my watch anywhere? - No, I am afraid I ________ (not/ see) it anywhere. 3 . 1_______ (not/ finish) my letter yet. 4. He just _______ (go out). 5. I can’t find my bicycle. Someone _____ (take) it. 6 . 1_______ (finish) my homework already. Now I can watch TV. 7 . ________(Mary/ water) tomatoes? - I think so. 8. Mr. Parker travels to Washington, D.C. very often. He _______ (fly) there many times. 9. He never _ _ _ _ _ (meet) Nancy’s parents. He hopes he will get the chance to meet them soon.

REVISION LESSONS

4. Answer the questions.

5. 6. 7. 8.

1. Are weather forecasts important for people? People of what occupations are interested in weather forecast? Why? 2. How often can people hear to weather forecasts on TV or radio during the day? Where else can they get information about the weather forecast? 3. When and where from do weathermen usually collect information about the weather? 4. What is the usual weather if the barometer shows high pressure in summer? In winter? What is the usual result of weathermen’s work? Do you and the members of your family usually listen to weather forecast or watch it on television? Have you ever got into trouble because of the wrong weather forecast? How did it happen? Have you ever got into trouble because you didn’t know weather forecast for the day? How did it happen?

5. Describe an ideal day for: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

going for a picnic; a tour about the city; a visit to a museum; skiing or skating; playing outdoors; doing homework; celebrating the New Year’s Day.

Model: If you go out for a picnic, you can do that on a bright clear day. Then the sun shines, it doesn’t rain. It’s not foggy. It can be a little windy, but not stormy. It is usually warm then.

REVISION LESSONS

3. Read the text and say whether the statements after it are true or false. Correct the false ones. In Britain it is very difficult to find a place where you can try the national British meals. On the contrary, there is a wide variety of international restaurants in the UK: Indian, Chinese and Italian restaurants are especially popular, but there are also many others. Apart from restaurants, there are also many take aways, where you can buy cooked meals to take home. There are many cafes and bars in the UK, many of them are self-service. Sometimes a waiter or waitress will serve you at the table. Although the correct name for a midday meal is lunch, many English families call it “dinner”. What is interesting enough is that English people do not wish each other “Good Appetite”. Tea is the number one drink in Britain and the average person has about four cups of tea a day. 1. If you are in Britain it is quite easy to find a typical British meal. 2. There are three meals in Britain: breakfast, lunch and supper. 3. All restaurants in the UK are of a take away type. 4. It is OK during meals not to wish “Good Appetite” in Britain. 5. Coffee is as popular as tea in the UK. 6. You must serve yourself in all British cafes and bars. 4. Fill in the blanks with the words from the box. appetizer bar breakfast brunch buffet

chef cook dessert dinner dishwasher

fancy fast-food lunch non-smoking salad

smoking soup tip waiter

REVISION LESSONS

People who work in a restaurant: The person who serves your food is called a __________ . The person who cooks your food is called a _________________ if it is a cheap restaurant, or a __________________ if it is an expensive restaurant. A ________________is somebody who washes dishes. If the food and service is good, people usually leave a ________________. Meals and the time of day: Most people e a t_________________after they wake up. Around noon people have their midday meal, o r ____________ . A n d ____________ is the meal that people eat in the evening. However, sometimes, especially on Sunday, people like to sleep in, so instead of having breakfast, they eat a meal between breakfast and lunch called Parts of a meal: At lunch or dinner sometimes people order a snack before the meal called an _____________________ . A ________________ or a _________________ is often served alongside the main meal. After dinner, people sometimes treat themselves t o _________________. Types of restaurants: It’s nice to eat at a ________________ restaurant, but that can be expensive. Sometimes, if you are short on time or short on money, you might go to a _________________ restaurant because the food is cheaper and served faster. Some restaurants have a ____________________ , which means you take a plate up to a table loaded with food and you can put as much food as you want on your plate. Other restaurants have a _____________ where you can get an alcoholic drink while you are waiting for your table. Most restaurants these days have a ______________ and a _______________ section.

y.y.y.y.v.x

V .y .y .y .lC C V .ilt

REVISION LESSONS

5. Answer the questions. 1. What do people in different countries call the holiday of Easter? 2. When does this holiday begin in the countries you have read about? 3. What do people usually do on Easter Sunday? 4. What does this holiday have special for children? 5. What traditional food is present at Easter in different countries? 6. What kind of popularity does this holiday have in different countries? 7. Had you gone to school before your parents left for work? 8. What had you done by 10 a.m. yesterday? 9. What had you done by the time you started to watch TV yesterday? 10. When did you wake up yesterday? 6. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present Perfect or the Past Perfect tense form. Say what the difference is between these two tense forms. 1. You can have this newspaper. I _____ (finish) reading it. 2. It wasn’t raining when I left for school. I t ____ (stop) by that time. 3. I am not hungry. I already ____ (eat). 4. It was ten p. m. I already _____ (finish) my homework and I was ready to go to bed. 5.Carol missed her lesson of English yesterday because of a traffic jam. By the time she got to school, her lesson already______ (begin). 6. Our family had no car at that time. We _____ (sell) our old car. 7. Do you want to watch that program? It just ______(start). 8. We are late. The party already______(start).

7. Read the dialogue and make up a similar film riddle for your classmates to guess. Include the film’s genre, setting, actors, plot, climax. A: It’s a fantasy movie. It takes place in a world of elves, dwarfs, and ores. Elijah Wood acts in it. It’s about a hobbit who has to destroy a magic ring before an evil wizard can get it. In the end, he decides to keep the ring, but it gets destroyed anyway. B: It’s “The Lord of the Rings” , isn’t it? A: Yes, it is. You have guessed it.

REVISION LESSONS

LESSON З 1. Read the dialogue and act it out with your classmate. Then make up a similar one. A: В: A: B:

What’s your hobby? I like to dance very much. What kind of dances do you dance? Well, my favourite dances are Tango, Waltz, Cha-cha, Rumba, Samba, the ballroom dances, you know. A: What about modern dances? B: Well, I like modern dances as well, and I often dance Rock-n-roll and Disco. 2. Pair work. Practise speaking as it is given in the model. Model: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

I I I I I

A: I know that he doesn’t play the piano now. B: But did he use to play the piano when he was younger? A: Yes, he used to play it very well. know he isn’t very rich now... know she hasn’t got many friends now... know Peter doesn’t like cats any more... know Susan doesn’t run in the mornings... know he doesn’t go to bed early now...

3. Ask your classmate about his/ her shopping habits. Then report to the class what you have found out. 1. Do you enjoy shopping? How often do you go shopping? How much time do you spend each time you go? 2. What’s your favourite place to shop? Why? 3. Do you compare prices at different stores when you shop? 4. How important is good customer service when you are shopping? 5. Are you a price conscious shopper? What is your opinion of discount ([disgkaunt] знижка) stores? 6. When you buy something, do you read the label? Why or why not?

4. Suggest English words for the given definitions. a. a shop that sells many different items indifferent departments. Harrods is b. c.

d. e.

probably the world’s best known. a large shop that sells mostly food and house hold items. a shop that sells food. a shop that sells fresh fruit and vegetables. a shop that sells fresh meat.

REVISION LESSONS

f. g. h. i. j. k.

a a a a a a l. a

shop shop shop shop shop shop shop

that that that that that that that

sells sells sells sells sells sells sells

fresh bread and cakes. fresh fish. medicines and toiletries. newspapers and magazines. glasses / contact lenses. hard goods, such as nails and screws. books.

5. Look at the pictures. Practise speaking as it is given in the model. Speak about other foods and the ways you cook them. Model:

How do you prepare potatoes? - I boil them. What about the chicken? Do you boil it as well? - No, I fry it.

6. Food idioms. Learn the meanings of the idioms and then complete the sentences with the correct one.

boil

fry

bake

roast

1. If something makes your mouth water, it makes you eat it. 2. If you say that someone has a sweet tooth, you mean that they particularly like sweet things. 3. If you feel that you have egg on your face, you feel stupid or embarrassed because of something you did. 4. If something is your bread and butter, it is the activity or job you do to get money you need. a. You’l l __________ if your plan doesn’t work. b. Driving is h is ____ though he also writes music. c. One look at those delicious cakes___________ . d. Stop eating so much chocolate. You really___________ .

7. Can you name: five sports that don’t use a ball? five sports ending in a “ball”? three sports played on a court?

two sports that use a track? two sports that use a table? one sport that uses a ring?

REVISION LESSONS

LESSON 4 7. Read and smile. Rote-play the dialogues with your partner. a)

Peter: David:

b) Teacher: Johnny: Teacher: Johnny:

What a strange pair of socks you are wearing; one is green and the other is blue! Yes, it is really strange. I’ve got another pair of socks at home, and they are exactly the same. What is the longest word? Smiles. Why? It has got only 6 letters. Can’t you see there is a mile between the first and last S?

2. Look at the map of city downtown and help Victor to get to: a) the Art Gallery; she is near the library; b) the post office; he is in Oak Street next to the hospital; c) the library; he is in Oak Street next to the Art Gallery. MUSEUM ^

LI 13HERY

£ C £ < D a<

U n ± u

1st Avenue HOSPITAL

f am POLICE STATION

oCD

GO CD CD

DEPARTMENT STORE

01 0 0 0 BUS STATION

2nd Avenue

O 8. CD —I

CD CD

GO LOW COURTS

HIGH SCHOOL

3rd Avenue

ART GALLERY

POST OFFICE

CD CD

REVISION LESSONS

Model:

Victor, go straight ahead/dow n/up......, turn right/left on ..... Street/Avenue, go along .... Street/Avenue.......... will be on your right/left.

3. Answer the questions. 1. Do you live in a city/town or in a village? 2. What is the name of the place you live in? What region do you live in? 3. What places did you visit during the summer? 4. What is the difference between a skyscraper and a multi-storeyed block of flats? 5. Is your house/flat in the city downtown (in the centre of the village) or in its suburbs? 6. Where do your grandparents live? Do you visit them? How often do you do that? 4. Match the words with their definitions. 1. carol 2. pudding 3. toast 4. stocking 5. stuffed turkey 6. snowman 7. eve

a. if you drink it to someone, you drink something in order to thank them, wish them luck etc. b. the night or day before an important day c. a given animal filled with a mixture of rice, onion etc. and cooked as a dish d. a traditional Christmas song e. a thin close-fitting piece of clothing that covers a foot and a leg up to the knee f. a hot sweet dish, made from cake, rice, bread, etc with fruit, milk or other sweet things added g. a simple figure of a person made of snow, made especially by children__________________________

5. Can you name: five sports that don’t use a ball? five sports ending in a “ball”? three sports played on a court?

two sports that use a track? two sports that use a table? one sport that uses a ring?

REVISION LESSONS

6. Fill in the blank spaces with the correct article (if necessary). UK Great Britain Europe Atlantic Ocean

Ben Nevis USA Irish Sea Ireland

English Channel British Isles Thames Carpathians

7. Victor is in London now. He is at the railway station. He is going to Birmingham. Listen to or read the information at the station and say: a) which platform he has to go to; b) what time his train arrives at the station. The next train to arrive at platform two is the 14:25 to Birmingham New Street. The train approaching platform 7 is the 15:10 to Liverpool Lime Street. Will passengers waiting for the delayed 16:05 to Glasgow Central please go to platform 3? Platform 3 is for the delayed Glasgow train. This is a change of platform announcement. The 16:43 train to Southampton will now depart from platform 1. Platform 1 is for Southampton. 8. Write the following sentences in: a) the negative; b) in the interrogative. 1. They have visited Ukraine several times so far. 2. He has seen your aunt recently. 3. She has come to see the new company manager. 4. They have already repaired that old road. 5. They have missed the train, so they will not be in time for the lessons. 6. We have been here before. I remember this place. 7. She has spent all her money on clothes. 8. You have broken my favourite vase.

REVISION LESSONS

LESSON 5 1. Match the words with their definitions.

1. passport 2. customs 3. arrival 4. departure 5. timetable 6. fare 7. ticket

a. the place where your bags are checked for illegal goods when you go into a country b. an act of leaving a place, especially at the start of a journey c. a printed piece of paper which shows that you have paid to enter a cinema, travel on a bus, plane etc. d. a small official document that you get from your government, that proves who you are e. the price you pay to travel somewhere by bus, train, plane etc. f. coming to a certain destination place g. a list of the times at which buses, trains, planes etc arrive and leave__________________________

2. Sort out the words into two groups: a) those used in the singular; b) those used in the plural. Then complete the table with the missing singular and plural forms. Mice, louse, man, oxen, sheep, roofs, toys, teeth, child, families, goose, woman, fish, feet, knives, photo, men, potatoes, pianos Singular

Plural

3. Complete the situations with your own sentences. Use the ideas in brackets. Model:

(to get married) Jill and Jane were single. Now they are husband and wife. - They have got married.

1. (to make a mess in the room) The room was clean when mother left home for work. Now it is dirty and untidy. - The children 2. (to cut his hair) Joe’s hair was long. Now it is short. - He 3. (to have a baby) Jessica didn’t have children. Now a little boy calls her “mother” . - S h e _________________ .

REVISION LESSONS

4. (to move to another place) Frank lived in Liverpool. Now you will not find him in the streets of this city. - H e ___________________ . 5. (to enter the university) Carol was a schoolgirl last year. This year she studies at the university. - C arol__________________. 6. (to buy a new car) Jim’s parents didn’t have a car. Now you can see his father driving a brand new Mercedes. - They 4. Make up conversations about places you visited and really liked. Model: A: (Last year) I visited__________ . B: What is it like? A: It’s ______________ . B: What’s special about it? A :__________________________. 5. Read the example of New Year Resolutions and complete the table after the text. This year is going to be better than the last year. I am going to work and live a good life. First of all, I’ve decided to learn another language. I haven’t decided yet, but maybe it will be French or German. I’m also planning to go on a diet. And so, I’m going to join a health club. Also, I’m going to jog every morning. I intend to live a healthier life. I’m planning to keep eating lots of fruits and vegetables. But, I am not going just to study and worry about my health. I am also going to live a happier life. I’ve decided to go on a trip. I’m not sure but I will go to France. I’d like to see the Eiffel Tower and Louver. Resolutions to study better

Resolutions to lead a healthier life

Resolutions to lead a happier life

REVISION LESSONS

6. Write down at least two resolutions of your own for each section. a. Resolutions to live a healthier life :_________________________ b. Resolutions to help my parents: __________________________ c. Resolutions to do well in school:__________________________ d. Resolutions to live a happier life :__________________________ e. Resolutions to be good to my friends:_____________________ f. Resolutions to protect the environment:____________________ g. Resolutions to be a good citizen:__________________________ 7. Say whether the statements are true or false. Correct the false ones. a. b. c. d. e. f.

Life in a city is always quiet and slow. Village people buy their food in large supermarkets. People in big cities do much gardening. There are a lot of traffic jams in villages. In villages people usually travel to work by bus or by train. Life in a big city is very cheap and boring.

8. Mini p roject 1) Choose a place which you haven’t visited in Britain or in Ukraine. Find it on the map and work out how far it is from where you live. Make a list of things you would like to find out about the place. 2) Find out information about the place you have chosen from different sources - your teacher, books in a library, the Internet: - how to get there; - what the main attractions are (including the way and the cost to see them); - what you can do and see there. 3) Use your notes to write a short description of the place you have chosen. Choose some pictures to illustrate it. 4) Give a short talk to the class about the place you have written about. Show where it is on the map and show the pictures you have got. 5) Answer any questions from your classmates.

REVISION LESSONS

LESSON 6 1. Read the dialogue and act it out with your partner. Then make up a similar one.

A: Welcome to Britain. May I see your passport please? B: A: B: A: B:

Sure. Here it is. Where are you coming from? I'm coming from Kyiv, Ukraine. What is the purpose of your visit? I'm here on holidays.

A: B: A: B:

How long are you planning to stay? Well, for three weeks. Where will you stay? I’ll live in my friend’s house.

A: Have you ever been to Britain before? B: No, this is my first time. A: B: A: B:

Do you have anything to declare? No, nothing. Enjoy your stay. Thank you.

Lviv / Kherson / Kharkiv On a family visit / on tour For three days / for a fortnight stay at the hotel / live in my aunt’s house

REVISION LESSONS

2. Look at the pictures and name the sports.

3. Tick the correct column as in the example. Since V I haven’t seen him

For last summer. 1985. a long time. last month. two weeks. we were schoolchildren.

4. Listen to the announcements and match them with the word combinations. Then say where each of the vehicles is going. bus station___ train station____a irp o rt_____ tube station___ 1. The bus is going t o ________________. 3. The airplane is going to 2. The train is going to _______________ . 4. The tube (subway) is going t o ____________ . Announcement A. This is the A line to Middleburg with stops at Walnut Grove, Neville Park, and the Civic Centre. Transfer at the Civic Centre for the B line. The doors are closing. Announcement B. This is the last call for Transcom Flight Number 1238 to Kansas City and Chicago. All passengers for Transcom Flight Number 1238 please board at Gate Number 32.

REVISION LESSONS

Announcement C. The 8:30 bus for Cleveland is now boarding at Gate Number 16. this is an express bus with stops in Utica and Syracuse only. Gate 16 for the 8:30 bus to Cleveland. Announcement D. Your attention, please. The delayed 4:15 train from Washington with service to Philadelphia and New York is now arriving on Track Number 4. We apologize for the delay. Once again, the delayed 4:15 train to Philadelphia and New York now boarding on Track 4. Focus on Grammar Prepositions of Time in in the morning (afternoon, evening) in August (months) in summer (seasons) in 1992 (years) in the 20th century

at at 8 o’clock at noon (night, midnight) at Easter at Christmas at the weekend

on Fridays on Wednesday (days) on January 27th (dates) on Monday morning on a cold day on a summer night

5. Fiil in the blanks with the correct preposition (at, on, in). 1. 2.

September. March 25*’.

the afternoon.

9. 10.

Christmas. spring.

17. 18.

Saturday night. night.

New Year’s

19.

noon.

1983.

11. Day. 12.

10 o’clock.

20.

the weekend.

5. 6. 7.

Friday. the evening. 9 o’clock.

13. 14. 15.

midnight. Sundays. Easter.

21. 22. 23.

a summer day. Friday morning. autumn.

a hot day.

24.

a winter night.

^6. the 19'" century.

REVISION LESSONS

6. Put the verbs in brackets in the Present Perfect Continuous or the Present Continuous. 1. Mark isn’t studying right now. He (watch) TV. He (watch) TV for half an hour already. 2. Kate is standing at the corner. She (wait) for the bus. She (wait) for twenty minutes. 3. Right now we’re in class. We (do) the exercise. We (do) this exercise for a couple of minutes. 4. Scott and Rebecca (talk) right now. They (talk) on the phone for over an hour. 5. I (sit) in class right now. I (sit) since afternoon. 6. You look busy right now. What (you, do)? - I (work) on my physics experiment. It's a long and difficult experiment. - How long (you, work) on it? - I started planning it last January. I (work) on it since then. 7. Answer the following questions. Use since or for in your answer. 1. How long have you been studying English? 2. How long have you been living in ________? 3. Who lives in a flat / a dormitory? How long have you been living there? 4. How long have you been standing up/sitting down? 5. I began to teach English in 1989. How long have I been teaching English? 6. How long has your English teacher been working in your school? 7. How old were you when you started to drink coffee? How long have you been drinking coffee? 8. How long have you been doing this exercise? 9. Do you wear glasses? How long have you (not) been wearing glasses? 8. Where is it? Ask and answer questions as it is given in the model. Model:

Where is the printer? - It’s on the table. Where are the pencils? - They are in the cup.

UNIT I

MY FRIENDS

LESSON 7 1. Listen to the dialogue and put the pictures a -f in the correct order. Act out the dialogue with your partner. Mark: Mike, have you got a minute? Mike: Sure. What’s up? Mark: Can you help me send an email? This software is new for me. Mike: No problem. First, turn on your computer. Mark: I’ve done it. Mike: Then connect to the internet. Now you should access your email account. Mark: Got it. What’s next? Mike: Click on “Create a message” . Now write down the address of a person you are sending your email and then type your message. When you finish click on “Send”. Mark: Where is that button? I mean “Send”. Mike: Can’t you see? It’s in the left bottom corner of the screen. Mark: Oh, yes, I can see it now. Is that all? Mike: Yes, that’s all. It isn’t difficult, is it? Mark: It’s a piece of cake! Thanks!

2. Use the instructions given below and exercise 1 to make up a dialogue about sending SMS. Act out the dialogue with your partner. -

Switch on your mobile phone Go to the menu on your phone Choose “ Messages” Select “Create messages” Select “Next text message”

- Write your SMS - Select “Send to” - Select the contact of the person you are sending the message and press “Send”

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

3. Study the mind map and learn the words. Use the dictionary if necessary. Going out to the cinema, to a cafe, to the leisure centre

Interacting in social networks

m & m Interaction with friends things we do together

Emailing to pen friends

Talking on the mobile phone

4. Answer the questions. Use the mind map in exercise 1. 1. Have you got any friends? 2. How often do you see/ meet your friends? Every day? Once a week? 3. Have you got one best friend or a group of friends? 4. Is it important for a person to have friends? Why / Why not? 5. What do you usually do together with your friend / friends? 6. Have you got a pen friend? Where is he / she from? How often do you write to your pen friend / pen friends? What kind of letters do you write to your pen friends? 5. Read the text and choose the best answer (A-D). The 1__ teenager in the UK 2__ about twenty to thirty text messages a day, according to the last survey. Communicating with friends has become one of the most popular 3 among British young people today. In the UK: - 90% of teens 4 _ a mobile - 75% use online 5 __ networking websites like Facebook to 6 __ phone; - 66% use their cell phones and photos and keep in 7 __ with 8 _ cameras to keep a friends; photographic 9 __ of their lives; - IM (Instant Messaging) online is more popular than email. 97% of - 85% go online every day; - 28% have got blogs - online teenage girls and boys have used IM; 1 0 _of their everyday lives. 1. A. happy B. popular C. average D. responsible

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

A. A. A. A. A. A. A. A. A.

copies subjects own digital take touch handmade composition books

B. B. B. B. B. B. B. B. B.

sends goals buy social print out class digital description leaflets

C. C. C. C. C. C. C. C. C.

makes up ambitions sell cultural hand out home film record webpages

D. D. D. D. D. D. D. D. D.

deletes hobbies send computer share talk record essay diaries

6. Match the words or word combinations on the left with their definitions on the right. 1. survey 2. online 3. digital

a. an online service or site through which people create and maintain interpersonal relationships b. a small video camera that is used to show live images on a Website c. demanding children, families, schools and communities to turn off screens and "to turn on life."

4. keep in touch

d. something that recalls or describes past events

5. website

e. a small telephone that people can take with them and use outside their homes by mean of a cellular system

6. social network

f. to maintain communications with someone

g. an activity in which many people answer a question or a series of questions in order to gather 7. screen-free information about what most people do or think about something h. a place on the World Wide Web that contains information about a person, organization, and 8. webcam usually consists of many Web pages joined by hyperlinks i. connected to a computer, a computer network, or 9. cell phone the Internet 10.record (n) j. using or characterized by computer technology

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

LESSON 8 1. Listen to the dialogues. Act them out with your classmates. Mike: Mr. Newton: Mike: Mr. Newton: Mike: Mr. Newton: Mike: Mr. Newton:

Hello, Mr. Newton. It’s Mike Randle. Can I speak to Matt, please? Hello, Mike. Hold on a moment. I’ll see if he’s here. Sorry, he is not in his room. Can I take a message? Yes, please. Can you tell him to phone me? What’s your number? It’s 07881776089. Just a moment, I am putting it down, 07881776089. Thanks, Mr. Newton. Not at all. Bye, Matt. (a few hours later)

Matt: Mike: Matt: Mike: Matt:

Hi, Mike. I got your message. Hi! Right, I called you to invite you to go to the cinema with Jerry and me. There is a new action tonight. Oh, I can’t. I promised my father to help him with his laptop. You know, some software isn’t working properly. What about tomorrow? It’s still on tomorrow. I mean the action. Fine. We’re meeting tomorrow then. Focus on Grammar Present Continuous with future meaning

You have already learnt that we use the Present Continuous tense form to talk about the action which is taking place at the moment of speaking. Example: She is taking a picture of her friend at the moment. We can also use this tense form to talk about the nearest future plans, as in the example: She is going to the dentist this Monday. I am having dinner with Bob on Friday evening. Time expressions for this kind of usage are the following: after class, this evening, tomorrow evening, next weekend, etc.

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

2. Fill in the blanks of the grammar rules with the words “Simple” or “Continuous”. We use the Present.... 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

_____ for habits and routines. _____ for something happening now or about now. _____ for a permanent situation or fact. _____ for arrangements and plans in the future. _____ for timetables and schedules (example, bus, train, cinema programmes etc.)

3. Listen to the dialogue and fill in the blanks with the Present Simple or the Present Continuous tense form of the verbs in brackets. Jessica:

Ben: Jessica:

Just a moment. My phone is ringing (ring). It’s Linda! Hi, Linda!... I’m on the bus. We __ (watch) the school sports day this afternoon. Yes, I __ (look) forward to it. My friend V ictor__ (run) very well. __ she (phone) from New York? Be quiet, Ben. I am with my brother Ben. I have to go now, Linda. But sports d a y __ (finish) at five o’clock. Let’s speak later.

4. Look at the pictures and learn the words. FVswsr key Lrght sensor N o tifica tio n in d icato r

Volume keys

Back key

3 1* touchscreen

app tray key Search key M icrophone

M:<ro USB Homo key M enu key

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

5. Match the words with their definitions. 1. answering machine

a. to answer the phone

b. the piece on the phone that you speak into and listen from 3. cellular phone c. something that you can record a message on if / cell phone the person you are calling isn't home d. the sound a phone makes when somebody calls; 4. cordless phone to make that sound 5. dial (v) e. to put the receiver down and end a call 6. hang up f. to press the buttons on the phone g. a telephone that you can take with you away 7. pick up from your house; mobile phone 8. receiver h. the person who telephones i. a phone that is not attached to the wall (you can 9. ring (n) walk short distances with it at home or in the garden) j. a beeping sound that tells the caller that the other 10. dial tone person is already on the phone with someone else 11. busy signal k. to telephone; a telephone conversation 12. call l. the sound the phone makes when you pick it up 2. caller

6. Complete the sentences with the words from exercise 5. 1. When you pick up the phone to call someone you hear a ____ . 2. If I’m not home leave a message on m y _____ machine. 3. Sally must be talking to her mom because I have been getting a ___ for two hours. 4. I never answer m y ______ while I am driving. 5. Mark always turns his _ _ _ _ _ off when he is studying. 6. I’m busy right now. Can y o u ________later. 7. You have t o ________ “0” for the operator. 8. I

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

have a _____________so I can do the dishes and chat at the same time. 9. You will need a quarter or a phone card if you want to use the . 10. I know it was my boyfriend who called because I have 7. How would you communicate in the following situations and why. Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. Then write your answers in your copy book. 1. It’s your grandmother’s seventieth birthday. 2. You are away on a school visit to another country. You would like to share the news with your parents. 3. Last night you took some great photos at the party. Some friends of yours were there too. Now you want to share the photos with your friends. 4. You missed the lessons the previous day. Now you want to know the home assignment for the lessons you missed. 8. Look at the three messages below. How are they similar/ different? H J

•

BU i

» »•——

“tfriiQfM T1AJ •

*4 1 3 2 r ; ? i T « "T*

Mike_09 Do you want to come to my place this evening at about 7? I ’ve got a new game called Burnout. It's brilliant. You've got to try it. See you (ja

Message 1

Cd u tan. 2 my house 2nite.New

« Mike X: 2.40 p.in. Ilev ate u there? I wanted to know what u r doing tonight. Mike_09: Nothing. Why?

Mike X: Fancy cmg round to play my new game. Burnout? It's rrallv aood_

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

9. Rewrite the message below so that it looks similar to message 3 in exercise 8. Untitled - Message (HTML) Message

Insert

Paste

Clipboard

a- v

•

= ■■ J j ^

^ ^ 1 ; s 3 - Address Check ------------- 1 ‘ Book Names

Bas* Text

Format Text

Options

Names

—

Include

Follow Up’ •

Options

Spelling

'•

Proofing

l To- j | a 1<*"] L Send $ubj«t

I’m really sorry I can’t make it to the film, because I haven’t managed to finish all my homework. I hope you’ll enjoy the film. See you tomorrow, Angela.

UNIT I

MY FRIENDS

LESSON 9 1. Listen to and then read the dialogue. Guess what the words “anybody” and “nobody” mean. Act out the dialogue with your partner. Hi. I’m home. Hi. Did you have a good day? Yeah. Did anybody call while I was out? Yes. Mark called and said that there was a sale at Harold’s department store. Did he leave a number? Yes. He’s at the department store right now. And his number is 250-684-3234. Did anybody else call? No, nobody else. Focus on Grammar Indefinite pronouns and adverbs Affirmative form Offers Requests

People

Things

Places

somebody someone Examples: Somebody knocked at the door. Someone wanted to see you today. Could you bring something to read? something Examples: Something interesting happened to me yesterday. Would you like something else? Adverb: somewhere

Negative form Questions anybody anyone Examples: Is there anybody in the hall? I don’t know anybody so clever. anything Examples: Is there anything in the fridge? There isn’t anything interesting in this book. Adverb: anywhere

As a subject nobody no one Nobody came to see them. No one wanted to ask questions. nothing Nothing could cheer him up.

Adverb: nowhere

MY FRIENDS

2. Complete the grammar rules «negative» or «interrogative».

with

UNIT I

words

«affirmative»,

1. We use pronouns with some- i n _______ sentences and in offers and requests. 2. We use pronouns with any- in ____ and ____ sentences. 3. We can also use pronouns with any- in affirmative sentences when we mean “ It doesn’t matter who/ what/ where” . For example: Anybody can do this job. 4. We use pronouns with no- with ____ verbs to make the meaning negative. 3. Choose the correct word. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

It’s dark. I can’t see anything / nothing. There was no one /anyone else on the train. He’s smiling. He probably thinks about something / anything funny. I can’t find my ticket. It must be somewhere/ nowhere. You can get online anywhere / nowhere in the airport. Does anybody / nobody mind if I open the window? I am very hungry. I’ve had something / nothing to eat.

4. Read the typical phrases that you can use in a telephone conversation and make up dialogues with your partner. Answering the phone Introducing yourself Asking to speak with someone Connecting someone

Making special requests

Hello? (informal) Thank you for calling us. Jody speaking. How can I help you? Doctor's office. Hey George. It’s Lisa calling, (informal) Hello, this is Julie Madison calling. Hi, it’s Gerry from the dentist’s office here. Is Fred in? (informal) Is Jackson there, please? (informal) Can I talk to your sister? (informal) May I speak with Mr. Green, please? Just a sec. I’ll get him. (informal) Hang on one second, (informal) Please hold and I’ll put you through to his office. One moment please. Could you please repeat that? Can you speak a little slower please. My English isn’t very strong. Can you call me back? I think we have got a bad connection. Can you please hold for a minute? I have another call.

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

Taking a message for someone Leaving a message with someone Listening to an answering machine Leaving a message on an answering machine Finishing a conversation

Sammy’s not in. Who's this? (informal) I’m sorry, Lisa’s not here at the moment. Can I take a message? He’s busy right now. Can you call again later? I’ll let him know you called. I’ll make sure she gets the message. Yes, can you tell him his friend Mike called, please. No, that’s okay, I’ll call back later. Thanks; could you ask him to call Brian when he gets in? Hello. You’ve reached 222-6789. Please leave a detailed message after the beep. Thank you. Hi, this is Elizabeth. I’m sorry I’m not available to take your call at this time. Leave me a message and I’ll get back to you as soon as I can. Hey Nick. It’s Jane. Call me! (informal) Hello, this is Ricardo calling for Luke. Could you please return my call as soon as possible. My number is 3345689. Thank you. Thanks for calling. Bye for now. I’ll talk to you again soon. Bye.

5. Find the incorrect sentences and correct them. Write the correct sentences in your copy book. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

There isn’t nobody in the gym. I haven’t got something to wear. Can I have anything to eat? Is there anybody in that house? Please sit down nowhere. Has somebody seen my sunglasses? Would you like something to drink?6

6. Use the pictures in exercise 4 (lesson 8) and say what elements your mobile has got. Model:

My mobile phone has got a navigator key. It also has got... My phone hasn’t got a camera key. It hasn’t got any antenna too. It also ...

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

LESSON 10 1. Read the notes for some people and then answer the questions after them. Jack We’ve run out of milk. I won’t have time to go to the shops, so could you please pick a litre up from a corner shop on your way home from school this afternoon? Thanks! Your sister Mike Please look after the house while we’re away. Put everything in order and remember to lock the house for the night. Don’t forget to feed the cat! There is some food in the fridge (bottom shelf). Love, Mum Jane We’re having a little party on Saturday — just a few close friends. We hope you could join us. It starts at about 7:30. We hope you can make it, even though it’s a short notice. Monika Who is going away? Who is having a party? Who can’t go to the shops?

Who has to feed the cat? Who is coming home from school this afternoon?

2. Read the notes in exercise 1 again and match the meaning of the Present Continuous tense form usage with the notes. Meaning 1 — action happening now Meaning 2 — future plans and arrangements. Note A — meaning__ _ Note B — meaning____ Note C — meaning____

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

LESSON 10 1. Read the notes fo r some people and then answ er the questions a fte r them . Jack We’ve run out of milk. I won’t have time to go to the shops, so could you please pick a litre up from a corner shop on your way home from school this afternoon? Thanks! Your sister Mike Please look after the house while we’re away. Put everything in order and remember to lock the house for the night. Don’t forget to feed the cat! There is some food in the fridge (bottom shelf). Love, Mum Jane We’re having a little party on Saturday — just a few close friends. We hope you could join us. It starts at about 7:30. We hope you can make it, even though it’s a short notice. Monika Who is going away? Who is having a party? Who can’t go to the shops?

Who has to feed the cat? Who is coming home from school this afternoon?

2. Read the notes in exercise 1 again and m atch the meaning o f the P resent Continuous tense form usage with the notes. Meaning 1 — action happening now Meaning 2 — future plans and arrangements. Note A — meaning__ _ Note B — meaning____ Note C — meaning____

UNIT I

MY FRIENDS

Focus on Grammar Grammar Review

3. Put the verbs in brackets into the Future Indefinite o r the P resent Continuous tense form with the future meaning. 1. He (play) in a tennis match on Friday. 2. I am sure that I (recognize) him 3. I (see) her tomorrow. 4. She (comeback) on Monday. 5. I (go) again next year. 6. We (know) about the accident tonight. 7. I (believe) it when I see it. 8. I hope that you (have) a good time tomorrow. 9. The window-cleaner (come) at eight tomorrow. 10. Tom (catch) the 7:40 train 11. Where you (meet) them? — I (meet) them at midnight in the middle of the wood. 12. Look! I’ve broken the teapot. What Mrs. Pitt (say)? — She (not mind)] she never liked that one. 4. P ut the verbs in brackets in to the Future Indefinite tense form o r use be going to form . 1. Did you remember to book seats? — Oh no, I forgot. I (telephone) and book now. 2. The fire has gone out! — So it has. I (go) and get some sticks. 3. He has just been taken to hospital with a broken leg. — I’m sorry to hear that. I (send) him some grapes. 4. I can’t understand this letter. — I (call) my cousin. He (translate) it for you. 5. You (buy) meat? — No, I (not eat) meat anymore. I (eat) vegetables. 6. You’ve bought a lot of paint. You (redecorate) your kitchen? 7. Why are you peeling that bit of garlic? — I (put) it in the stew. 8. What you

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

(do) when you grow up? — I (be) an acrobat in a circus. 9. This dress is too long. What you (do) with it? — I (shorten) the skirt. 10. That tree makes the house very dark. — Very well, we (cut) it down. 11. How do I get from here to London Bridge? — I don’t know, but I (ask) that policeman. 12. My brother has just returned from America. — Oh good, we (ask) him to our next party. 5. Choose the c o rre c t indefinite pronoun. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

We didn’t buy something/ anything. Someone/ Anyone phoned you earlier. Did you see something/ anything interesting in the shops? Something/ Anything strange happened last night. Is someone/ anyone listening to me? I am hungry. I haven’t eaten something/ anything today.

6. W riting notes. Imagine th a t you (as an exchange p up il abroad) share a fla t with your friend. You are going away fo r the weekend. Use exercise 1 as the example and w rite a note to your fla t m ate in which you: Tell him/ her where you are going Remind him/ her to do something Ask him/ her to buy some food Wish him/ her a good weekend Say when you’ll be back home

UNIT I

MY FRIENDS

LESSON 11 7. Read the dialogue and make up a sim ilar one. Then a c t it o u t with your p a rtn e r. A: B: A: B: A: B: A: B:

Do you know Jack? Jack? Who? Jack Stanley. Oh, yes, I do. Why? (а чому ти питаєш?) They say (кажуть) he is a good boy. Yes, he is. He gets on well with his friends. And he is also very polite to his teachers and older people. How does he treat his younger brother? Very well. Jack helps him in everything. Focus on Grammar

The Smiths don’t buy as much food as the Joneses. But the Smiths don’t have as many children as the Joneses. — How do you find my cake? — Well, it is as good as the one I tried in the restaurant. — What do you think of this computer? — I am afraid, it is n o t as fa st as that one. — Why don’t you want to go to the Strand Theatre? — It’s n o t as com fortable as the Odeon. — When can you complete the project?

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

— Early next week. We are working as fa st as we can! — Do you play tennis well? — I don’t play it as w ell as my sister does. —* Why do you work so slowly? — You are kidding! I am working as quickly as Paul. — This meal is very hot! I can’t eat it. — Try this one. It is n o t as sp icy as that one. 2. Read the te x t. Practise speaking as it is given in the m odels. THE CHINESE HOROSCOPE According to the Chinese horoscope there are twelve signs which have the names of the animals. The twelve-year cycle begins with the year of the Rat. The Rat year people are usually sociable, honest, merry and intelligent, but greedy. The next is the year of the Ox — strong, proud, patient, and silent, but also stubborn and slow. The Tiger year people are strong, brave, generous and they are leaders. The Rabbits are clever, hospitable, sociable, friendly but careful. You are probably healthy, generous, independent and stubborn if you are the Dragon. The Snake year people are usually calm, decisive but lazy. Model:

A: Rats are not as patient as the Ox year people. B: Yes, and Rats are not so sociable as rabbits.

The people of the Horse year are often easy-going, cheerful, skilful, and powerful, but also cruel and impatient. The Goats are inventive, intelligent, easy-going, but they are not reliable. The Monkeys can usually be clever, inventive, skilful, but they are often arrogant and impatient. The Rooster is usually generous, brave and merry, but sometimes Rooster people can be unfair and stubborn. The Dog is modest, brave, intelligent and responsible. At the same time, the Dogs are stubborn and selfish. The last year in the cycle is the year of the

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

Pig. The Pigs are usually honest, sociable and intelligent, but they are very shy and slow. Model:

The Horse is as cheerful as the Rooster. But the Goats are not as reliable as the Dog.

3. M atch the words on the le ft with th e ir definitions on the rig h t. a. friendly and enjoying the company of other people b. friendly, welcoming and generous to visitors c. able to wait calmly for a long time or to accept difficulties, people’s annoying behaviour without becoming angry 1. honest d. determined not to change your mind, even when 2. generous people think you are being unreasonable 3. hospitable e. always wanting more food, money, power than you 4. sociable need 5. patient f. not liking work and physical activity, making no effort to do anything 6. stubborn 7. lazy g. willing to give money, spend time, in order to help 8. decisive people h. good at making decisions quickly and with 9. brave 10. intelligent confidence i. dealing with pain, or difficult situations with courage 11. greedy and confidence j. having a high level of mental ability, being good at understanding ideas and thinking clearly k. someone who always tells the truth and does not cheat or steal 4. Make up as m any sentences as you can using the table given below. The The The The The The

Tigers Rats Oxen Rabbits Dragons Snakes

are can be are not only

brave sociable greedy independent generous lazy calm honest

and but also

patient strong stubborn slow friendly decisive careful

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

LESSON 12 7. Use the given word lists to make up dialogues as it is given in the m odel. Model:

A: B:

What are your strengths? I am a hard-worker. I’m dependable. And I am always eager to learn new things. Are you a patient person? I try to be.

A: B:

strengths Are you...? honest hardworking reliable organized eager punctual flexible patient

\ ttM i y \------ — ■ — / ] lazy

weaknesses Is he / she...? dishonest unreliable disorganized indifferent tardv inflexible impatient

Focus on grammar! Adjective opposites: the prefixes u n i n - , d is-, im -, il-. Un-

In-

Dis-

fair

unfair

competent

incompetent

honest

dishonest

friendly

unfriendly

dependent

independent

loyal

disloyal

important

unimportant

direct

indirect

reliable

unreliable

flexible

inflexible

Im patient

impatient

mature

immature

UNIT I

MY FRIENDS

2. Make up dialogues using the tables given below. A:

mother father cousin friend I

is am

B: He are probably She is You

Rooster Monkey Tiger Dragon Horse according to Pig the Snake the Chinese horoscope Rabbit Dog Goat Rat Ox A: brave unsociable generous Yes, he are dishonest she is arrogant No, you isn’t slow aren’t stubborn careful sociable

3. Read the te x t and say w hether the sentences a fte r it are true o r false. C orrect the false one. Secrets of the Stars CAPRICORN (December 22-January 20) These people are very organized, patient, and hardworking. They are sometimes pessimistic. They are serious and are sometimes shy and quiet. They like to be alone. They don’t like sports. They don’t like new ideas. AQUARIUS (January 21-February 19) Aquarius people like modern life very much. They have many strange ideas. Aquarius people like to change or make things. They are sometimes rude, but they are romantic. Most Aquarius people are friendly. They like crowds. PISCES (February 20-March 20) Many Pisces people are moody and lazy. They are not good workers when the job doesn’t need imagination. They are not good businesspeople. They sometimes forget things.

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

ARIES (March 21-April 20) Aries people are impatient and aren’t careful. They are good leaders, but sometimes they may be boring. Some Aries people are rude. Aries people aren’t afraid and are never late. They walk fast and like dangerous sports. TAURUS (April 21-May 21) Taurus people like good food and comfortable things. They are patient, friendly and hospitable, but some Taurus people are stubborn and selfish. They are careful with money. They don’t like change. Taurus people are good gardeners and musicians. GEMINI (May 22-June 21) Gemini people are very curious and active. They like to travel. They are usually intelligent and modest, but very often they can be unfair and cruel. They are funny, but many Gemini people are moody. CANCER (June 22-July 23) Many Cancer people are nervous and afraid. They like to stay at home, and they don’t like to travel. They are good cooks but they don’t like to throw things out. They are rather kind and clever but sometimes may be selfish and arrogant. LEO (July 24-August 23) Leo people think they are wonderful. They love power. They are inventive. They aren’t shy. Leos are also generous and romantic. They like expensive restaurants. VIRGO (August 24-September 23) Virgos are impulsive and tidy. Some Virgos are not romantic, but they are honest. They are calm. Virgos remember small things. Many Virgos are intelligent and reliable, but often shy and deceitful. LIBRA (September 24-October 23) Libras are sociable and romantic. Some Libras are cold, unfriendly people. They aren’t selfish. They like art and dancing. They are fair and easy-going, but often impulsive and arrogant. SCORPIO (October 24-November 22) Scorpios are very strong, but they are also greedy and stubborn. They are hospitable but some Scorpios are cruel. Some Scorpios are very brave, but some Scorpios are dangerous. They are not honest. They don’t like to work with other people. SAGITTARIUS (November 23-December 21) They are brave and kind but may be rude and cunning. Sagittarians are impatient, but they are also generous. They are not careful with their money. They like to travel, sports, and hobbies played outside. 1. Pisces are very inventive. They can imagine a lot. 2. Gemini are anxious travellers. Their mood is very changeable. 3. Aquarius would rather be on his own. He doesn’t like the company. 4. Aries always try to follow other people’s instructions. They are very reasonable and cautious.

5. Capricorns enjoy working very much. But is is rather difficult to make them more optimistic.

UNIT I

MY FRIENDS

LESSON 13 1. How do you keep in touch with your friends? Read the texts and say what gadgets and modes o f communication these people use to interact with th e ir friends and family. Complete the ch a rt in your copy book. Mode of communication

Gadget

Sandra David Sally Nick Sally, 13 years old I don’t phone my friends, I always text them. My cousin texts me every evening. I also see my friends at weekends. We usually meet at the shopping centre. David, 14 years old I often write emails to my friends. Mobile phone bills are quite expensive nowadays, you know. My father pays for the Internet access, so emailing costs nothing for me. Jane, 41 years old For my thirteen-year-old daughter Sandra, her tablet is her lifeline. She spends two hours a day online. She listens to music and checks social networking sites for updates and messages four or five times an evening to keep in touch with friends. She can’t imagine a screen-free life. Nick, 13 years old I couldn’t survive a day without my phone. I surf the net and chat on Skype with my friends, both in my home town and pen friends from around the world. My cell phone is always with me.

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

2. Read the emails and p u t them in o rd e r. 1.

File

Edit

Message

Addresses j Attachments

Tools

Message

j Special

Window

Help

j Merge

To: Jane Subj: Saturday Date: Tue 27, Feb 2016

Save

Great! See you then! Victor

M File

Edit

Message

Addresses | Attachments

Tools

Message

] Special

Window

Help

j Merge

To: Victor, Subj: Saturday Date: ju e 27, Feb 2016

0 & Thanks for the email. I’d love to come but I can’t. Unfortunately, I’ve got a dentist’s appointment at eleven. Some other time maybe.

***

Sa*«

Jane 3.

LJ File Message

Edit

Addresses

JAttachments

Tools

Message

| Special

To: Victor, Subj: Saturday Date: ju e 27, Feb 2016

Window

T r im

Help

JMerge & <$>

Si»*

Hi Vic, That’s a good idea. I can meet you all outside the dentist’s then. By the way, Laura can come. Luckily, she hasn’t got her tennis class this Saturday. She lives near the dentist’s so she can meet us there. See you on Saturday! J

UNIT I

File

MY FRIENDS

Edit

Addresses

j Attachments

Message

Tools

Message

| Special

Window

Help

fi" X

| Merge

To: Jane Subj: Saturday Date: Tue 27, Feb 2016

4 <*>

Sav*

Jane, we don’t have to go there at eleven. We can go half an hour later. Actually, we could wait for you outside the dentist’s, if you like. By the way, can you call Laura? Maybe she wants to come with us too. Vic 5.

File

Edit

Message

Addresses

Tools

Message

| Attachments | Special

To: Jane Subj: Saturday Date: Tue 27, Feb 2016

Window

_ e x

Help

| Merge

Ss*«

Hi there Jane, Paul and I are going to a new amusement park on Saturday. My father can take us there at about eleven. How about coming with us? It’s not very expensive because there is a special offer for the first month. Anyway, send me a reply or phone me. Victor3 3. Work with your p a rtn e r. Use the instructions below to write emails and re p ly to h e r/ his notes. Use exercise 2 to help you. Pupil A: Pupil B: Pupil A: Pupil B:

Write an email to make arrangements for this weekend. Reply to your partner’s email invitation. You’d love to come but you can’t because you have got something important to finish. Reply and suggest another time or day. Reply and agree to go out with your partner.

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

4. Put the verbs in brackets into the Future indefinite tense form o r use be going to form. 1. Why have you set your alarm to go off at five-thirty? — Because I (get) up then. I have got a lot to do. 2. You look frozen. Sit down by the fire and I (make) you a cup of tea. 3. They’ve bought a rope and they (tow) the car to the garage. 4. My father hasn’t bought any cigarettes because he (give) up smoking. 5. I have tried to explain but she doesn’t understand English. — I (say) it to her in German: perhaps she’ll understand that. 6. I’ve come without any money. — Never mind, I (lend) you some. How much do you want? 7. There’s the phone again. Take no notice. — You (not answer) it? 5. Complete the sentences with c o rre c t indefinite pronouns and adverbs. Write the sentences in your copy book. 1. If you need some advice, a s k ___ here to help you. 2. There are nice people____ in the world. 3. I th ou g ht_____ knocked at the door, but when I opened it, ___ was there. 4. I didn’t do ___ yesterday because I was very tired. 5. Are you going ____ on your vacation? 6. D oes___ want to go to the cinema or to the theatre? 6. Complete the em ail with the words from the box. Anywhere, someone, something (2 times), anything (2 times), everywhere, no one ta

file

Edit

Addresses

Tools

Message

Window

Help

Hi, Kate! Are you doing______interesting on holidays? I am not going to d o _____special. My holidays are going to be really boring because_____in my family wants to travel, so we aren’t going_____ . Hey, remember Mark Steward? He’s going to d o ____really incredible on holidays! He’s going on a bungee jumping tour. I am serious - they go to a lot of different places where there’s bungee jum ping.___ says he’s crazy, but I’d like to d o ___like that. Well, I have to g o .___ is calling me. Talk to you soon, Linda.

UNIT I

MY FRIENDS

LESSON 14 REVISION LESSONS 7. Read the follow ing inform ation about d iffe re n t pen friends. 1. Mary, 24 years old, comes from Scotland and would like to find a pen friend who comes from East Europe. She likes playing the piano and listening to jazz music. She is interested in history but does not like discussing politics.

2. Kim Lee, 19 years old, comes from Seoul, South Korea. Kim loves travelling and hopes to visit Great Britain in the future. He would like to find a pen friend who is interested in discussing the differences between life in Europe and life in Asia. He loves listening to pop music and playing football in his free time.

3. Pietro, 42 years old, comes from Argentina. He is a businessman and would like to find a pen friend who is also a businessperson and lives in North America. He is married with three children and likes using the Internet in his free time.5

4. Helga, 33 years old, comes from Germany and speaks French, English and Russian. She would like to have a pen friend who is interested in exchanging ideas about language learning. She does not like using computers for learning and believes that language learning can only happen in a classroom.

5. Jennifer, 18, comes from Cardiff in Wales. She is interested in discussing the political differences between East Europe and the United Kingdom. She loves riding her horse, Jackie, and listening to jazz music.

6. Alessandro, 25 years old, comes from Rome. He is interested in finding a pen friend who speaks different languages and can exchange ideas on using the computer for learning purposes. He likes playing tennis and football in his free time.

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

2. Which pen friend (exercise 1) is b e st fo r these people? Choose ONLY ONE pen frie n d fo r each person. B. Tom Hendrix, 36, A. Piotrek Kowalski, 18, comes from Poland and is a businessman would like a pen pal from Toronto, Canada. who is interested He would like to find in discussing the current a pen pal from a political situation different continent in the world. He likes to discuss jazz and playing tennis in business practices his free time. and differences between his country and others. C. Olga, 32 years old, comes from Moscow, Russia. She is a historian and would like to find a pen pal who is interested in discussing the history of Russia before the communist regime. She is not interested in comparing different political systems.

D. Jack, 27, is from London. His favourite pastime is learning languages. He goes to evening German and French classes and uses his computer to improve his German and French by visiting Internet sites.

E. James, 22, is from Dublin. He loves travelling and wants to visit Asia in the near future and would like a pen pal who likes playing football and who can tell him about the differences between life in Asia and Ireland.

F. Ela, 35 years old, comes from Sydney, Australia. She likes learning languages, but does not like using modern technology. She is interested in finding a pen pal who also enjoys learning languages in a traditional manner.

UNIT I

MY FRIENDS

LESSON 15 7. Read the dialogue and a ct it o u t with your p a rtn e r. Victor: John: Victor: John: Victor: John: Victor: John: Victor: John: Victor:

Have you planned your vacations, Sam? Yes, I am leaving on Saturday. Where are you going? To an adventure summer camp in Lutsk. Wow! You are lucky. I have never been to an adventure summer camp. Would you like to come with me? Thanks. I’d love to, but I’m afraid I can’t. Why not? Have you got some other plans? No. I just think my parents will not let me go. I’ll try to talk to them. Moreover, it is not expensive. Thanks John. You are a good friend.

2. Use the inform ation and say what kind o f ch aracte r is typical fo r a person if: 1. 2. 3. 4.

She is a Horse and a Libra. He is a Dragon and a Sagittarius. She ia a Tiger and a Capricorn. He is a Pig and a Pisces.

3. Read the statem ents and say w hether they are true o r false . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

If your birthday is on April 1, you are an Aries. S2 fQ\ Leos are arrogant. Gemini people are serious. Virgos are honest. Pisces are born between 24 October and 22 November. Many Taurus people like to travel. A Sagittarius probably likes football. Aquarius people like swimming.

4. Put the verbs in brackets into the Future Indefinite o r the Present Continuous tense form with the future m eaning. 1. He (not forget) to come. 2. He [leave) in a few days. 3. I (remember) it. 4. If you drop that bottle it [break). 5. I never [forgive) him. 6. I’m sure that you [like) him. 7. You [see) a signpost at the end of the road. 8. He has cut my hair too short. — Don’t worry. It [grow) again very quickly. 9. You [understand) when you are older. 10. The cat [scratch) you if you pull its tail. 11.1 [be) back at eight o’clock. 12. If he doesn’t work hard he [not pass) his exam. 13. She

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

(go) on a cruise next summer. 14. lam sorry that the child saw the accident. — I don’t think it matters. He soon (forget) all about it.

5. Write an em ail to your frie n d to invite h im / h e r to your b irthday party. The plan given below w ill help you. Dear ..., Paragraph 1.

Greetings. Opening remarks. Reasons for writing.

Paragraph 2.

Give details about your party: the time, the guests you are going to invite, the food, decorations, music, clothes, location, things to do.

Paragraph 3.

Closing remarks. Best wishes,

6. You have received an em ail from your frie n d in which he / she invites you to his / h e r b irth da y party. Write a message in which you a cce p t / refuse the invitation. The phrases below w ill help you.7 Accepting the invitation

Refusing the invitation

Thanks for inviting me. I’d love to come. Expect me around 4 p.m.

Thanks, but I am afraid I can’t.

That sounds great! I’ll be there at about ...

I’d love to come, but I really can’t manage it. I’ve got ...

7. Say what zodiac and Chinese horoscope signs the m em bers o f your fam ily are. Then describe th e ir characters.

UNIT I

MY FRIENDS

LESSON 16 7. Read the dialogue and then a c t it o u t with yo ur p a rtn e r. Use the dictionary to learn the meaning o f the words in bold.

Postal Jane: Postal Jane: Postal Jane: Postal

clerk: clerk: clerk: clerk:

Jane: Postal clerk: Jane: Postal clerk: Jane:

Hi. How can I help you? I need to send this letter to Kyiv, How would you like to send it? I’m not sure it. What options are there? Well, you can send it air, special delivery, or courier. What’s the difference between each option? Let’s see. Special delivery to Kyiv is 10.95 pounds. And it takes from 2-4 days for delivery. Airmail is 2.95 pounds and takes anywhere from one week to ten business days for delivery. And if you need it there quickly, courier is probably your best option. That’s 35.95 pounds for guaranteed overnight delivery. So that’s 10.95 pounds for special delivery and it’ll take 2-4 days for delivery? That’s right. OK. I’ll do that. That’ll be 10.95 pounds then. Do you need someone to sign for it? No. That won’t be necessary.

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

2. Read the te x t and choose the b e st answ er to fill in the blanks. Say what the w rite r means b y “ a true frie n d ” . Is There Such a Thing as a True Friend? Such question is close to my heart and my 1_____ . When I was younger I didn’t know the answer to it. As I grew older I 2_____ a lot about friendship. In some magazine I’ve read that you could have about 350 friends in your 3_____ , but only five or six of them will be your true friends. Isn’t that right? When I look down the list of 4______ I have got on my mobile phone I see that most of the names are “friends’ names” . I am sure that any person can say the same about his or her 5_____ contacts list. But if you ask yourself a question - “Who would I call in case of a trouble?” - then you will 6_____ one or two people on the list you could ask for help. Only such people are true friends for me. They will be friends with you no 7_____ how much money you have got, how you look or what you do for a 8___ . They will run to help you even if they are extremely busy at that very moment. Have you got a true friend?3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

A A A A A A A A

brain learnt mealtime contracts mobile chose trouble living

B head B learn B lifetime B contacts B tablet B chosen B problem B career

C mind C learns C bedtime C figures C computer C choose C matter C job

D D D D D D D D

hat learnes playtime numbers gadget chosed meaning life

3. Say what ch aracte r tra its a true frie n d should possess. Give your reasons. There is a m odel to help you. Model:

A true friend should be reliable. He or she should keep his / her friend’s secrets. He should be “a friend in need”, not just a friend to gossip with. A true friend should ...

UNIT I

MY FRIENDS

4. Give words fo r the given definitions. Model:

Behaving in an unpleasant or rude way because you think you are more important than other people - arrogant

caring only about yourself, not about other people 2 able to tell lies in order to get what you want 3 not right or fair 4 embarrassed about meeting and speaking to other people 5 wanting to know about something 6 friendly and enjoying the company of other people 7 able to wait calmly for a long time or to accept difficulties, people’s annoying behaviour without becoming angry 8 determined not to change your mind, even when people think you are unreasonable 9 not liking work and physical activity, making no effort to do anything 10 good at making decisions quickly and with confidence5 6 5. Give the opposites fo r the adjectives given below. Then make up five sentences o f your own with there adjectives. Model:

unreliable - reliable; sad - merry.

Dishonest, unsociable, greedy, modest, hard-working, impatient, inhospitable, indecisive, fair, selfless. 6. Imagine you are looking fo r a pen friend. Write an advert about yo u rse lf as a p o te n tia l pen friend. Include the inform ation about yo ur age, education, hobbies and interests. Invite people to w rite to you. Use exercise 1 and 2, lesson 14, to help you.

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

LESSON 17 1. Read “ the words o f wisdom” about friends and friendship. Which statements do you agree with? Which do you not agree with? 1.“In life we never lose friends, we only learn who the TRUE ones are”. 2. “Fake friends are like shadows: they follow you in the sun, but leave you in the dark”. 3. “Good friends care for each other, close friends understand each other, but only true friends stay forever, beyond words, beyond distance, beyond time” . 4. “True friends say good things behind your back and bad things to your face”. 2. Complete the sentences with the correct indefinite o r negative pronouns. The first sentence is the m odel to help you. 1. Are you doing anything tonight? 2. Do you know ____ who speaks Italian? I want to learn this language. 3. I m e t____ interesting last week. 4. Look! There is ___ _ strange in your soup. 5. What did you do last night? - ___ interesting. 6. Where did you go yesterday? - I didn’t g o ____ . I stayed at home. 7. Have you fo u n d ___ interesting for the topic in the Internet? There w a s ___ interesting, but not much, I’m afraid. 8. . Open the door. There is ___ waiting outside. - Well, there is ___ there. At least I couldn’t s e e ____ . 3. Look a t th e p ic tu re s a n d s a y w hich ch aracte r adjectives they represent. Model: - reliable

UNIT I

MY FRIENDS

4. Read the words in the box and discuss th e ir meaning with your p a rtn e r. Then use the words from the box to com plete the te xt (there are m ore words than you need). ( -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------\

Mobile phone, body language, computer network, email, blog, face-toface conversation, intranet, micro-blog, netbook, postal service, instant messaging, sign language, texting (sms), landline telephone, smart phone, telegraph, tablet

\ ____________________________ 1____________________________/ 900 BC

Early postal service in China. Horse riders carry messages on horses.

1874

A.Bell has the first successful

1969

The first computer links universities in the United States. People send the first . The message explains how to use the @ symbol. Motorola makes their first . It measures 25 centimetres x 8 centimetres. People invent . You can now chat with your friends on your computer. The site Twitter starts. A message can’t be longer than 140 characters. Apple launches the first with a touch screen. Bigger than a smartphone but smaller than a netbook, it doesn’t have a keypad.

1972 1983 1996 2006 2010

5. Use the friendship.

m ind map below to

conversation.

speak about friends

and

MY FRIENDS

UNIT I

6. P roject w ork. Work in groups o f fo u r o r five. A school in B ritain o r the USA has asked you to design an English language website o f yo ur school. Look a t the web page about G uilford High School (h ttp ://g h s .g u ilfo rd s c h o o ls .o rg /). ^

D istrict

A tx w t O ur School

Academics

Parents A S tudents

Teaching A I earning

C ontact Us

PowerSchool Dining Services Gl IS Athletics Music Department Theatre Arts School Counseling Health Services Media Center Mentoring Program New Guilford High School

UPCOMING EVENTS •

TA Rehearsal Date: Today Location: Auditorium

NEWS & ANNOUNCEMENTS GHSFilm Club P rem ie r- "O ne" - Friday, January 15th

PRINCIPAL'S CORNER **The mission o f Guilford High School Is to focus on learning In a

a. Answer the questions given below. Who wrote the web page about Guilford High School? What kind of information does it give? What kind of links are there on the web page? What information is missing? b. Think about your school. Decide what kind of information you want to write about your school on the home page. Make notes. c. Decide what links you want to have for your web page. Make a list and then write notes for each link. d. Decide what pictures you want to have on your website and how you will organize the texts, pictures and links. e. Design the website of your school.

LESSON 18 (OPTIONAL)

/^//////////////

M li !

ixxxxxxxxxx;

IP « iP

HEALTHY LIFESTYLE :

LESSON 19 1. Work in sm all groups. Prepare a food survey questionnaire fo r the class p ro je c t “ How H ealthy We A re ” . Ask about the following things: 1) person’s favourite food; 2) how much they eat every day. The sample questions may be the following: How much water do you drink every day? / How many bottles of water do you drink every day? How often do you eat sweets? Then report the results of your survey to the class. Use Grammar Review to help you.2 Grammar Review Use in a ffirm a tiv e s ta te m e n ts

Use in n e g a tiv e s ta te m e n ts

Use in q u e s tio n s

a little / a few / a lot of / some

much / many / any

O n ly use w ith c o u n ta b le nouns

O n ly use w ith u n c o u n ta b le nouns

Use w ith c o u n ta b le o r u n c o u n ta b le no un s

a few / few /many

a little / little / much

any / a lot of / some

2. Listen to the dialogue and com plete the table with the underlined words. A c t o u t the dialogue with your partner. Linda:

Brenda: Linda: Brenda: Linda: Brenda: Linda: Brenda: Linda:

You know, preparing the questions for the survey makes me think about the way and the food I eat. Maybe I need to make some changes. I don’t think I eat many vegetables. I should probably eat more food. Me too. I eat a lot of bananas. They are my favourite. I don’t think I drink enough water. How much do you drink? Three or four glasses a day. Do you think it’s enough? I don’t think so. You should increase to at least six or seven glasses. What about milk? Do you drink any milk? I do. I usually drink a glass of milk every morning. Do you eat any meat? Yes, I eat a little meat - I’m not a vegetarian, but I don’t eat any junk food. You know pizza, snacks, chips and stuff like that. Do you? I love pizza! I know it’s bad for my health. I sometimes buy potato chips, not often definitely.

HEALTHY LIFESTYLE

Brenda:

UNIT II

Linda, you should really make some changes in your eating habits.

Countable nouns Uncountable nouns 3. Complete the questions with how much / how many. 1. __________ slices of pizza do you eat for lunch? 2. ___________ pizza do you eat for lunch? 3. ____________ tea do you drink every week? 4. ___________ bottles of milk do you drink every month? 5. __________ sugar do you put in your tea? 6. __________ teaspoons of sugar do you put in your tea? 7. __________ cups of cocoa do you drink a day? 4. Complete the sentences with the correct expression in the brackets. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

I’d like ________ tea, please. Would you like ______ apple pie? I don’t eat _______ sweets. I don’t drink _______ water. My cousin doesn’t eat _______ meat. Linda, would you like _______ chips?

(a little / a few) (a little / a few) (much / many) (much / many) (some / any) (a little / a few)

5. Read the statements and guess whether they are true or false. Then read the text and check your answers. 1. Too much sun can be really dangerous. 2. People with dark don’t need sunscreen. 3. You don’t need sunscreen on a cloudy day. 4. The sun causes damage by ultraviolet rays. Everyone might agree that it’s healthy to have a suntan. Is it really healthy? The answer is — No! A tan looks beautiful, but all that sun can be very harmful to your health. Too much sun can make your skin dry and look ugly or even worse — it can cause skin cancer. You should put some sunscreen to protect your skin if you’re going to stay in the sun for a longer period of time. Many people believe that only blonds need to protect their skin. It’s true that light skin is more sensitive to the sun, but it is also true that all types of skin can suffer from too much sun. People also think they don’t need sunscreen on a cloudy day. This is wrong. The dangerous ultraviolet rays can pass through the clouds. So, be careful when you are going to lie in the sun.

: : : : : : : : : : : : : y . y y y > X X X y . X X X lV A lt lt tilt iU K i :::y .y.y.y.y .y .y .y .y .:-

:<:-c

::: i : j :: : x x x x x x ::j :}: x x x x x x x x > x x x x x x x x x x x x j c c j u

m xxxxxxxxx:* XXXXXXXXXXXXIXXJ ::2: j : s:;: x x x x x x > x x x x x x x x x x :;x :t:t:i:i

4444//////W W A V A V k W N V V V % 4 \4 4 4

x>:>:x>:>:>:>:xxxxxxxxx:*x:*:*:{ >:>:>:>:xxxxxxxxxxx:<xxx2<:«:< >:>:>:>:>:xxxxxxxxxxxxxx:<xx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Focus on Grammar M odals: should, m ight, could We use "should” to make recommendations or give advice. We can also use it to express obligation. Examples: When you go to Berlin, you should visit the palaces in Potsdam. People with high cholesterol should eat low-fat food. - recommendation You should focus more on your healthy habits. You really should start eating better. Your brother shouldn’t smoke. It’s not good for his health. advice I should be in the school by 9:00 AM. You shouldn’t eat before swimming. - obligation / prohibition We use "m ight" to express possibility. We can also use "might" to make suggestions or requests. Examples: Your English book might be in the living room. She might not be in the kitchen. I saw her in the living room a few minutes before. - possibility You might eat more fruit if you want to improve your lifestyle. You might try the cheesecake. - suggestion Might I borrow your pen? Might I have something to drink? - request We use "could" to express possibility or past ability as well as to make suggestions and requests. Examples: Much fat in the food you eat could cause high blood pressure. possibility Linda could ski very well by the age of 11. - past ability You could eat more fruit and vegetables if you want to lose weight. - suggestion Could I use your computer to email my friend? - request

6. Read the te x t in exercise 5 and the dialogue in exercise 2 and fin d the m odal verbs there. Say what meaning they express. Use Focus on Grammar box to help you. 7. Writing. Write the questions you have p repared fo r the class p ro je c t “ How Healthy We A re ” in your copy book. Then w rite the results o f the survey. There is a m odel to help you. Model:

Question 1: How much water do you drink a day? Survey results: 13 out of 18 pupils in my class have said they usually drink three glasses of water every day. The rest 5 pupils drink more than three glasses every day.

.......

i SSNUSWAWAV//////////

v!v/Xv!vi;!y!v

^.;.nssww • . XvXv////////// f/////W/jVVVW%SS<<WS^

HEALTHY LIFESTYLE »»MM«««««

8f«8£W K&»H

LESSON 20 Are you a live wire or a couch potato? 1. Look a t the title o f this lesson. What do expressions “ a live w ire ” and “ a couch p o ta to ” mean? Use the dictio na ry and the pictures to help you. Which expression would you use to characterize yourself? Give your reasons.

2. Read the statem ents and s o rt them o u t into two groups: “ a live wire gro up ” and “ a couch p o ta to gro up ” . Find the sentences which express the future actions. Explain why we should use the given gram m ar phenomena in each situation. 1. I am going to walk for more than half an hour today. 2. I’m going to spend this weekend lying on a beach and doing nothing. 3. I’m going to play football today. I am not going to watch football on TV today. 4. I’m not planning to get up before ten tomorrow. 5. I’m going to play tennis this weekend. 6. I’d like to spend more time in bed than I normally do. 7. I am going to take a lift, I’m not going to walk up a flight of stairs. 8. I’m planning to go skiing sometime this year. 9. I’m going to spend most of this evening in front of a TV/computer screen. 10. I’d like to climb a mountain or go on a cycling holiday one day. 11. I’m going to buy a more comfortable sofa when I have enough money. 12. I’m going to watch a new soap opera and eat more biscuits tonight.

3. Read the rules fo r the swimming pool and match them with the signs. Safe swimming 1. 2. 3.

Take a shower before you enter the pool. Don’t eat before swimming. It can lead to stomach cramps or might drown. Call the lifeguards if you get into trouble.

you

uu\uv!vXvX;.v^///j

iVVAVivIv.*/.'//////

SÏKÎÏSSÏSÏHgj

........

f/Z/AVAVASSWi«

ivlvlviviv.'!*///// f

...........

,•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•.•

•.•.•.•.-,

kïïîSvIwSKw///

v .w ,

.*.*.*

.............

Pay attention to the signs which say “No diving!” . Don’t dive in such areas. Don’t jump in the way of dive-bombing. You might put the other swimmers in danger. Don’t wear outdoor boots in the pool. Don’t run around in the pool. The surface is wet and you might slip and fall.

5. 6. 7.

4. Read the rules in exercise 3 and change them as in the m odel. Then w rite down a ll the m odal verbs from the text. Explain what they express. Model:

Don’t play or run around in the pool. The surface is wet and you might slip and fall. - You shouldn’t play or run around in the pool. Make sure you know where the lifeguards are. - You should make sure you know where the lifeguards are.

5. Writing an essay. S ort o u t the linking expressions in the c o rre c t paragraph. in my opinion, in the first place, however, on the other hand, to sum up, generally speaking, in addition, on the one hand, moreover, on the whole, to begin with, in conclusion, in my view, for instance, although, furthermore Introduction Giving one side of the topic: Adding ideas: Giving the other side of the topic: Giving examples: Conclusion:

Generally speaking, In the first place, In my opinion,

.............

/////////^/////#

11111111 \SNNN>NW\\>

;;• ;•■• ...

^s\\\sv.v!v!v.v;v//////>

r////////w/XvX'Xv! % ■!% \\\ % v

......... r///////w.v.v.v.v.wss\\

r***f

i\NvX*XvXvXv/ ' ■>>XvXv!v!v;

mmm

::::::::

^ /////////////

lllllll 6 . Do you p re fe r to p la y com puter games o r sports in your free tim e? Why? Read the essay on the topic “ Video games are a waste o f tim e ” and p u t the paragraphs in ord er. Then fill in the blanks with the c o rre c t expression from exercise 5. A. _____, there are advantages and disadvantages to playing video games, similar to everything else in our life. The answer is to use your games console in a reasonable way. B. _____ , all young people enjoy playing on their games consoles. In each game there’s a challenge, which encourages you to get on the next level and w in ._______, people say that such games increase a person’s mental ability because a player needs to react quickly to changing situations. C . ____ , video games such as PlayStation, Nitendo and others aren’t a waste of time. Many people,_____ , might not agree with this statement. That’s why I am going to look at both sides of the question. D. ______ , it’s true that children shouldn’t spend many hours in front of the screen, because the eyes get tired, and the body needs exercise, especially when you are a teenager.______ , games consoles or TV sets shouldn’t be in a child’s bedroom. ______ , I’ve got mine in the living room where I can’t play for hours.

7. Write a sh o rt essay to answer the question “Are m obile phones a good invention?” The follow ing ideas m ight help you. o o o

o o o

Ideas “for” the mobile phones: The mobile phone is a quick and easy way to communicate with other people Mobile phones are very flexible: you can use them to send messages and photos, as well as talk to someone Mobile phones are more personal than emails because you can hear the person you are talking to Ideas “against" the mobile phones: Mobile phones produce harmful waves that can damage your health Expensive mobile phones attract the thieves; so you might become a victim of some criminals The mobile phone can cause addiction to playing computer and online games in young people

X-XviviviyXX

LESSON 21 How healthy is your lifestyle? 1. Answ er the questions o f the questionnaire to fin d o u t how healthy your life style is. Compare your answers with yo ur p a rtn e r and say who leads a healthier life style : you o r your p a rtn e r. 1. What kind of drink do you usually have? a. sweet fizzy drinks b. tea or cocoa c. fruit juice or water 2. How many portions of fruit and vegetables do you eat every day? a. fewer than three b. three or four c. five or more 3. Which of these things do you do? a. smoke cigarettes b. spend time in smoky rooms c. can’t go near cigarette smoke 4. How many times a week do you do physical exercise? a. never b. once or twice c. three times or more 5. How many hours do you sleep at night? a. under 5 b. 5 to 7 hours c. 8 or more hours Point calculator: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

a a a a a

= 0 points b = 0 points c = 5 points = 1 point b = 3 points c = 5 points = -20 points b = - 5 points c = 5 points = - 5 points b = 2 points c = 5 points = - 5 points b = 2 points c = 5 points

Less than 0 points - think how to change your lifestyle and improve it! 0-10 points - not bad but you should change some things! 11-20 - your lifestyle is healthy but think about how to improve it! 21 -25 - well done!

^ / .v X v !v i;!v !v !

.......... ^/////////XvX'XvIvXssiiu r///////////.;.;.v.v.v.;.y.s\\\\

XyX\s,Is\ssv\\

I! S P IIH

2 . Look a t the results o f yo u r answers to the questions in exercise 1 and make conclusions about the changes you should make to improve yo ur lifestyle. There is a m odel to help you. Model: The results of the questionnaire show that I should change a lot of things in my life. First of all, I should drink more water or fruit juice. I should cut on drinking sweet fizzy drinks. Secondly, I should.... 3. Listen to the dialogue and a c t it o ut with your partner. Make sure you know the meaning o f the words in bold type. Use the d ictio na ry i f necessary. Linda: Victor: Linda: Victor: Linda: Victor: Linda: Victor:

Linda:

You're really fit, Victor. Do you exercise very much? Well, I almost always get up very early, and I do aerobics for an hour. You're kidding!!! No. And then I often go rollerblading. Wow!! How often do you exercise like that? About five times a week. What about you? Oh, I hardly ever exercise. I usually just watch TV in my free time. I guess I'm a real couch potato!!! Well, I used to be the same but then I had some serious health problems and the doctor advised me to take up regular exercise. Now I don’t have any health problems. I’ll probably follow your example. Otherwise I am going to have serious health problems in the nearest future.4

4. Look a t the picture. Say what the tim e is and what the people are doing a t this time. There is a m odel to help you. Then say what kind o f a life style the Wilsons are leading. Model:

Today is Monday. It’s 7 p.m. and the Wilsons are at home. Mr. Wilson is watching TV. Mrs. Wilson is...

5. Use the p ictu re in exercise 4. Imagine th a t today is Tuesday. Look a t the p ictu re and read the text. Then read the Focus on Grammar box. Today is Tuesday. Yesterday was Monday. At 7 p.m. yesterday the Wilsons were at home. When I entered the room Mr. Wilson was watching TV. Mrs. Wilson was knitting and the children were playing: Tom was playing a computer game and Carol was playing with her mobile phone. Their cat was sleeping on the sofa. Focus on grammar?

6. Make up as m any sentences as you can using the table given below. Write your sentences in the copy book. He She We They 1

was were

playing watching reading skating talking

a newspaper in the yard with friends on the skating rink a game the guitar

at 10 pm yesterday at 8 am yesterday at 4 pm yesterday

:::::::::

/<•/////////#/##«.

l;X;Xi ni\%l|l l l i l

LESSON 22 1. Listen to the dialogue and do the quiz a fte r it. A c t o u t the dialogue with your p a rtn e r and then make up a sim ilar one. Judy: Tom: Judy: Tom: Judy: Tom: Judy: Tom:

You exercise a lot, don’t you, Tom? Yes, I work out at least three times a week. What kind of exercise do you do? I lift weights in the gym and swim in the pool. And sometimes I go jogging after school. I don’t exercise at all, but I’d like to start. What kind of exercise should I do? Well, what do you like? I like walking. That’s exercise, isn’t it? It sure is! And it’s a good way to start! 1. Tom exercises______ a week. a. less than three times b. three times or more 2. He____ at the gym. a. swims b. goes jogging c. lifts weights 3. Judy wants t o _____ exercising. a. begin b. stop 4. She asks if walking is _____ . a. good for her b. a type of exercise Focus on Grammar Past Continuous: interrogative and negative forms

Affirmative When Linda met Victor he was exercising in the gym. They were watching TV at 7 p.m. yesterday.

Interrogative Was Victor exercising in the gym when Linda met him? What was Victor doing in the gym when Linda met him? Who was exercising in the gym when Linda came there? Were they watching TV at 7 p.m. yesterday? What were they watching at 7 p.m. yesterday?

Negative Victor wasn’t exercising in the gym when Linda met him. They were not watching TV at 7 p.m. yesterday.

iccciii-iii .....

...

2. Read the sentences. Make up questions and negative sentences. Then p u t questions to the underlined words o r word combinations. 1. Jim was playing the piano when I came in. 2. They were telling jokes when the teacher asked them to answer her question. 3. At 5 he was playing football. 4. We were watching TV when his cousin from France called. 5. I was having a bath when the telephone rang. 6. He was sleeping when somebody knocked at the door. 3. I f you have g o t an em barrassing sto ry to share with som ebody w rite on this blog. Nobody is going to laugh a t you. Read the stories and w rite down the sentences in the Past Simple and Past Continuous tense form s. Say what kind o f action they express. Use Focus on Grammar boxes. s -------------------------------------------------------------------- \ Last Saturday my friend and I were waiting at a supermarket checkout when a boy outside started waving at me. I wasn’t sure who he was, but I smiled and waved back. My friend asked, “Who’s that?” and I said casually, “Oh, just a friend”. Then a girl behind me suddenly shouted, “Oh, hi!” and she ran over to him. They were obviously good friends. I felt really stupid with a silly smile on my face.

G P

Last Friday I went to the gym and exercised quite a lot there. So by A the end of my work out I felt really tired. I decided to go to the cafeteria to have some juice and cool down a little. I took a glass of fresh orange juice and a packet of dough-nuts to get some calories. I also bought my favourite magazine to read while I was cooling down. Then a girl came in the cafeteria and sat at my table. It surprised me a little because there were many vacant tables there. She took some coffee and a packet of dough nuts as well. I tried not to pay attention and opened my magazine. Then I started eating the dough nuts. As I was eating the girl in front of me was staring at me with some kind of angry look. Then she suddenly stood up and ran out of the cafeteria. I took one more dough nut and then decided it was time to go home. I folded the magazine and there under it was my packet of dough nuts. I felt awful.

: : : : : : : » :-j >î >j: o: c: c; c: c: c: c: c:

r//////XvX;XvIv!

m tmmamm r////wXvlvXv!vX^ r/W/WWA%%%%NW

iV / / / f / f w . V . V . V . V t V . W i j .............. •••■•■•■•• f// //// /W / .V .V .V . V A N % \V

4. Complete the sentences with the Past Simple o r Past Continuous o f the verb in bra ckets. l/Vr/fe the sentences in your copy book. 1. I broke (break) a glass while I was washing up (wash up). 2. When J a c k _____ (introduce) me to his friend, h e _____(forget) my name. 3. The ch a ir____ (break ) when Sally________ (sit) down. 4. While P eter______ (walk) to school, h e _____ (see) he was wearing different socks. 5. As T o m ____ (answer) the teacher’s questions his tablet ____ (produce) a strange sound. 6. As th e y _____(walk) under the tree the a p p le _____ (fall) down from the tree. 5. Say which situation m ight be the m ost em barrassing fo r you. Give your reasons. o o o o o

You forgot someone’s name You break something in your friend’s house You wear the wrong clothes to a party At your friend’s party you see somebody in the same clothes you are wearing Your phone rings in the cinema or the theatre.

6. Choose one o f the em barrassing situations from exercise 5 (or rem em ber the one th a t happened to you) and make up a sto ry sim ilar to those m entioned in the blog in exercise 3. Use the Past Simple and Past Continuous tense form s. Tell your sto ry to the classm ates. S tart as in the model. Model:

My most embarrassing moment was when I was ....

LESSON 23 1. Read the dialogue and a ct it out with your p artn e r. Then say whether the statem ents given a fte r it are true o r false. Correct the false ones. Receptionist: Linda: Receptionist: Linda: Receptionist: Linda: Receptionist: Linda: Receptionist: Linda: Receptionist: Linda: Receptionist: Linda:

Good morning. Steel City Leisure Centre. How can I help you? Can you give me some information about swimming please? Yes, of course. What time does the swimming pool open? Weekdays or weekends? Weekends. We open from 10 am to 9 pm on a Saturday and from 10 am to 7 pm on a Sunday. Ok. Is there anything special for children? Yes. There is a fun pool with wave machine and flumes (водні гірки). Is it good for non-swimmers? Yes. We have a learners’ pool if the children can’t swim at all. How much does it cost? It’s $ 4 for adults and $2,5 for children over five. Under-fives are free. But there is also a family ticket, $9,5 for two adults and two children. That’s good. Thanks for help.

1. Linda wants to know about swimming pool opening hours for weekdays. 2. There is a nice swimming pool for children at Steel City Leisure Centre, but only for good children swimmers. 3. The wave machine doesn’t operate at the swimming pool. 4. The families of four can save their money when they buy a family ticket. It is much cheaper than separate tickets for every member of a family.

2. Read the sentences and com plete them with was o r w ere. At 10 am yesterday: 1. My siste r____ sleeping. 2. My parents____ watching TV. 3. My grandmother____ working in her garden. 4. Jack and Linda____ talking on the phone. 5. Y ou ____ listening to music. 6. W e ____ doing our lessons. 7. My brother_____ playing tennis. 8. Our frie n ds____ reading a book.3

3. Read the questions to a magazine and try to answer them. Then read the e x p e rt’s answers and m atch them with the questions. How many c o rre c t answers did you give?

,to look at the

f y ô X sS z eat

J ^ ^ e i t . W h o is n î Z 1 VW SpO»

_____________ ____ “T 4. Does

-------

your eyesight? P °oory°oCaf *ith

^et

eyes?

S-------------- " \ • 7. | listen to music on my MP3 player. Can this damage my ears? y

a. Well, have you ever seen a rabbit wearing glasses? But seriously, no. Carrots are good for healthy eyes because they are rich in vitamin A. However, eating a lot of carrots will not improve your eyesight. b. Yes, it can. Just fifteen minutes of loud music can cause hearing problems. If you are wearing headphones and people around you can hear the music, then the volume is too high. c. No. Getting very cold and wet can affect your immune system but cold weather doesn’t cause colds: viruses cause them. You can catch some in unhealthy places with crowds of people. d. It’s quite embarrassing for young people but it’s quite normal to get spots. Stop eating chocolates for some time and see if it makes any difference. Eat more fruit and vegetables every day. They will give you vitamin C which is good for your skin. e. Fish contains a fat which people call omega-3. It is really good for your brain. There is some doubt if eating fish can improve your intelligence but it’s generally healthy to eat fish at least twice a week. f. No, it isn’t. Good news for TV addicts. But don’t sit in an uncomfortable position and close to the screen - it can cause headaches. Also don’t watch TV for more than ten hours a week, because you’ll be unfit and will get impatient and tired at school. Focus on Grammar Modal verb WILL The verb will is a modal verb. We use it: o

to talk about or predict the future. Example: You’ll be in time if you hurry. You'll be unfit if you eat too much chocolate.

to ask somebody to do something - as a request. Example: Will you send this letter for me, please? You’ll water the plants while I ’m away, won’t you?

to order somebody to do something - as an order. Example: You’ll do it this minute! Will you be quiet! m:*:>:>:xxxxxx: m:>:>:>:xxxxxx: hnxxxxxxxxx: xxxxxxxxxxx:

‘. \ W . *.•.•.•.■.•........................

sm hm

LIFESTYLE

4. Find m odal WILL in the texts in exercise 3 and say what it expresses in each situation. Make up 5 sentences o f your own with the m odal WILL to show a ll its uses. Use Focus on Grammar to help you. 5. Read the texts in exercise 3 and make up a lis t o f the things you should and shouldn’t do to lead a healthy lifestyle. Model: I should eat more carrot. It contains a lot of vitamin A. I shouldn’t watch TV for more than 10 hours a week. Otherwise I will be unfit.

6. Give the antonym s to the words given below. Remember some other words which have their opposites with the prefixes un-, im-, in-, ir-, H-. Make up sentences with the words you have provided. Write your sentences in yo ur copy book. Unhealthy, uncomfortable, unfit, impatient

71 / I

LESSON 24 You Are What You Eat 1. a) Linda calls the theme park (парк з атракціонами) fo r inform ation about opening tim es and prices b u t she gets a re co rd ed m essage. Listen to the firs t p a rt o f the message and answ er the questions. b) Listen to the second p a rt o f the message and make notes about opening tim es and prices. Part 1. Welcome to Dervent Dale Theme Park information line. If you have a star key on your telephone, please press it twice now. For information about opening hours and prices, please press 1. To book tickets, please press 2. For information about overnight accommodation, please press 3. For all other queries, please press 4. 1. Which key must she press first and how many times? 2. What number must she press to hear the opening times and prices? Part 2. The Theme Park is open 10 a.m. to 11 p.m. every day from the 1st of May to the 31st of October, and from 10 a.m. to 7 p.m. between November and April, excluding Christmas Day and Boxing Day. The price for an adult is $12,5 and $7,95 for a child under twelve. There is no reduction for under-fives and all children must be paid for. There is a family ticket for $35 which admits a family of four. 2. Read the tongue tw isters as quickly as you can and learn them. Luke’s duck likes lakes. Luke Luck licks lakes. Luke’s duck licks lakes. Duck takes licks in lakes Luke Luck likes. Luke Luck takes licks in lakes duck likes. There those thousand thinkers were thinking how did the other three thieves go through. 3. Make up questions using the Past Simple o r the Past Continuous tense form. 1. A: What/ the students/ do/ when/ the fire bell/ ring? - What were the students doing when the fire bell rang? B: They were having their lunch. A: What/ they/ do? B: They call the fire brigade and left the building. 2. A: it/ rain/ when/ you/ get/ off the train? B: Yes, it was. It was terrible. K K X xxx» :t:i:ii

x x x x x x x x : i:t:i K>:xxxxxx:t:i

хххххххххііш

A: B: 3. B: A: B:

What/ you/ do? I ran home fast. A: Where/ you be/ when/ you/ get/ my text message? I was at home. What/ you/ do? I was exercising in the gym.

4. Look a t the pictures and m atch them with the words from the box. 1

a. sugar

b. cereals

c. fats

d. proteins

e.vitamins

5. Complete the sentences with the words from exercise 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Fruit and vegetables contain m any______ . Meat has got a lot o f ______ . I know I shouldn’t put m uch_____ in my tea or coffee. I usually have ____ with milk for my breakfast. Dark bread is rich in _____ . The food that contains a lot o f ____ can cause high blood pressure.

6. Answ er the questions. Write the answers in your copy book. 1. What food do you like? What food do you hate? 2. How many meals a day do you usually have? 3. Where and what time do you usually have your breakfast? What does your typical breakfast consist of? 4. Do you eat snacks? What does your typical snack contain? 5. What do you do for health? How often do you see a doctor?

LESSON 25 Addiction - Watch Out! 1. Read the dialogue. A c t it o u t in pairs. Find the sentences with the Past Continuous tense form . Make them interrogative and negative. Buggy: Jane: Buggy: Jane: Buggy: Jane:

Did you have a good time yesterday? Yes. I enjoyed the party very much. Everyone was so excited. What did you do at the party? Well, it began at four o ’clock but I came later. When I came the guests were dancing. Then at about 7 o’clock we were playing different games. Did Jack play his violin? Yes, he was playing the violin when the telephone rang. It was his cousin from France. So he didn’t finish his playing.

2. Look a t the m ind map and say what these problem s m ight cause. Model: Addiction to watching TV can cause overweight problems and then a person will get unfit. Computer addicts usually spend too much time in front of the screen. This can cause...

3. L e t’s play a board game. Find the question you have to discuss b y rolling your dice twice. Answer the question and pass the dice to the pupil on your left. The next pupil should do the same. 1. Talk on what influences a person’s health

2. What kinds of 3. What do you prefer: fast food physical activities or homemade should you do to food? Why? improve your health? 8. What activities 7. Name 5 steps 6. What kind of to a healthy do you do after food do you eat for dinner? Is it lifestyle? classes? Are they healthy? healthy? 0. How long should 11. Is smoking a 9. Is it important to drink water? healthy habit? i person sleep at Why? Why or why not? rlight to feel \lealthy? 16. How much time should a child spend in front of a TV or a computer every day?

15. What kind of addiction do you know?

4. How can 1people avoid £ addiction to ccomputers or rnobile phones?

4. Is it better to climb the stairs or to use a lift? 5. Why do some people become addicted? 12. What health problems does fast food lead to? 3. Does your family follow a \lealthy lifestyle /and how?

4. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Simple o r Past Continuous tense form. 1. My mother called me around five. My brother came home a little after that. When he (come) home, I (talk) to my mother on the phone. 2. While I (study) last night, Fred (drop by) to visit me. 3. As I (cross) the road I (step) on a banana skin and (fall) heavily. 4. Yesterday afternoon I (go) to visit the Parker family. When I (get) there around two o’clock, Mrs. Parker (be) in the yard. She (plant) flowers in her garden. Mr. Parker (be) in the garage. He (work) on their car. He (change) the oil. The children (play) in the front yard. In other words, while Mr. Parker (fix) the oil in the car, the children (play) with a ball in the yard.

Ill

5. Use the m ind map to speak about a healthy life style .

6. In your copy book w rite 8 -9 sentences to give advice on how to lead a healthy life s ty le . Exercise 7. Do you know idiom s about health and fitness? Read the idiom s and try to guess th e ir meaning b y m atching them with th e ir explanations. Give Ukrainian equivalents fo r these expressions. back on your feet an extremely thin person bag of bones have feelings of deep sadness or depression full of beans able to eat all sorts of food and drink without any indigestion, discomfort or bad effects physically healthy again after an illness or an feel blue accident. cast iron stomach lively, active and healthy clean bill of health in an excellent state of health or physical condition. look extremely healthy fit as a fiddle look the picture of a report or certificate declaring that the health is satisfactory health Exercise 8. Fill in the blanks with the idiom s from exercise 7. My grandfather is nearly ninety but he's a s _____ . Nice to see you again Mr. Brown. I must say you_____ . My grandmother had a bad ’flu but she's_____ again. I'm going to see my grandmother. She's recently____. He may be getting old but he's still____ . When he came home from the war he was____ . All candidates for the position must produce a _____ . I don’t know how you can eat that spicy food. You must have a

LESSON 26 1. Complete the sentences with the co rre ct form o f the verb to be. 1. T h e y ____ cleaning the room when their mother came home from work. 2. I ____ sleeping when somebody knocked at the door. 3. We ____ doing physical exercises at 5 o’clock yesterday. 4. She ____ playing the piano at this time yesterday. 5. You _____ watching TV when your brother came home. 6. Yesterday at 10 o’clock in the evening h e ____ sleeping. 2. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Simple o r Past Continuous tense form. 1. Sally ______ (eat) dinner yesterday at 5 p. m. when somebody _______(knock) at the door. 2. I began to study at 4 p. m. yesterday. Fred _____ (come) at four thirty. I (study) when Fred ___ _ (come). 3. When I ____ (come) in th e y ____ (sit) around the table. Mr. Scott _____ (do) a crossword puzzle, Mr. Scott ____ (read) a newspaper. 4. When the b a b y ______ (wake up) his m o th e r_____ (sit) in the arm-chair. 5. At 6:00 p.m. Bob sat down at the table and began to eat. At 6:05 Bob (eat) dinner. While Bob (eat) dinner, Ann (come) through the door. In other words, when Ann (come) through the door, Bob (eat) dinner. Bob went to bed at 10:30. At 11:00 Bob (sleep). While Bob (sleep), the phone (ring). In other words, when the phone (ring), Bob (sleep). Bob left his house at 8:00 a.m. and (begin) to walk to class. While he (walk) to class, he (see) Mrs. Smith. 3. Look a t the picture and read the sto ry o f Freddy’s lifestyle. What kind o f advice would you give to help the boy becom e fit and healthy? Freddy likes junk food. Snacks like hamburgers and pizzas are his favourite. He doesn’t do any sports. He lies in bed until 10 o’clock in the morning. His parents take him to school in their car. In the evening he plays computer games or just watches films on TV. When his friends ask him to go out and play football he finds excuses not to go. Model: Freddy, you should change your diet. You should eat less junk food. You should eat more vegetables and fruit. You should....

4. Read and choose the b est answer to com plete the text. Healthy Eating Habits We Have Forgotten Steven Lindale is a professor in the department of medicine at the University of Lund in Sweden. He trained in 1___ medicine and became interested in the effects of diets on our health. He has investigated a Stone Age diet, that is, the food people ate thousands of years ago. As a result of his 2___ he decided to test 3__ in Sweden to see how ancient diets could affect them. Fourteen patients in his experiment 4__ a Stone Age diet while another fourteen people followed a Mediterranean diet, which is also 5__ with lots of fruit and vegetables. All of the patients in the test had high blood sugar 6___, the majority of them suffered from diabetes, and they all had problems with their 7__ . At the end of three months, the group which followed the Mediterranean diet had 8__ their blood sugar levels by a small amount, but the other group had reduced such levels by a very large amount. The patients in both groups had lost weight and had become much healthier. C country 1. A kitchen B family D state 2. A findings B researchings C explainings D discoverings 3. A doctors B nurses C patients D hospitals 4. A followed B ate C listened D bought C unhealthy D healthy 5. A rich B expensive 6. A amounts B kilos C levels D portions 7. A hurts B hearts C heads D heards 8. A reproduced B increased C reduced D enlarged 5. a) Answ er the questions. Write your answers in your copy book. 1. How many servings of fruits or vegetables do you eat a day? 2. How many times a week do you eat dinner at the table together with your family? 3. How many times a week do you eat breakfast? 4. How many times a week do you eat takeout or fast food? 5. How many hours a day do you watch TV/movies or sit and play video/computer games? 6. Do you have a TV in the room where you sleep? 7. Do you have a computer in the room where you sleep? 8. How much time a day do you spend in active play? b) Look a t your answers to the questions and make a conclusion about your lifestyle.

ixxxxxx:

:x x x x x x x x x x x x x :

HEAlPTHYliffESTYLE -••• •

......

tsssss/ / / / / a ;.v ,v . v . vs %\ ■»•»\

i\ *.SNSN^wXw//////////>

.........

t ✓ v ✓ ✓ ✓ / / / / . v . ; . v . v . v . ‘. s \ \ •»% s

•i i 4 m*****S*S

LESSON 27 1. Look a t the clocks and te ll the tim e shown on them. Then say what you were doing a t those tim es yesterday.

2. Make up as m any sentences as you can using the table below.

At 10:30 a.m. yesterday

Susan I my friends my aunt we

were was

cooking. playing the piano. watching TV. reading a book, listening to the radio. talking on the phone, sleeping.

3. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Simple o r Past Continuous tense form. Yesterday Tom and Janice (go) to the zoo around one o’clock. They (see) many kinds of animals and (have) a few adventures. While they (walk) by the elephant, it (begin) to squirt water at them, so they (run) behind a rock and (dry) themselves. Later, while they (pass) the giraffe area, one of the tall, purple-tongued animals (lower) its head toward Tom and (start) to nibble on his green hat. Janice said, "Shoo!” At that point, the giraffe (stretch) its head toward Janice and (try) to eat her ice cream cone. Janice (let, not) the giraffe have the ice cream because she (stand) right in front of a sign that said, "Don’t feed the animals". She (point) at the sign and (say) to the giraffe, "Can’t you read?"

'X*X*M*M*M*.*M*.*////

;::xxxxxxxxxx:c:e:!:i:j:in :

:>:>:>:xxxx:

ixxxmxxxxx:

HEALTHY LIFESTYLE vvXvivXv////////

S U U V .'.'.'.V .V .V .V //// №. / / / / / / / W . V . V . V . V A 'A

r / / / . s y / / . y . y . y . \ ,.sv

4. Look a t the pictures and say which o f them describe a healthy lifestyle and which - unhealthy one. Give your reasons. Give advice to people who lead an unhealthy lifestyle. There is a m odel to help you. Model: Picture 1 describes an unhealthy lifestyle. The boy is watching television and eating chips and crisps. He should spend more time outdoors. He should also eat healthy food, something like fruit and vegetables, cereals and proteins.

5. Imagine your frie n d has becom e addicted to playing com puter games o r playing games on his m obile phone (tablet). Write an em ail to your frie n d giving advice on how to g e t rid o f his / her addiction. S ta rt your em ail as in the model. Model: Dear ..., I am writing to help you. I have noticed that you are playing games on your tablet too much. I mean, you are spending too much time with your tablet. I think you are getting addicted to it. It’s not good for your health. As a friend, I really believe I should give you some pieces of advice to change your lifestyle. First, you should limit the time you spend with your tablet. You should also...

mmMM

:>:>:>: xxx xx x xxxx: :x x x x x x x x x x x x x :

ggasaass

^ snsvXv Xv .v /////^//

»»«sOSSSKSS

i*ttx-x*x-x*:«<««4

:xxxxx: x xxxx:

......... AV/AV.V,W%' /WAWAWSW'

LESSON 28 1. Fill in the blanks in the follow ing sto ry with the verbs in brackets in the Past Simple o r the Past Continuous tense form. Use the dictio na ry i f necessary.

A Strange Day on Planet Zenon This is XR 101, Planet Zenon News. I’m talking to little TQ 005 who has an amazing story to tell. TQ, can you tell us what ____ (happen) yesterday? We ____ (have) a normal Sunday afternoon when something unbelievable ____ (happen). Dad ____ (dig) craters in the backyard while M o m ____ (punch) our dinner order into the computer. My sister, RQ 005, ____ (check) the computer printout to make sure it ____ (match) what M o m ____ (order) . My brother. PQ 005, _____ (repair) his rocket. My younger sister, VQ 005, and her friend ____ (do) experiments in her laboratory when the tro ub le ____ (begin). I ____ (oil) my robot when suddenly it ____ (sound) its warning alarm. When the alarm ____ (begin) to ring, everyone ____ (stop) what th e y ____ (do). We ____ (try) to find out why the alarm ____ (ring) when a strange o b je ct____(appear) in the sky. I t ______(seem) to be coming directly toward us. And ina few minutes, i t _____ (land) right in Dad’s newly made crater. We a ll____ (hold) our breath. While we ____ (watch), one of the doors slowly ____ (open). Then two of the ugliest creatures I’ve ever seen ____ (step) intothe doorway. I ____ (hide) my eyes from the horrible sight when th e y _____ (begin) coming closer. The ro b o t____ (begin) to examine them as th e y _____ (approach). Whe n the robot’s a rm ____ (reach) out to grab them, the two creatures ____ (run) back into their ship and ____ (begin) to take off again. As the s h ip ____ (climb) back up to the sky, I _____ (see) the strange markings on the side that ____ (look) like this: "Planet Earth” .

2. Make up a lis t o f top 10 healthy habits. Say why you believe they are healthy. There is a m odel to help you. Model: Doing morning exercises: It gives you energy for the whole day. It keeps you active. It burns extra calories. It makes you slim, fit and healthy. 3. Look a t the p ictures and say what words on the topic “ Healthy life s ty le ” they stand for. Model: Picture 1 stands for proteins, because meat contains a lot of proteins.

4. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Continuous o r Past P e rfe ct tense form. 1. When I walked into the kitchen after dinner last night, my wife (wash) the dishes, so I picked up a dish towel to help her. 2. By the time the lesson was over this morning, the rain (stop) so I didn’t need my umbrella anymore. 3. When I left for school this morning, it (rain) so I used my umbrella. 4. Last night I started to study at 7:30. Dick came at 7:35. I (study) when Dick came. 5. By the time I walked into the kitchen after dinner, my husband (wash, already) the dishes and (put) them away. 6. Last night I started to study at 7:30.1 finished studying at 9:00. Dick came at 9:30. By the time Dick came, I (finish) my homework. 5. Complete the sentences and w rite them in your copy books. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

I was reading a book at 8 p.m. yesterday evening when ... . My mother was cooking a delicious cake in the kitchen at 6 p. m. yesterday w h ile ...... Yesterday she called me at around 11 p.m. to find out what ... at that time. When I was younger I ...... In order to stay fit and healthy you should ... . His health is in very bad condition. I think he should ... .

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

LESSON 29 1. Look a t the p ictu re o f the lib ra ry plan and listen to the lib ra ria n 's instructions follow ing them on the plan. Then fill in the names o f the areas on the p la n . We are now at the main entrance to the library. There are many different areas. Inside on the left there is the IT centre. It has got computers. You can use the Internet and e-mail here. We have lots of books, videos and cassettes on different subjects. Books about IT are on the left between the study area and the IT centre. English language books and bilingual dictionaries are next to the study area on the right. The Maths books are in front of us. Science books are behind Maths. The enquiry desk is immediately to the right of the main entrance.

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

2. Look a t the plan in exercise 1. Then ask and answer questions using the charts below . > are the Maths books? Where

They are

> is the IT centre? > is the enquiry desk?

It’s

between .... a n d .... next to ... in front of ... opposite ... on the left / right of...

3. Read o r listen to the dialogue and a c t it o u t with yo ur p a rtn e r. Pay attention to the words in b old . Brenda:

Hi, Victor. Are you waiting to take out a book? Victor: No, I have brought back those which I have already read. You know the rules: you should not keep books for more than a fortnight. Brenda: True, true. Let me see. What is it? Victor: It’s “The Moonstone” by Willkie Collins. Brenda: Oh! That’s the book I have wanted to read for months. Victor: Great. You can take it after me. Brenda: I am so lucky to meet you here at the library. 4. Look a t the p ictures o f a book and learn the words.

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

5. M atch the words with th e ir definitions. Use the dictio na ry i f necessary. the part of a book to which the pages are attached tail of a book and on the cover of which usually appear the title and author's and publisher’s names foredge The top part of the book spine the bottom part of the book spine spine the part of a book that faces inward when the book is on front cover the shelf; the part of a book opposite the spine any protective covering used to bind together the pages head of a book of a book the front and back covers of a hardcover book, today bookworm typically a cardboard base covered with cloth, paper, or leather separate paper covering for the book boards a person devoted to reading books book jacket 6. Read the rhymes and learn one o f them. Look in a Book

A Book Speaks Look When you drop me on the floor in a book 1get stepped on - my sides are sore; and you will see Torn-out pages make me groan; 1feel dizzy if I’m thrown; words Every mark and every stain and magic and mystery. On my covers gives me pain; Look Please don’t bend me, if you do 1don’t want to talk to you; in a book But we will both be friends together, and you will find sense If you protect me from the weather And keep me clean so that 1look and nonsense of every kind. A tidy, neat and happy book. Author Unknown Look in a book In a Story Book and you will know At night when sunshine goes away, all And it’s too dark for me to play, the things 1like to come inside, and look that can help you grow. Ivy 0. Eastwick For new friends in a story book. Author Unknown 7. Make up a sim ilar dialogue as the one in exercise 3. Then w rite it in yo ur copy book.

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

LESSON 30 1. Read the notice fo r the students a t the library. Pay attention to the underlined w ord com binations. To the readers! The rules of using the library books: 1. The readers should attend the library at least two times a month. 2. The readers should use the books carefully. 3. The readers should not: a) turn a book upon its clear face (вигинати книжку всередину обгорткою); b) fold the pages of a book to make them look like a dog’s ear; c) tear, cut or colour the pages of the book; d) write on the pages and the covers or the foredge of a book. 4. The readers may keep books for two weeks. They should bring the books back to the library in the due time (у належний час). 5. The readers should inform the librarians of any violations of these rules by other readers._______________________________ 2. Your frie n d o r relative is waiting fo r some advice from you. Use should o r shouldn’t. Model: Your cousin coughs very often because he smokes too much. Advise him to stop smoking. - You should stop smoking, Alan. 1. Your friend has a bad toothache. Advise him to see a doctor. 2. Your uncle is going to visit Greece. Advise him to learn a few words of Greek before he goes. 3. Your classmate is often late for the lessons. This makes the teachers very angry and brings her many troubles. Advise her to set her alarm clock at an earlier time. 4. Your friend feels hungry at school and very often buys food at the student cafe. That’s why she spends a lot of money on food. Advise her to bring some sandwiches to school from home. 5. Your friend plays computer games for a long time. Her eyes hurt after that. Advise her to reduce the time for playing computer games.

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

3 . Read the te x t. Find modals in i t Explain the meaning o f the sentences where these modals appear.

We are in a new age - the age of information technologies and global economics. The old system of education can’t meet the needs of the new age. We should have the opportunities to change our lives. A new type of education should provide us with such opportunities. Now learning is more than just schools, colleges or universities. In this time of change learning should be lifelong not just for the young people. We should learn throughout our lives to be part of the changing world. Exercise 4. Look a t the p ictures and read the te xt. Compare an ordinary book with an e-book. There is a m odel to help you. Go to a bookstore and you’ll find thousands of books. They look different and cover different topics. Yet, most books follow a similar structure. They have an attention-getting jacket, a cover, title page, table of contents, chapter sections, and an titleRpage index. So while the topics of the books table of contents may be different, the structure of the chapters books is very similar. And so it is with appendix e learning.

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

E-books may look different and may cover different topics, but most e-books have a similar structure. They include a title screen, a menu, instructions, objectives, Welcome screen content, assessments, and exit Menu with links to instructions. Think of it like a chapters sandwich. There’s the top Chapters (welcome) and bottom (exit) Index with a bunch of stuff inbetween. Appendix Model: Table of contents in an ordinary book looks similar to “Menu” page of an e-book. An ordinary book table of contents gives the number of the page a certain chapter is on, while an e-book menu gives a link to the web page on which a certain chapter is. Exit instructions

5. Answ er the questions. What would life be like without books? What kinds of books do you like? Do you think the Internet will make books disappear? What do you think of the idea of e-books? 6. Find 10 spelling m istakes in the te xt given below and c o rre c t them. Rewrite the c o rre c t te xt in your copy book. Evrybody can learn a language. We have alraedy learned at least one, but it takes time, pateince and hard work. Answering tests is not enought to become a fluent speaker. Our English teacher adviced us to read widelly in English, we need to read books, magasines, and newspapers, also to take every oportunity to listen to English throught satellite television, films, and radoi, and to speak so that we can use the language naturally.

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

LESSON 31 1. Look a t the p ictu re o f a m odem lib ra ry and learn the words.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

reference librarian reference desk library book microfilm reader microfilm periodical section

7. magazine 8. newspaper 9. online catalog 10. card catalog 11. media section 12. audiocassette

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

videocassette CD (compact disc) record checkout desk library clerk / assistant encyclopedia

2. Look a t the p ictu re in exercise 1 and re a d the sentences. Pay attention to the w ord com binations in bold. Then re fe r to Focus on Grammar. 1. The books in a library are usually kept on the shelves. 2. The information about library books is stored in the online catalog or in the card catalog. 3. Magazines and newspapers are placed in the periodical section. 4. Periodical section area can be found on your right. 5. Microfilms can be read on the microfilm reader.

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

Focus on Grammar Present Simple Passive

Sentences can be active or passive. In active sentences, the thing that is doing the action is the subject of the sentence. The thing that is receiving the action is the object. In passive sentences, the thing that is receiving the action (the object in active sentences) is the subject of the sentence and the thing that is doing the action is the agent. Interrogative form The door is opened by him. — Is the door opened by him? Negative form The door is not opened by him. 3. Make up sentences in the Present Simple Passive. Then make yo ur sentences interrogative. You m ay add up agents o f the a ction. 1. the documents / print. - The documents are printed by the secretary. Are the documents printed by the secretary? 2. the book / read / not - The book is not read by the teacher. The book is read by the pupils. Is the book read by pupils? 3. 4. 5. 6.

the the the the

window / open shoes / buy car / wash litter / throw away

7. 8. 9. 10.

the the the the

letter / send songs / sing / not food / eat / not shop / close / not

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

4. Read the book review and choose the b e st answer to fill in the blanks. Find the sentences in the Present Simple Passive and make them negative and interrogative. If you want to read a humorous crime story, this book is 1___the one you should choose. The narrator is Christopher, aged fifteen, who is 2__ unusual. He loves Sherlock Holmes stories. Christopher is 3___ intelligent, but also has got some disease which affects the way he thinks about the world. The story begins with a murder victim, a dog called Wellington. Wellington’s body 4___ found by Christopher, who tries to be a 5____. He believes he can find the 6____. Then Christopher is arrested himself, but even when he’s in trouble, his descriptions are 7__ funny. Finally Christopher finds the clue and 8___ shocked to find out that his own father may tell lies. Model:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Wellington’s body is found by Christopher. — Is Wellington’s body found by Christopher? — Wellington’s body isn’t found by Christopher.

A rather A nearly A certainly A been A criminal A suspect A then A are

B quite B quietly B quickly B is B witness B officer B quite B has

C C C C C C C C

definitely usually everywhere did thief innocent here is

D funnily D rather D nowhere D has D detective D arrest D possibly D have

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

5. M atch the words with th e ir definitions. a detective story narrator crime suspect murder witness murderer innocent

activity that is against the law one who co m m its the crim e of m u rd e r a person who sees something (such as a crime) happen type of popular literature, a genre of fiction in which a detective solves a crime or a series of crimes. a person who gives an account or tells the story of eve nts not able to be trusted : causing feelings of doubt or suspicion not guilty of a crime or other wrong act the crime of deliberately killing a person

6. Rewrite the sentences in the Present Simple Passive. 1. We set the table. - The table is set by us. 2. They don't help you. - You are not helped by them. 3. She pays a lot of money. 4. I draw a picture. 5. They wear blue shoes. 6. He doesn’t open the book. 7. You do not write the letter. 8. They earn much money. 9. His father speaks German. 10. My cousin plays computer games. 7. Get ready to speak about the lib ra ry you have attended. You should say: -

Where the library is located; What resources and information can be found there; What kind of help can be received by the readers; Who works in the library; What kind of books you have taken out to read at home; What rules are there in the library; Whether you enjoy attending the library.

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

LESSON 32.

THE WORLD OF BOOKS 1. M atch the names o f the authors with the book titles. Give the Ukrainian equivalents fo r the books. Which books have you read? What are they about? 1. J. K. Rowling a. The Lord of the Flies 2. George Orwell b. The Adventures of Tom Sawyer 3. Mark Twain c. The Hobbit 4. J. R. R. Tolkien d. Gone with the Wind e. Harry Potter and the Prisoner of Azkaban 5. Lewis Carroll 6. William Golding f. Animal Farm 7. J. D. Salinger g. Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland h. The Catcher in the Rye 8. Margaret Mitchell Exercise 2. Look a t the m ind map and stu dy the words.

Books An encyclopedia

Literature

Fiction

------- tv--------A documentary report

Short stories Non-fiction

Online (eg. blog)

V * [ A detective story

Reference

A play

A romance A historical novel

A biography A CD-ROM comic

An address or phone book

An atlas

Format

A dictionary

A biography novel

hardback

An instruction manual

Science-fictiion/ Fantasy

An e-book paperback

Poetry

An adventure

3. Look a t the book title s in exercise 1 again and say what kind o f the book each title is. There is a m odel to help you. Model:

I guess (to my mind, in my view, I think), “The Lord of the Flies” is an adventure novel.

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

4. Answ er the follow ing questions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

What book would you recommend for children? How many books have you read in English? Who is your favourite author? Why doesn’t everybody enjoy reading? Do you prefer to keep the books you read? Which is better, the book or the movie? Do you ever read the last page of a book before you start reading it? How often do you want the story in a book to never end?

5. Go around the class, ask and answer to fin d a person who: Reads books on the laptop after dinner. Reads books on the train / bus while travelling to school. Reads books in bed at night. Uses encyclopaedias and dictionaries as reference books. Likes online encyclopaedias. Downloads books from the Internet. Buys books in a bookshop. Takes books from the library. Model: Do you read books on your laptop after dinner or do you read them on the bus while travelling to school? Where and when do you read books? 6. In se rt the passive form o f the verbs in the given spaces. 1. Bob mails the package. The package is mailed by Bob. 2. Mr. Can delivers our mail. Our m a il_____ by Mr. Can. 3. The children eat the cake. The c a k e ____ by the children. 4. Linda writes that letter. The le tte r____ by Linda. 5. The jeweler fixes my watch. My watch ____ by the jeweler. 6. Ms. Bond teaches our class. Our cla ss__ _ by Ms. Bond. 7. That company employs many people. Many people____ by that company. 8. The secretary faxes the letters. The letters ____ by the secretary. 9. Mr. Adams does the work. The w o rk ____ by Mr. Adams. 10. Mr. Fox washes the windows. The windows by Mr. Fox.

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

LESSON 33. ADVENTURE STORIES 1. Read the adjectives with definitions and choose those to describe the adventure sto ry you have read and liked. Stimulating

- making (a person) excited or interested in something

Captivating

- attracting and holding the attention or interest

Gripping

- holding the attention or interest intensely; fascinating

Dynamic

- always active or changing

Vigorous

- powerful in action or effect; energetic

Forceful

- expressed in a way that is effective and that influences people’s thoughts and ideas

2. Read about R. L. Stevenson. Look a t the title o f the book and the illustration and check the meaning o f the words in the box. Which words do you expect to fin d in the te xt and why? ( \ captain, cloth, coast, horses, money, pirate, scoundrels, squire, tremble, ship, software, search, sword v_________________________________________________________ /

Robert Louis Stevenson was born in 1850 in Edinburgh, Scotland. He went to university to study engineering, but then decided to become a writer. Stevenson liked to travel, although he often felt ill. Together with his wife Stevenson went to live on the Pacific Island of Samoa because the weather there was good for his health. The islanders called him “The teller of tales” . He died on Samoa in 1894. R. L. Stevenson

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

Treasure Island Dr Livesey was not at his house but with the squire at his home, so Captain Dance and I went on there. I had never seen Squire Trelawney so near. He was a big tall man, with a red face, and was sitting beside a fire with Dr Livesey. ‘Come in, Mr Dance,’ he said. Mr. Dance gave his report and both men listened with deep interest. ‘And so, Jim’, said the doctor, ‘you have the thing that they were looking for, have you?’ ‘Here it is, sir,’ I said, and gave him the papers tied inside the cloth. The doctor looked at them and put them quietly in the pocket of his coat. After that, Mr.Dance went away and I was given some food. ‘And now, squire’, said the doctor, ‘you have heard of this Flint, I suppose?’ ‘Heard of him!’ cried the squire. ‘He was the worst pirate that ever sailed. The Spanish used to tremble just to hear his name!’ ‘Well, I’ve heard of him myself’, said Dr Livesey. ‘But the question is, did he have the money?’ ‘Money!’ said the squire. ‘Of course Flint had money! Those scoundrels were after it’. ‘Well, then, suppose I have here in my pocket a paper that shows where Flint hid his treasure’, said the doctor. ‘Would the treasure be worth looking for?’ ‘Worth looking for!’ cried the squire, with great enthusiasm. ‘I’ll prepare a ship at Bristol, take you and Hawkins with me, and have that treasure if I have to search for a year!’ We opened the cloth and found two things - a book and a paper. The book gave a list of all the money Flint had stolen from different ships during twenty years at sea. The doctor opened the paper and found a map of an island. There was a hill in the centre marked Spyglass, and several names had been added later. There were three big crosses - two in the north of the island and one in the south-west. Beside the last cross were the words: Most of the treasure here. On the back of the paper, the same person had written:

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

Tall tree. Spyglass shoulder, to the North of North North-East. Skeleton Island East-South-East and by East. The squire and Dr Livesey were delighted. 3. Read the e x tra c t from “ Treasure Island” and answer the questions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

What did the narrator take to Squire Trelawney’s house? Who was Flint? Why was Squire Trelawney interested in Flint? What information did Flint’s book contain? Why were the men delighted when they looked at the map?

4. Read the te x t again to explain the follow ing: o o o

How the writer shows that Dr Livesey was a calm and patient man; In what way Squire Trelawney is different from Dr Livesey; Who the word “they” refers to in the Dr Livesey’s question addressed to Jim, the narrator: “You have the thing that they were looking for, have you?”

5. Look a t the te x t in exercise 2 again. Say how you can describe the s to ry and your feelings and em otions while reading this adventure novel. Use exercise 1 and the m odel to help you. Model: It’s a very gripping story. You never know what is going to happen next. I mean, you can’t predict the events. It’s really dynamic and stimulating. The plot captivates your attention from the beginning to the last page of the book. I felt excited when I was reading the novel. 6. Rewrite the sentences in the passive voice. Model: 1. Everyone knows this fact very well. This fact is known very well (by everyone). 2. They can open the theatre next month. 3. People may soon forget it. 4. You must write the answers to these questions. 5. Someone should take two of my books. 6. We should read this book quickly. 7. What should one do in such cases? 8. Do they say anything interesting about us? 9. Does the teacher make the situation clear to you? 10. You should keep milk in a refrigerator. 11.1 don’t think anyone can do it. 12. You must finish the work by seven o’clock. 13. No one knows the secret. 14. Does anyone clean all the rooms regularly?

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

LESSON 34.

ROMANCE 1. Read or listen to the dialogue and act it out with your partner Brenda: Hi, Victor. What are you doing? DOVER T H R I F T - EDI TI ONS Are you reading a book? Here, JANE AUSTEN in the street? Victor: It’s so captivating! I just can’t (pride *£> Prejudice stop. Brenda: What is it? Who is it written by? Victor: By Jane Austin. It’s “Pride and prejudice”. Brenda: I have read this book. It’s a romance. Do you like romances? Victor: I like all books which are interesting. It’s not only about love and marriage. It’s about human relationships, moral values, about Britain and its culture of the past as well. I love reading such books. Moreover, I adore Jane Austin. She is one of my favourite writers. Brenda: Have you read “Sense and sensibility”? Victor: No. Is it written by Jane Austin? Brenda: Yes, it is. I have got this book in English. I have already read it, so if you like I can give it to you to read it and practice your English. Victor: It would be very kind of you! Can you bring it tomorrow? Brenda: Sure! See you tomorrow. 2. Look at the book cover and a short summary of the story. Are you interested in reading such books? Why or why not. You may use the words in the box to describe the novel of this kind. Enchanting - delightfully charming or attractive Tear-jerker - an excessively sentimental film, play, book Sentimental - of feelings of tenderness, sadness, or nostalgia Happy end story - the story with a happy end Tragic - causing or characterized by extreme distress or sorrow Dramatic - happening suddenly, very noticeable and surprising _______________________________ ____ __________________________________

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

“Pride and Prejudice” is about the Bennet family and their five daughters. Mrs Bennet wants to see them married, if possible to husbands who are richer than her family. One of the daughters, Elizabeth, is not impressed by Mr. Darcy when he doesn’t give her a lot of attention at a dance. She considers him proud and arrogant. However, as this enchanting story of love, marriage and mutual understanding unfolds, Elizabeth finds out that a man can change his manners, and a lady can change her mind. 3. Look through (scan) the text and answer the questions. o o

Where does the scene take place? What is the relationship between Mr. Bingley and Mr. Darcy?

Mr. Bingley soon made himself acquainted with all the important people in the room; He was lively and unreserved, danced every dance, was angry that the ball finished so early, and talked of giving one himself at Netherfield. Such friendly qualities speak for themselves. What a contrast between him and his friend! Mr. Darcy danced only once with Mrs.Hurst and once with Miss Bingley. He didn’t want to be introduced to any other lady, and spent the rest of the evening walking around the room, speaking occasionally to some people from his group. His character was evident. He was the proudest, most disagreeable man in the world, and everybody hoped he would never come here again. Mrs. Bennet was the most violent against him, because he had offended one of her daughters. Elizabeth Bennet was that daughter, because there were very few gentlemen, to sit out two dances; and during part of the time, Mr.Darcy had been standing near enough for her to hear a conversation between him and Mr.Bingley. ‘Come on, Darcy’, he said, ‘you have to dance. I hate to see you standing about by yourself in this stupid manner. You really should dance’. ‘I certainly won’t. You know I hate it, unless I know my partner very well. At such an assembly as this it is impossible. Your sisters are with someone else, and there is no other woman in the room whom it would not be a punishment to me to dance with’. ‘Don’t be so choosy as you are!’ said Mr.Bingley. ‘Honestly, I’ve never met so many pleasant girls in my life’. ‘You are dancing with the only pretty girl in the room’, said Mr.Darcy, looking at the eldest Miss Bennet. ‘Oh! She’s the most beautiful creature I’ve ever seen! But one of her sisters is sitting just behind you, she’s very pretty, and probably very pleasant. Please let me ask my partner to introduce you’. ‘Which one do you mean?’ said Darcy, and turning round, he looked for a moment at Elizabeth, until their eyes met, and then he looked away and

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

coldly said: ‘She is tolerable, but not so pretty as you are saying. I am in no mood to pay attention to young ladies who are ignored by other men.’

4. Read the text in exercise 3 again and answer the questions. 1. Why did everybody hope that Mr. Darcy would never come again? 2. Why did Mrs. Bennet especially dislike him? 3. What was Mr. Darcy’s reaction when Mr. Bingley suggested to him that he should dance? 4. Why did Elizabeth overhear the conversation between Mr. Bingley and Mr. Darcy? 5. What reasons did Mr. Darcy give for his refusal to dance with Elizabeth? 5. Use the model answer to speak about your favourite book. Stick to the following plan: 1. The title and the author of the book. 2. A short plot description. 3. The reasons why you like the book. Model answer: My favourite book is “ Harry Potter and the Pilosopher’s Stone” by J.K.Rowling. The story is about a young orphan boy called Harry Potter who lives with his horrible aunt, uncle, and cousin. When he is ten, Harry leaves them and goes to a school called Hogwarts, where he studies magic and witchcraft. The story is exciting, funny, and frightening. This book is my favourite, because there are a lot of unusual human and animal characters, such as Fluffy, the dog with three heads. Secondly, at the end of the story Harry finds the magical philosopher’s stone, before his enemies find it. 6. Write one paragraph about a book you have recently read. Use the model in exercise 5.

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

LESSON 35.

SCIENCE FICTION 1. Match the words with their definitions. stimulating tear-jerker captivating vigorous gripping dynamic happy end story enchanting forceful sentimental dramatic tragic

expressed in a way that is effective and that influences people’s thoughts and ideas holding the attention or interest intensely; fascinating delightfully charming or attractive of feelings of tenderness, sadness, or nostalgia causing or characterized by extreme distress or sorrow attracting and holding the attention or interest an excessively sentimental film, play, book powerful in action or effect; energetic happening suddenly, very noticeable and surprising making (a person) excited or interested in something always active or changing the story with a happy end

2. Imagine you travel in a time machine to the year 3020. What changes can you see in these areas? Use the model to help you. - people; - health; - education; - transport; - money Model:

In the year 3020 people live longer than in our time because health care system has developed greatly and helps people to live longer. People don’t do much sport, that’s why they are not fit, but the new medicines help them to stay quite healthy. The education has become...

3. Read the extract from “The Time Machine” by H. G. Wells and answer the questions after the text. The Time Traveller has just met the Eloi. ‘At the top of a hill, I sat down and looked at our world. Here I could see that these changes had been made. The air was free of unpleasant insects, the earth was free of weeds. Everywhere there were fruit and pleasant flowers. Beautiful birds flew here and there. And I saw no diseases during my stay.

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

There had been social changes as well. I saw people living in fine buildings, beautifully dressed, I hadn’t yet found them doing any work. The shop, the advertisement, buying and selling - all of those things which are so important to us had all disappeared. I thought of the small size of the people and their low intelligence. People had been strong, energetic and intelligent, and had used this energy to change their living conditions. Difficulties make w people strong and clever and help them to work together. But where were these dangers now? 1. What does the Time Traveller notice about the natural world? 2. How healthy were people? 3. What social change did he find surprising? 4. In what way can difficulties in life be good? 4. Change the sentences to the passive if possible. Say why a sentence cannot be changed to the passive. 1. Jack walks to school every day. 2. We stay in a hotel. 3. Susie can break the cup. 4. The leaves fall to the ground. 5. I sleep at my friend’s house. 6. The player should catch the ball. 7. Ann’s cat catches mice. 8. That book belongs to me. 9. The train arrives on time. 10. The teacher explains the rules well. 11.1 agree with George. 12. Do you agree with me? 13. Dick should go to the doctor’s office. 14. We can meet tomorrow. 5. Read a sample book review and put the items of its plan in the correct order. “The Time Machine” is a science fiction book by H.G.Wells, who was a famous British author. He wrote the book in 1894. It is about a journey through time in a time machine. The book forecasts space travel and nuclear wars as well as predicts genetically modified food. The main character is an inventor who lives in London. He’s called simply ‘The Time Traveller’.

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

He builds a time machine and sets off on a journey which takes him into the future. He arrives in the year 802,701. He expects to find a better world with more intelligent people and great inventions. Instead he discovers a world where people have become happy, child-like creature. These people, the Eloi, are not only physically smaller, but also less intelligent than people in the present day. What’s more, they have become weak. While he gets to know the Eloi, the Time Traveller forgets about his time machine. He suddenly realizes that it has mysteriously disappeared. During his search for it, he meets another group of creatures, the Morlocks, who live underground. They are the workers and they are strong, but they are also evil and violent. After fighting the Morlocks, the Time Traveller finds his time machine, which the Morlocks have stolen and hidden. He returns to the present time to tell his friends the story of his time travel. I’ve just finished this book and I enjoyed every minute of it. It’s one of the most exciting books I’ve read. a. b. c. d. e.

The plot of the story. Biographical notes about the author of the book. The reasons for liking the book. The title of the book. Introduction of the main characters.

6. Use the texts in exercises 3 and 5 and write the questions to the given answers. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

H.G.Wells. - Who wrote “The Time Machine”? 1894. A science fiction book. In a time machine. In the year 802, 701. They live underground.

7. Use the model review and the items of the plan in exercise 5 and write a review of the book you have read and liked.

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

REVISION LESSONS LESSON 36 1. Read the text and answer the questions. Pay attention to the words in bold. Use the dictionary if necessary. Libraries: The Memory of Mankind Imagine you travel back in time to check out some ancient books! To your big surprise you will discover that libraries were quite different long ago. Books were rare and valuable, and no librarians encouraged people to take them home. Five thousand years ago in Mesopotamia, the Sumerians tied their clay tablets together and stored them in baskets. Librarians called the Keepers of the Tablets who guarded the books, and ordinary people were not able to check them out because they could break. At about the same time in history, Egyptian scribes kept track of papyrus scrolls in the temples, but the average Egyptian never saw those books and definitely couldn’t take them home! One of the biggest ancient libraries was the magnificent Chinese Imperial Library in the Forbidden City, which belonged to the Emperor of China. However, this library wasn’t like our public libraries today. Ordinary people couldn’t even go into the Forbidden City. In the Hall of Literary Glory, the emperor studied selections from his 36,000 books. Few Chinese people had access to books 5,000 years ago. The Greeks, on the other hand, gave everyone access to books because they loved learning. Their libraries contained books on all subjects ranging from mathematics to myths. They built the most magnificent library in the world in Alexandria. Alexandria was on the northern coast of Egypt, and the great library of Alexandria existed for more than 900 years. It contained over 700,000 scrolls, which was the equivalent of 100,000 modern books.

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

1. Why were the books rare and valuable in the ancient world? 2. Why were the books guarded in Mesopotamia? 3. Could early Egyptians read papyrus rolls? Why? 4. What was different in Greece in comparison with China or Egypt? 5. What was built in Alexandria in ancient Greece? Can we see it now? Why?

2. Make the outline o f the text in exercise 1. Get ready to retell the text according to the outline you have made. 3. Change the sentences from active to passive. Include the "by phrase" only if it contains important information. Model:

Someone might cancel the lesson. The lesson might be cancelled. 1. Someone might cancel the lesson. 2. A doctor can prescribe some medicine. 3. People should plant tomatoes in spring. 4. Mr. Hook must send this letter. 5. Someone may build a new post office on First Street. 6. People should read books. 7. People can reach me at the following telephone number: 5553815. 8. People should place stamps in the upper right-hand corner of an envelope. 9. Someone must paint that fence. 10. People cannot control the weather. 11. Someone had to fix our car before we left for Chicago. 12. All of the students must do the task.

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

4. Sort out the words into three groups: Fiction, Non-fiction, Reference. A biography, an atlas, a romance, a dictionary, an address book, a science fiction, an instruction manual, an adventure, poetry. Fiction

Non-fiction

Reference

a romance 5. Use the words in the box and label the picture.

6. Take a book you have recently read. Look at the book. Say and then write: o o o o o o

What is written on the cover of the book; How many chapters the book consists of; What kind of information can be found in the table of contents; Whether there is an appendix in the book; what is written in the appendix; Whether there is an index in the book; what kind of information it contains; Whether there is a title page in the book;

Model: The title of the book (which i s .... ) and the name of the author (...) are written on the cover of the book. The book consists o f .....

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

LESSON 37 1. Look a t the pictures below and label the numbers. Use the words from the box.

library card - periodical section - reference section - cart magazines - shelf - computer - checkout desk - librarian newspapers - books - information desk -

2. Read the sentences and correct them if necessary. 1. Information desk is a place in the library where newspapers can be found. - Information desk is a place in a library where you can go to get information, for example about where to find certain books in that library. 2. Periodical section is a place in a library where reference books can be taken. 3. A librarian is a person who can give you information on where to find certain books. 4. A library card is the card which can be used to buy books. 5. Check out desk is a place in the library where you can read books. 6. Reference section is a place in a library where fiction books can be found.

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

3. Read short book reviews and match them with the pictures. American classical novels 1. J.D.Salingers’s only published novel “The Catcher in the Rye” tells the story of sixteen-year old Holden, who runs away from school after failing his exams and spends three days in New York. Then he returns home to his parents. What strikes me the most is the way Salinger creates the atmosphere from the very beginning of the book, portrays Holden as lazy and quite frankly, completely clueless about his future. The Catcher in the Rye certainly isn’t everyone’s cup of tea, however I find it an exciting an d captivating novel, which describes difficult reality along with some humour, contrasting with moments of depression. 2. Mark Twain’s “Huckleberry Finn” is the story of a white boy, Huck and a black slave, Jim, who try to escape down the Mississippi River to freedom. Some people believe that Huck sets a bad example for young people, but I find this book quite gripping and exciting, giving the example of real friendship. 3. Margaret Mitchell spent a lot of years to write “Gone with the Wind”, the story of the beautiful and rebellious Scarlett O’Hara. It’s a story of peace and war, love and loss, hope and despair. Much of the book is devoted to describing the development of Scarlett’s personality. What I admire most about Margaret Mitchell is the way she develops the characters. Each one is full of life and personality.

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

4. S ort o u t the words into three colum ns. You m ay use the words m ore than once. Give yo ur reasons. Model: I guess the word “creature” should go to “a science fiction” column, because in such stories creatures from other planets or time can be described. A detective story A science fiction / A romance an adventure story creature, sentimental, treasure, crime, travel, love, suspect, pirate, murder, gentle, marry, witness, pretty, murderer, machine/device, captain, innocent, gun, narrator, fight, space

5. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verb (active or passive) in brackets. 1. Yesterday our teacher (arrive)____ five minutes late. 2. The morning paper (read)____ by over 200,000 people every day. 3. My favourite TV program often (interrupt) ____ by special news. 4. That’s not my coat. It (belong)___ to Louise. 5. Our mail (deliver)___ before noon every day. 6. The "b" in "comb" (pronounce, not) ____ . It is silent. 7. A bad accident (happen) ____ on Highway 95 last night. 8. Roberto (w rite)_____ compositions as a hobby. That one (w rite)_by Paul. 9. Do you understand the explanation in the book? No, I don’t. I (confuse)____ by it. 10. Where are you going to go to school next year? - I (accept)___ by Shoreline Community College. 11.1 think football is too violent. - I (agree)__ with you. I (prefer) baseball. 12. The Eiffel Tower (b e )_in Paris, France. It (visit)___ by millions of people every year.

6. Use the template below to write a review of the book you have read. A book reviewed by Title;

Author:

Characters; Who are they? Did you like them? How did they make you feel? Plot; What happens? Is it fun to read? Your opinion; Did you like the book? What is your favourite part? Why? Are there any funny or scary parts? Did you learn anything from the book? Your recommendation; Why do (or don’t) you recommend this book?

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

LESSON 38 1. Listen to the dialogue and fill in the table. Brenda: Hi, Jane and Victor! What are you discussing so lively? Jane: We have read a book by Miguel de Cervantes, you know, the novel titled “Don Quixote” . Brenda: So what? Victor says he likes it, Jane: but I don’t find it exciting. Victor: It’s funny and quite adventurous. Brenda: Nothing of the kind. My favourite book in World Literature is “Gone with the Wind” by Margaret Mitchell. Victor: O-oo... A tear-jerker! How can you read such stories? Jane: You don’t understand, Victor. It’s a dramatic novel which shows the difficult life of the American people at the time of wars and slavery. It’s not only about love, if you mean that. Do you agree with me, Brenda? Brenda: Absolutely! It’s a breathtaking and forceful book. I love it. Though my favourite one is another romance, "The Pride and Prejudice”, by Jane Austin. Victor: Oh, come on! Do you really believe those “happy end” love stories are true to life? Brenda: Victor, what is your favourite kind of books, then? Victor: I enjoy adventure stories, detectives or science fiction. Something which is stimulating, captivating, and vigorous. Brenda: I enjoy reading detective stories or adventures, but science fiction - brr... It is not my kind. It seems like we have got very similar taste in reading, Brenda. Jane:

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

“ Don Quixote” “Gone with the Wind” “ Pride and Prejudice” Romances Adventure stories Science fiction Detectives

UNIT III

Brenda

Jane

Victor

2. Read the text and complete it with the correct words. William Shakespeare was born in 1564 in Stratford-upon-Avon. Shakespeare’s father, John, was a glove 1_____ and his mother 2 ___ quite a lot of land. When William was born, his father 3 ___ very well in business but 4 __ years later things 5___ wrong. William went to Stratford Grammar School and there he 6__ to read and write in Latin. When he was eighteen, he 7___ Anne Hathaway. In 1588 William 8__ Stratford to go to London and in 1594 he 9__ for the most successful theatre company in London. Shakespeare 10 37 plays and 154 poems. He returned to Stratford in 1611 and lived there until he died in 1616 at the age of 52. 1. A eater 2. A has 3. A had done 4. A a little 5. A made 6. A learnt 7. A marries 8. A went 9. A did 10.A wrote

B maker B was having B was doing B little B were B studied B married B lived B was doing B has written

C doer C had C did C few C went C memorized C has married C left C was making C is written

D buyer D had had D is doing D a few D changed D recited D is married D entered D was working D writes

UNIT III

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

3. Match the events of Shakespeare’s life with the dates. Then put the events in the chronological order. Use any reference material. May 1597 Apr 23, 1616 May 26, 1583 1613 Nov 28, 1582 1585 1609 1569

1590 Aug 11, 1596 1599 Apr 23, 1564 Apr 26, 1564 1611

William and Anne bury their only son, Hamnet, who dies at the age of 11 of unknown causes Anne Hathaway gives birth to twins, son Hamnet and daughter Judith. The babies are named after Shakespeare's close friends, Hamnet and Judith Sadler Shakespeare leaves London and moves back to Stratford, where his wife and married daughters live Sufferning from an unknown illness, William Shakespeare dies on his 52nd birthday Publisher Thomas Thorpe prints a collection of 154 of Shakespeare’s sonnets Shakespeare composes his final plays — Henry VIII, Two Noble Kinsmen. The Globe catches fire during a performance of Henry VIII and burns to the ground William Shakespeare is christened at Holy Trinity Church in Stratford The Chamberlain’s Men build the Globe, a wooden theatre in London. Many of Shakespeare’s most famous plays are performed for the first time here, including Hamlet, Othello, and King Lear Around this time, Shakespeare writes Henry VI, Part One — his first play. Also around the same time, Shakespeare leaves Stratford to begin work as a playwright and actor in London Wealthy thanks to his theater work, Shakespeare buys New Place, the second-largest house in Stratford William Shakespeare is born in Stratford-upon-Avon to John and Mary Arden Shakespeare marries Ann Hathwey, who was eight years older than William Six months after his marriage, the Shakespeare’s first child, Susanna, is born Shakespeare enters King's New School, an excellent grammar school in Stratford

AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

UNIT III

4. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs (active or passive) in brackets. 1. This book (should, re tu rn )____to the library today. 2. The other books (can, return) ____ tomorrow. 3. These letters (should, mail) ____ tomorrow. 4. That letter (must, se n d )_____immediately. 5. Those letter (arrive) ____ yesterday. 6. The mechanic (repair) ____ Tina’s car last week. 7. Glass (m a ke )____ from sand. 8. You (should carry, not)____ large sums of money with you. 9. Large sums of money (should, keep) _____ in a bank, don’t you think? 10. At our school, the students’ marks (send) _____ to their parents four times each year. 11. What products (manufacture) __ in your country? 12. In prehistoric times, herds of horses (live) __ __in the Americas. But then, for some unknown reason, they (disappear) ____ completely from North and South America. Even though the early horses (die) ____ out of the Americas, they (survive)____ in Asia. 13. What is your opinion? (Should protect, wild horses)____ by law? 5. Use the mind map to speak about books and reading.

LESSON 39 (OPTIONAL)

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

LESSON 40 1. Read or listen to the dialogue and act it out with your partner. Victor: Brenda: Victor: Brenda: Victor:

I think a good book is a wonderful birthday present. It surely is. But sometimes it’s rather difficult to choose a book for your friend. Then let’s go to the bookstore to choose something appropriate for my sister’s birthday. What is she interested in? Well, she loves reading detective stories. I am sure we’ll find an exciting detective for her.

2. Read the text and say what each paragraph tells you about. There is a model to help you. Pay attention to the words in bold. Model: Paragraph 1 tells us mainly about the beginning of a school life for every child - nursery and primary school. Education in the UK In Britain children start school full-time when they are five years old. They can go to a nursery or to a play group before starting school. At primary school children learn to read, write and study different subjects. They must go to school every day, but not at the weekends. The school year starts in September and finishes in July. At 11, all children begin secondary school. Secondary schools are much bigger than primary schools. Sometimes as many as 2000 students go to one school. In some schools students must wear a uniform. Some subjects are compulsory. These subjects are English,

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

Math, Science and Information Technology (IT). Students can choose to study other subjects, for example Arts and Languages. When students are 15 or 16 they take important exams. At the age of 16, students in England, Wales and Northern Ireland take an examination called the GCSE (General Certificate of Secondary Education). In Scotland, the equivalent of the GCSE is the Standard Grade. After this they can choose to get a job or continue to study at school or college. At the age of 18 some students continue their education and go to university for three or four year courses. 3. Fill in the blanks in the sentences with the words in bold in exercise 2. 1. _____ have become quite important in the modern world, because most parents work nowadays and can’t stay home with their small children. 2. I enjoyed studying in the ____ _ school. We had very few lessons and home assignments were very easy. We also played a lot after school. Now, as we are in the secondary school, the subjects are difficult, and we have got up to 7 lessons a day. 3. My favourite school subject i s _____ . In future I am going to be a computer programmer. 4. Are there any _ _subjects in your school? - Yes, most of them a re ____ . We can only choose to study Arts and languages. 5. Will you stop studying at school when you reach 15, or will you ___ to study in high school? - I am going t o _____ , I guess. I think work experience is quite necessary nowadays. 6. Biology, Physics, Chemistry are all the disciplines o f ____ . 7. Do you have to wear a ____ to school? - No, we can put on any clothes we like.

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

4. Match the pictures with the subject names.

a. Biology, b. History, c. English, d. Math, e. Physics, f. Arts, g. Literature, h. Chemistry 5. Take turns to ask and answer the following questions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Do you like to study at school? What new things do you learn at school every day? What new things did you learn at school yesterday? Have you got many friends at school? What’s your best friend’s name? Do you get on well with everybody in your class? What do you usually do at school? What is your favourite subject? Why? How many times a week have you got your favourite subject?

6. What is your school timetable? What do you like (don’t like) about it? Have a discussion is small groups. Model: Our school timetable is rather busy. We have got 4 English lessons a week. We have also got three lessons of Ukrainian language. It’s good that we have got three lessons of Physical Education. But I don’t think it’s good that we have got the last lesson of Math on Thursday. We are too tired at the end of the school day, and it’s difficult to cope with mathematical sums in that lesson. 7. Write down your school timetable in English in your copy book. Model: On Monday we have got seven lessons. They are: Math, History, English, Ukrainian Literature, Art, Physical Education. On Tuesday...

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

LESSON 41 1. Imagine you are a member of the Ministry of Education. Give advice on how to place the subjects in the timetable for the pupils of the 8th form. Model:

The lesson of Geometry should be the second in a usual working day because it demands much thinking. In the first lesson, pupils sometimes are still very sleepy. In the second lesson their brain is fresh and can work well.

2. Read the text and make up a fact sheet about British education. There is a model to help you. Model:

Terms of schooling: September through June Schooling age: 5 to 16 (compulsory secondary education); to 18 - .... Schooling in Britain

Education is an important part of British life. There are hundreds of schools, colleges and universities, including some of the most famous in the world. Education is free and compulsory for all children between the ages of 5 - 16. Some children are educated at home rather than in school. About 94 per cent of pupils in England, and the rest of the UK, receive free education from public funds, while 6 per cent attend independent fee paying schools or homeschooling. All government-run schools, state schools, follow the same National Curriculum. Teachers in secondary schools are always addressed by their surname by parents and pupils alike, Mr, Mrs or Miss Smith.... The school year runs from September to July and is 39 weeks long. For many areas the year is divided into six terms (some counties in England still follow the traditional three terms a year):

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

September to October October to December January to February The main school holidays are:

February to March April to May June to July

Christmas - 2 weeks Spring - 2 weeks Summer - 6 weeks There are also one week holidays: at the end of October; in the mid February; at the end of May. Most schools in England require children to wear a school uniform. Boys wear long grey or black trousers (shorts may be worn in the summer), a white shirt, a school tie (optional in most primary schools), a jumper or sweater with the school logo on (the colour is the choice of the schools) and black shoes. Girls may wear skirts. During the summer term girls often wear summer school dresses. The children attend school from Monday to Friday, from 08:55 - 15:15. 3. Should the schoolchildren wear a school uniform? Discuss in small groups and then present your group opinion to the class. Model:

We strongly believe that schoolchildren should wear a uniform because:

when they go on a school trip they all look the same and so can’t get lost; they stop worrying about what to wear each day; this will make sure everyone is equal; parents don’t have to shop for expensive and varied wardrobes for their children to keep up with other children; wearing a uniform stimulates discipline in students. 4. Read the ideas for “The school of tomorrow” project expressed by pupils. Pay attention to word combinations in bold. 1. All important school decisions will be taken not only by the headmaster, but also by all the teachers and the most diligent pupils. 2. School uniform will be worn only on special occasions. 3. The school timetable will be sent by an email to every pupil’s mobile phone or tablet. 4. The marks for the study achievement will be shown on a big screen in every classroom. 5. The home assignment will be sent to every pupil by email.

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

Focus on Grammar! Future Simple Passive will + be + Past Participle

modal + be + Past Participle

5. Make up sentences to describe what good things will be done in your school in some years. The classrooms Trees and flowers A fountain The benches The walls The books A new cafeteria The sports stadium A swimming pool

will be

built. repaired. painted in different colours. redecorated. modernized. opened. planted. rebuilt. given to pupils at every lesson.

6. Mini project. 1. Make a survey about favourite subjects of the pupils in your school. 2. Make up a table where you will fill in the data. 3. Find out the reasons which determine the choice of a favourite subject (interesting information inthe lesson, personality of a teacher, importance for the future career etc.). 4. Write a report on the survey results and present it to the rest of the class. Answer any questions from your classmates.______________ 5m form

6th form

7th form

8th form

g* form

Favourite subject Reasons for choices

Model:

For the pupils of the 5th form the favourite subject is Math. They say it’s because they have got a great teacher. For the pupils o f ......

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

LESSON 42 1. Look at the pictures and match them with the words. Use the dictionary if necessary.

1. locker 2. cafeteria 6. blackboard 7. chalk

3. pen 8. desk

4. pencil 5. notebook 9. gymnasium

2. Look at the plan of a new school which will be built soon. Say what the new school will look like. Use the model.

Model: There will be two laboratories in the school. They will be built next to the Staff Rooms. One telephone booth will be placed next to the computer Lab. There will be ....

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

Focus on Grammar! Future Simple Passive Interrogative Form The pupils will be given two new books this semester. Will the pupils be given two new books this semester? What will the pupils be given this semester? When will the pupils be given new books? Negative Form The pupils will NOT be given two new books this semester. 3. Write questions to the sentences. There is a model to help you. 1. This house will be sold soon. (When?) - Will this house be sold? When will this house be sold? 2. A lot of money will be spent on rebuilding the school. (How much money?). 3. All the quiz winners will be given prizes. (What prizes?) 4. The parents will be sent invitations to the school party. (Why?) 5. The tickets for the bus will be bought for all of the pupils. (When?) 6. The pupils will be met at the station. (By whom?) 7. They will be shown a lot of places of interest. (What places?) 8. Then they will be taken for lunch? (Where?) 4. Read the text and choose the word that best completes the sentence. Use the information from the text to speak about your English teacher. Our English Teacher

I like to study English at school. This 1__ is one of my favourite ones. One 2__ for that is our teacher. Her name is Inna Vasylivna. She speaks English 3__ . Her 4__ is almost accent free. It is always very interesting to be present in her lessons. We learn several new words in every lesson. She 5__ English grammar very clearly, but the explanation is always 6__ and easy to understand. She never shouts at the pupils. She 7_ them very much. And she always has got something interesting to say about Great Britain or

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

other English speaking 8__ . We sing English songs, play different 9__ games. We have great fun in her lessons. Every pupil 10 comfortable in the lessons of English. Inna Vasylivna thinks about everyone: those who are bright and those who don’t catch up with the rest of the class. She gives extra assignment for the bright pupils while the weaker pupils work on their usual tasks. We love our teacher. She is the best English teacher in the whole world! 1. A 2. A 3. A 4. A 5. A 6. A 7. A 8. A 9. A 10.A

book decision beautifully pronunciation explained difficult laughs cities language lives

B B B B B B B B B B

subject choice quickly grammar is explaining simple beats continents computer speaks

C predicate C reason C carefully C writing C explains C complicated C explains C countries C board C feels

D teacher D cause D fluently D reading D will explain D complex D respects D counties D street D smiles

5. Let’s discuss the topic of language learning. Answer the following questions. 1. How is our language different from animal language? 2. Does language make the people of each nationality different? 3. What languages do you like or dislike the sound of? 4. Compare your own language with English. 5. Why do you think there are so many different languages in the world? 6. What three languages would you really like to speak, and why? 7. What are the most difficult areas of English for y 8. What do you find the easiest to learn in English? 6. Think of and then write 5 pieces of advice for the pupils to be good language learners. There is a model to help you. Model: In order to speak English well you should learn at least two new words every day. I mean, two new words should be learnt by you every day. You sh ou ld .........

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

LESSON 43 1. Listen to the dialogue and arrange the sentences in the correct order. Mary: Peter: Peter: Peter: Mary: Peter: Mary: Mary:

He looks nice, doesn’t he? Hi Mary, yes. I met him in the headmaster’s office. I didn’t because I had forgotten my textbook. Yes, I think so. I hope so. I hope he won't ask me. Hi Peter did you see our new English teacher? Did you learn your lesson?

2. Rewrite the sentences in the passive voice. 1. Jane will buy a new computer. - A new computer will be bought by Jane. 2. Her friend will recite a poem at the concert. 3. Millions of people will visit the museum. 4. Our teacher will check our test papers. 5. You should not do it. 6. They will not show the new film. 7. He won't see Sue. 8. They will not ask him. 3. Use Simple Future Active or Passive of the verbs in brackets to complete the sentences. Another test in English 1 will be written (to write) tomorrow. It 2 will contain (to contain) five or more exercises. When all the pupils finish writing, the exercise-books 3_____ (to collect) by the teacher. Our exercise-books 4 ____ (to hand in) to the teacher. She 5 ____ (to take) them home and 6 ____ (to check) them up. They 7____ (to return) to the pupils at the next English lesson. We 8 ____ (to get) our tests back and our mistakes 9____ (to correct). All pupils 10 _________(to give) marks for the tests. They 11_____ (to put) into our school record-books and into the class register-book. I hope I 12_____ (to give) a good mark. Anyway, I 13_____ (to see).

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

4. Read the text and say whether the sentences are true or false. Correct the false sentences. Schools in Japan

Japanese school pupils spend 240 days a year at school - that’s forty-five days more than in the United Kingdom. The school year begins in April. Classes are large with 40-45 pupils in each class. At the end of the school day, all pupils take part in “o soji” - they sweep the classrooms and corridors, empty rubbish bins, clean the blackboards and pick up litter outside the school. Then, the after-school clubs begin. After-school clubs are very important in Japan. Popular sports clubs are baseball, football and volleyball, as well as traditional Japanese sports like karate, judo and kendo. Pupils can also take up traditional activities such as calligraphy, origami or others. Over 60% of Japanese parents spend a lot of money on evening classes in private schools for their children. These classes prepare pupils for entrance exams to university. Private schools are often near railway stations to save travelling time for pupils. One more thing - when tired Japanese pupils finally get home, they can’t waste time on TV or computer games. They have got an average of two hours of homework a day plus three hours on Sundays. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

British pupils study the same period of time as the Japanese pupils do. The schoolchildren have to tidy the school building. The school year in Japan finishes in December. The schoolchildren in Japan go home immediately after the lessons are over. Private evening classes are quite expensive in Japan. The Japanese schoolchildren are not busy, so they have got much time for leisure. They have got much homework for the weekend.

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

5. Find the words in the text in exercise 4 with the following meaning. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

To clean the floor with a brush Rubbish on the ground. To start an activity. Decorative handwriting. Folding paper to make shapes and figures. Exhausted because of hard work. The exams that school graduates take to get a degree.

6. Think of a future new thing in your school. Imagine this new thing and describe it. Use the given questions as a plan. Write your description in the copy book. Where will it be located? When will it be started? What will it be made of? How long will it take to build it? What will it be called? What will it be popular for with the pupils?

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

LESSON 44 1. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. 2.

Our school will b e _____ (close) on Monday. The letters will b e ____ (send) to your grandparents as soon as possible. 3. It will b e _____ (do) tomorrow. I promise! 4. Joanne’s new book will b e ____ (publish) next year. 5. Some good plays will b e ___ (put on) at the theatre. 6. Social problems will b e ____ (solve) next year. 7. We will b e ______ (give) our marks soon. Probably next Monday. 8. This book will be ____ _(finish) next week. 9. The teachers will b e ______(give) flowers by their students at the party. 10. The computer will b e ______(use) on Saturday. 2. Let’s discuss the topic of home schooling. Answer the following questions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Do you think home schooling is a good idea? What are the advantages of home schooling? What kind of children benefit from home schooling? Do children who are home schooled get the social skills they need? Is home schooling gaining popularity in Ukraine?

3. Listen to the interview and write three unusual things that pupils at Sudbury School do or don’t do. Interviewer: What’s happening in the school right now? It’s 10 a.m. but most schoolchildren are not in their classrooms like in traditional schools. What are they doing? Teacher: Well, some are playing basketball or riding their bikes. Most of them love sports. Some are painting pictures. Others are discussing their last week school trip to the mountains. Some of them are studying traditional subjects, like Biology or Maths. In this way, they

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

are learning how to work with other people and how to organize their learning. Interviewer: Who runs the school? Teacher: We all do. We meet once a week at the School Meeting and we make all the important decisions. Each pupil and each teacher has got one vote. Interviewer: Linda, what is life like at the school? Pupil: Well, it’s a challenge but we all love it, because I decide what I learn and who teaches me. Many pupils don’t go to classes and they don’t have traditional subjects. I read a lot and I talk to other pupils and the teachers and we do a lot of things together. We learn things when we need them. At the moment, we are reading a lot about the Middle Ages because we’re preparing a play about the history, the clothes and the lifestyles of that time. 4. Read the interview in exercise 3 again. Then answer these questions: Do you like the idea of this kind of school? Why/Why not? Would you like to go to this school? Why/Why not? 5. Read the list of school facilities and then say which of them your school has got/hasn’t got. Then say which facilities you would like to see in your school and why. There is a model to help you. Model:

My school hasn’t got a swimming pool, but it would be nice to go the swimming pool after classes. Swimming is good for our health and general fitness. Moreover, swimming is a necessary skill for every person.

School facilities Library Science laboratory Computer laboratory Cafeteria/canteen Fine arts workshop Sports stadium Gymnasium Swimming pool Playground Reading room

My school has got it

It would be good to have this in our school

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

Medical clinic Audio-visual centre Labour lesson workshop Concert hall 6. Look at the pictures and label them. Use the names of school facilities given in exercise 5.

7. Imagine you are a headmaster of your school. Write 5 -7 promises o f how the school facilities will be renovated. There is a model to help you. Model: I know our cafeteria needs renovations. There aren’t enough chairs and tables. The cafeteria will be redecorated and more tables and chairs will be brought there.

128

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

LESSON 45 1. Read or listen to the dialogue and act it out with your partner. Then make up a similar one. Jane:

A lot of top people in America went to prep schools. Victor: I haven’t heard of them. What kind of schools are they? Jane: They’re very expensive, private boarding schools (uuKO/ia-imepHaT), which offer a very high-quality education. Victor: Why do people spend so much to send their children to them? Jane: Well one of the main reasons is that so many of their graduates get into the top universities like Harvard, Yale and Princeton. Victor: Oh, I see. 2. Fill in the blanks with suitable verbs from those suggested in the box. are, eat, ends, go, is, play, reads, starts, teaches, wear

1. In Great Britain, pupils_______a uniform. 2. They o fte n ______ _ to school by bus. 3. The school day always__________ with Assembly. 4. The Head teacher_________the news. 5. At a break, they _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ with their friends in the school yard. 6. If th e y _______late, they must get a late slip. 7. The science teacher__________ in a laboratory. 8. At lunch time, most children _________ a packed lunch. 9. School usually__________ at 3:30 p.m. 10. When a teacher_________ away, the pupils go to the library. 3. L e t’s discuss the to pic o f home assignm ents. Answ er the follow ing questions. 1. What comes to mind when you hear the word ‘homework’? 2. What kind of homework do you like most? 3. What happens when you don’t do your homework?

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

4. How important do you think homework is? 5. Do you always understand the reasons why the teacher asks you to do a particular homework activity? 6. Do you ever think homework is a waste of time? 7. Do you ever do your homework with friends or ask someone to help you? 8. What was the last piece of homework you really loved doing? 4. Listen to the interview of six pupils on what they like about their schools. Fill in the table with words you hear according to the given categories.

Jane:

What do I like about my school? Um... The computer lab. It’s fun to work on the computers. I can also send emails to my friends. Steven: I like my school because it’s really modern. All classrooms have got computers and projection devices. Linda: I love the recreation room. You can relax and talk to friends at lunch time or after school, or you can play video games. It’s fun! Mark: The cafeteria. It’s attractive and the food is very delicious. Sally: I like the classrooms. The desks are comfortable, and the classrooms have got whiteboards - a lot nicer than those old blackboards. Some classes have got interactive whiteboards. John: I guess my favourite things are the football field and the basketball court. They are both really good. School items

Desks, ....

Places / rooms

Computer lab, ....

Technology

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

5. Write 5 -7 sentences saying what you like about your school. Use exercise 4 as a model. 6. Mini p roject Your ideal school

Think about the following things: location, day school or boarding school, school trips, number of pupils in a class, facilities, uniform or no uniform, school rules, after-school activities.

Plan your description: General description (location, type of school, uniform, rules, facilities); A typical school day (lessons, lunch, breaks); After school (clubs, activities, trips, homework).

Write your description in three paragraphs. Then present your description to the rest of the class.

Model: My ideal school is near the sea. It’s a day school for boys and girls. The pupils may not wear a uniform, but on school festivals a uniform should be worn. There are no rules at this school. The school has got a music studio, a swimming pool and a computer for every student. A typical school day lasts for five hours with a half hour break for lunch. The lessons last for 30 minutes. There is no homework for the pupils. All the tasks are done during the lessons. After school the pupils swim in the pool, or play music in the music studio. The pupils are often taken on exciting school trips to different cities in Ukraine.

131

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

LESSON 46 1. There are a lot of idioms in English which use the school words. Read some of them and then match the sentences to the idioms. a: "the teacher's pet" (the teacher’s favorite student) example: My sister was always the teacher’s pet when she was in the first grade at school. b: "have one’s nose in a book" (be reading a book) example: The boy loves to read and always has his nose in a book. c: "take the roll" (call the names of students in an attendance book and expect them to answer if they are there) example: The teacher took the roll and then we started the lesson. d: "cow college" (a school where farming/agriculture is studied) example: My cousin plans to go to a cow college when he finishes high school. e: "count noses" (count the number of people) example: The teacher stopped to count noses several times during the field trip. 1. Sarah always buys dozens of books. She loves science fiction books, novels and poetry. She always_________ . 2. The teacher always_________ before starting the lesson. 3. The teacher always___________ before going back to school after a school trip. 4. Harry is t h e ________ : he always gets good marks and the teacher is very friendly with him. 5. I went to a ________ and I started my own business. I now have got one hundred cows. 2. Let’s discuss the topic of human intelligence. Answer the following questions. 1. What is intelligence? 2. What would you say about your intelligence? 3. What can you do to increase your intelligence? 4. Why are some people more intelligent than others? 5. Does school make a person more intelligent?

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

6. Do you think scientists will create Artificial Intelligence that is greater than our intelligence? 7. Does intelligence make people more attractive? 8. Does speaking English well make you more intelligent than a friend who cannot speak English at all? 9. Who is the most intelligent person you know? Why do you think so? 10. Do you think all world leaders are intelligent? 11. Are we all born with the same level of intelligence? 3. Turn the following sentences into passive voice. 1. They will build a new house next to ours next year. - A new house will be built next to ours next year. 2. Jane will write a composition about the future of Ukrainian schools. 3. I will take some books from the library on Friday. 4. The teacher will check our test papers next week. 5. The headmaster will change our school rules soon. 6. Our English teacher will introduce some changes in our timetable. 4. Read the text and get ready to make up a text about a typical day at school for pupils at your school. School life for a 13 year old British boy My School is a mixed 11-18 school. There about 1,150 pupils in my school, including 200 in the eighth form. It is called a Sudbury School and specialises in Computers and Maths. My school has got over 1200 computers. I am in Year 8 and now I have to decide what GCSEs I would like to start working towards. Some subjects are compulsory like Maths, English, Science and a foreign language. I am not sure what other GSCEs I will take. This will soon be decided. My school day. I leave home at 6:45 and walk 20 minutes to catch a bus to school. The bus is a special one just for children going to my school. The journey on the bus takes an hour. When I arrive at school, I collect my Tablet PC from the Flexi (Flexible Learning Centre). Then I go to my Tutor Room for Registration at 8:30.

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

We listen to announcements to see what special things are happening at school that day or that week. At about 8:50 we leave Tutor Room to go to our first lesson. Every day I have got a different lesson. Normally it is Humanities but I also have Maths, Drama and Music, and French on the other days. Each lesson lasts an hour. All my lessons are in different rooms and places around the school. I have got different teachers for each lesson. I have got a locker where I can store some of my stuff. Swipe cards. Every pupil carries a swipe card. We swipe into every lesson to let the school know that we have attended that lesson. On the swipe card there are two stripes, a black and a brown. The brown is to swipe into lessons and the black is to get into the toilets and buildings. We can put money on our swipe cards instead of carrying cash around when we want to pay for snacks at the canteen. At 3:10 the school day is over. Sometimes I stay after school for clubs. 5. Read a description of a school. A new headmaster has decided to change it. Look at the pictures and say what changes will be made. Use the Future Simple Passive.

This school is not a very nice place. There’s graffiti on all the walls and the paint is old and ugly. There’s litter on the ground outside the school and in the halls. There are no rubbish bins. The school facilities are ugly too. There aren’t many trees and flowers. There’s no grass because the pupils don’t walk on the paths. When the bell rings, there are many pupils outside the classrooms. Model: This school will be changed into a good place for studies. The walls will be painted and redecorated. The litter will be picked from the ground and rubbish bins will be put in each corner....

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

6. Speak about your school and your school life. Use the mind map given below.

6. Read the text in exercise 4 and 5 and find the words which mean the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

required by a law or rule an act of travelling from one place to another pictures or words painted or drawn on a wall, building a container that you put litter in something (such as a building or large piece of equipment) that is built for a specific purpose a plastic card that you pass through a piece of electronic equipment that reads the information stored on the card unpleasant to look at, not pretty or attractive the act of officially telling people about something the act or process of entering names on an official list

135

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

REVISION LESSONS LESSON 47 1. Guess the word explained by the definition. Model: a period of time when the children learn - lesson 1. the time between the lessons -

2. a list which shows when lessons begin and end 3. a large thing where the teacher writes on with a piece of chalk -

—

4. the material that you write and draw on

5. a small bag for your pens -

6. a special word for a child in a school -

7. the room where the children and a teacher are -

8. the person who looks after the school -

9. a formal written, spoken or practical test -

10. the people who work at a school -

2. Read the poem and learn it by heart. The Wise Owl A wise old owl on sn ogb. The. More be sgw fb e less be spofce, Tbe More be spobe fb e less be begrd. Why cqn’f Y°° be libe. fbgf Wise old bird?

136

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

3. Read the text. Answer the questions and make up a plan to retell i t University Cities Oxford Oxford is a city, and the county town of Oxfordshire, in South East England. It has a population of 134,248 people. Buildings in Oxford reflect every English architectural period since the arrival of the Saxons. Oxford is home to the University of Oxford, the oldest university in the English-speaking world and the world's second oldest university. The university is made up of a variety of institutions, including 38 constituent colleges and a full range of academic departments. Being a city university, it does not have a main campus; instead, all the buildings and facilities are located in different places throughout the city centre. Nowadays, the city is a busy cosmopolitan town. Still with its ancient University, but also home to many businesses and a number of residential areas. Cambridge Welcome to Cambridge - home to the famous University, carols in King's College Chapel and the river Cam. Cambridge is a compact city with outstanding architecture old and new. The beauty of its ancient centre is preserved with its walkable medieval streets, college courts, gardens and bridges. Cambridge is easy to get - just 50 minutes from central London. The city's population is 108,863 (including 22,153 students). Cambridge is best known for the University of Cambridge, which includes the renowned Cavendish Laboratory, King’s College Chapel, and the Cambridge University Library. Founded in 1209, Cambridge is the second oldest university in the English-speaking world

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

and the world’s fourth oldest university. Perhaps most of all, the university is renowned for a long and distinguished tradition in mathematics and the sciences. Among the most famous of Cambridge natural philosophers is Sir Isaac Newton, who spent the majority of his life at the university and conducted many of his now famous experiments within the grounds of Trinity College. Sir Francis Bacon, responsible for the development of the scientific method, entered the university when he was just twelve. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Which university is older: Oxford or Cambridge? What prominent people were among the graduates of Cambridge? What is the student population in Cambridge? Where is the campus of Oxford university located? What year was the beginning of the history for the University of Cambridge?

4. Let’s discuss the topic of language learning. Answer the following questions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

How is our language different from animal language? Does language make the personalities of each nationality different? What languages do you like or dislike the sound of? What are your feelings towards your own language? How would you compare your own language with English? Why do you think there are so many different languages in the world? What three languages would you really like to speak, and why? What are the most difficult areas of English for you? What do you find the easiest to learn in English?

5. Change the sentences into the passive voice. 1. Adam will help me. 2. He will help me with money. 3. Jenny will buy a new phone. 4. The baby will break the toy. 5. Will he cook the food? 6. He will not steal the watch. 7. What will you eat for breakfast? 8. She will not iron her skirt. 9. Jack will not post the letter. 10. We will catch the train.

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

LESSON 48 1. Let’s discuss the topic of education. Answer the following questions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

What comes to mind when you hear the word ‘education’? How important do you think education is? What do you think of the idea of all education being online? In which country do you think you can receive the best education? What is a good education? What do you think of the idea of lifelong education?

2. Read the text and make up a description of your school according to the example suggested in the text. A Typical English School

Welcome to the virtual tour of Woodlands Junior School. The school began in the 1983. The main building of our school is twostoried with four classes on each floor. Our classrooms are large and every classroom, in the main teaching block, has got its own resource area. In all classrooms there is a computer, overhead projector, an interactive whiteboard and flip chart. We have got a well-equipped music room where we play a variety of musical instruments. We have got an Opportunity Centre for individual and small group work with learning support assistances. We have got our adventure playground. We are very fortunate to have a large field. Our students enjoy using it for games and cross-country runs. Many of our children are members of our cross-country running teams. They take part in events across the county.

139

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

3. Complete the sentences with a suitable verb in an appropriate form. 1. I am studying English at school. 2. We usually_____________ to a dialogue. 3. Sometimes, I can’t________ very well because it is noisy in the classroom. 4. The teacher always________questions about the text. 5. The pupils try t o ________the questions. 6. Then, we open our books a n d ________the text. 7. If we don’t _______some words, the teacher explains them. 8. She usually________ English but sometimes she needs to translate some words. 9. Finally, we take our pencils and _____ _ _ the lesson in our copybooks. 10. We have to______ at home because we must do some exercises and know our lessons. 4. Use the words in brackets in the Present or Future Simple Passive. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Our s o n __ (give) sweets only on Saturdays. Not every day. The dishes__ (wash) every day by Kate. She does it after breakfast. The p ro je ct__ (finish) by tomorrow. Don’t worry. A new com puter__ (buy) by my sister next week. Some old film s __ (watch) by them every month. I clean my room but the flow ers__ (water) by my younger sister. Don’t wear that old hat! You look like a clown and yo u __ (laugh) at. New teachers__ (employ) by the school in two weeks.

5. Use the sentences to write the rules you should follow in the lessons. Use the model. Model: Be at your seat before the bell rings. - You should be at your seat before the bell rings. 1. Come to class prepared. Have the proper books and writing utensils. 2. Sit up straight in your chair. 3. Raise your hand if you wish to speak. 4. Do not pass notes. 5. Do not talk while the teacher is talking or while another student is speaking. 6. Do not get up from your seat without permission.

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

LESSON 49 1. Read or listen to the funny school conversations and act them out with your partner. A. Teacher to Child: Teacher: Child:

her kindergarten class: “ Hurry up or we’ll be late!” “What’s the rush?” “If we’re late, we’ll miss your next class!” “If you’re in such a hurry, go on without us.”

B. Teacher: Student:

Why is a math book always unhappy? Because it always has lots of problems.

C. Teacher: Student: Teacher: Student:

Why are you late? Because of the sign. What sign? The one that says, "School Ahead, Go Slow."

D. Teacher:

"He killed a person, tell me this sentence in future tense." "In future tense, he will go to prison.”

Student: E. Mom: Mark: Mom: Mark:

What did you do at school today? We did a guessing game. But I thought you were having a test paper in math. That’s right!

2. Match the names o f the school subjects with activities. a) Maths b) Chemistry c) Geography d) History e) Biology f) English g) Music

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

they learn to speak a foreign language pupils learn about plants & animal life pupils learn about the past they learn to sing and play musical instruments pupils learn numbers they carry out experiments in the lab pupils learn about other countries

3. Classroom management phrases. Make up sentences out of the given words. 1. Who’s today missing ? 2. a of paper. Take sheet 3. please? window, the Can open I

Who's missing today?

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

4. for What's the English? 5. don't understand. 1 6. 1agree with.... 7. you please? Can repeat, 8. Stop on chair! your swinging 9. your hand! Raise 10. English? it good Is 11.1 sorry'm I’m late. 12. agree Do with...? you 4. Answer the following questionnaire by putting a True (T) or a False (F) after each sentence- Then report to the rest of the class about the results of the questionnaire. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R.

I often study English, at home, in a library, on the train. I need English for my work, to pass an exam, to get a job. I don’t like making grammar mistakes when I speak English. I began learning English because my parents felt it was necessary for the future. I love speaking English with other learners of the same level. I go to English conversation classes because I simply want to, not because I have to. I think my teachers should force me to speak more in conversation class. I would love to go on a year-long world tour, even if I had little money. If I don't speak in conversation class, it is because the topic/task is bad. I watch English-language TV and films in English-even though I understand nothing! I hate it when one person does all the talking in conversation class. Quite often, I am happy just to listen to the teacher. I often feel a little stupid when I talk in conversation class. I think the teacher is what motivates a student most. I prefer learning grammar, vocabulary, etc to speaking English. I wish I could go to a conversation class every day instead of just twice a week. Basically, I think a conversation class should be for practising the grammar you have just learnt. I regularly ask the other students questions and comment on what they say in conversation class.

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

INTERPRETATION A, E, F, H, J, P, R = True. This indicates a self-motivated, hard working learner. It also indicates a desire to socialize, to meet other cultures. This is what language is for. The perfect student: A talker and a worker! B, D, G, I, K, N = True. There is a strong sense of obligation to learn, which is not self-motivation. Also, this type of learner blames his performance on others/external factors. C, O = True. This can mean that you are a perfectionist. You pay attention to formal detail. Can be good, but it can also be an obstacle to communication. An anxious talker. G, I, K, L, N = True. This indicates a degree of passiveness. If you want to talk, don’t think about it - act! This learner could also lack self-motivation. M = True. It happens to everybody at the beginning. But you must get over this after a few classes. Q = True. This is a big issue. But how can you talk about the world with a few set phrases? You may be a traditional learner expecting a traditional class. Remember, the ultimate aim of English is to communicate. 5. Let’s discuss the topic of school life. Answer the following questions. 1. What is your first memory of school? 2. Why do you think it is that many children don’t like school? 3. What’s the most important thing you have learnt at school so far? 4. Do you think your school days will be the best days of your life? 5. What’s the most important thing a school should teach children? 6. Is school too dangerous these days? 7. What’s your image of school in other countries? 8. What kind of discipline do you think there should be in schools?

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

LESSON 50 1. Find out what happens at school. Make up sentences out of the given words. Model: 1. starts and five. School at o'clock at finishes 7 School starts at five o’clock and finishes at 7. 2. that Ms Today she had so the classroom dirty to cleaners, call ’s was Bunchett 3. cheat the to tried All no exams the students but during succeeded, one 4. the the schedule, whole Because of every school class Saturday, have will 5. get for ready students to test, his the asked Mr Pratchett 6. weather, trip The to cancelled due the director bad 7. early school the does morning start ? Why in so the 8. Teachers Fridays correct on their only, copies 9. was us so that hard finished yet Bunchett Ms ! it homework gave haven’t Yesterday the I 10. school in use the cannot cellular phone during class. You the 2. Read the school jokes. Try to remember a funny story from your school life and tell it to the rest of the class. 1.

2. 3.

A class went on a school trip to Rome. On Sunday they all went to church and when they came out the teacher said, 'I hope you all behaved well’. 'Oh, yes, sir,’ said one girl. 'A kind money but I said, "no thanks". Our school has a strict dress code. The only time we can dress the way we like is on Halloween. Teacher: Can you tell me something important that didn’t exist 100 years ago? Pupil: Me! Teacher: Why have you got cotton wool in your ears, do you have an infection? Pupil: Well you keep saying that things go in one ear and out the

SCHOOL LIFE

5. 6. 7.

UNIT IV

other so I am trying to keep them it all in! Pupil: The art teacher doesn’t like what I'm making? Dad: Why is that, what are you making? Pupil: Mistakes! Pupil: I don’t think I deserved zero on this test! Teacher: I agree, but that’s the lowest mark I could give you! Father: Why did you get such a low score in that test? Son: Absence. Father: You were absent on the day of the test? Son: No, but the boy who sits next to me was!

3. Fill in the blanks with the word that best completes the sentence. Use the dictionary if necessary. 1.

I have a lot of very d ifficult_______this term. a. exams b. exam c. examination 2. T o _______means to study hard in a short period of time (usually before an exam). a. cramp b. cram c. crumb 3. I thought that th e _______I wrote for my Spanish Literature class was great, but I only got a C. a. essay b. article c. work 4. Did you pass? No, I _______! a. fled b. flipped c. failed 5. A _ _ _ _ _ student is someone who already has an undergraduate degree, and is trying to get an M.A., M.S., Ph.D., etc. a. graduating b. graduate c. gradual 6. A Masters _ _ _ _ _ is something you have to write in order to obtain a Masters Degree. a. theory b. work c. thesis 7. The maximum_______for undergraduate degree students is 21 credit hours in a semester. a. course load b. class number c. load 8. A _ _ _ _ _ student, is one who doesn't have a full course load, a. part-time b. part-study c. full-time 9. When you write a _______, you’re writing a formal written report that includes both research findings and your own ideas. a. test research b. paper research c. work 10. She is a very smart girl. She always gets g o o d _______. a. gradients b. notes c. grades

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

4. Use the model and complete the sentences. Model: Rules for students: Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students Students

must attend their class. have to do their homework. aren’t allowed to be late for their class. should concentrate on their class. can lift up their hand and ask questions. must not use their cell phones in class. aren’t allowed to gossip. have to come to class on time. are required to do their homework. must respect their teachers.

Rules for teachers Teachers can’t hit students. Teachers have to speak loudly and clearly. Teachers are required to prepare for the class. Teachers must come to class on time. Teachers must treat all students equally. Teachers have to turn off their cell phones in the class. Things y o u have to d o :

Students Students Students Students Students

have t o ____ need t o ____ are required t o ____ must____ should____

Things y o u c a n 't d o :

Students Students Students Students Students

can’t ____ must not____ shouldn’t ____ aren’t allowed t o ____ aren’t permitted t o ____

Things y o u can do i f y o u w ant.

Students can____ Students are allowed t o ____ Students are permitted t o ____ It is OK if students____ It is all right if students____

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

LESSON 51 1. Choose the word that best completes the sentence. 1. Tom went to boarding/ grammar school, so he only came home during the holidays. 2. I believe children should go to a single sex/ comprehensive school because it’s better for boys and girls to learn separately. 3. Most children go to state/public school where education is free. 4. Jane’s parents couldn’t send her to grammar/private school when she was young, because it was very expensive to study there. 5. Eton and Harrow are famous state/public schools in Britain. 2. Turn the sentences into the Passive Voice. 1. The Minister of Education will visit the school next week. The school will be visited by the Minister of Education next week. 2. Charles Dickens wrote “David Copperfield” . 3. Students must wear a school uniform at all times. 4. Have the examiners announced the results of the test? 5. The school publishes the newsletter every month. 6. Someone has broken the window on the first floor of our school building. 3. Fill in the gaps with by or with. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

The The The The The

exam hall was filled with nervous students. school was badly dam aged____ the fire. new gym was opened____ the mayor. new school uniform was designed____ a young local designer. classroom walls were covered___ the student’s artwork.

4. Read the text and choose the word that best completes the sentence. As Head Librarian I have got a lot of responsibility. As well as managing a staff of eight 1___, I also supervise all the 2___ of the library. This year we have had a large increase in the number of 3___ students. Due to extra demand for the library time this has created, we’ve 4____our hours. I have also been accepted into the Institute for Learning and Teaching. I see thus as 5___ of my role in supporting learning and as 6__ of the teaching role that I have got within the library.

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

I enjoy the 7 ___ the job provides, though times are hard 8___ . The budget we have to buy books has remained static for the past three years, yet book prices have not and 9___to magazines and periodicals rise. This leaves me with a number of difficult 10___ to make. 1. A person B persons C personal D personals 2. A operated B operates C operations D operatives C medication 3. A medicine B medicines D medical C extension 4. A extending B extended D extensioned B recognizing 5. A recognition C recognized D recognitional 6. A acknowledging B acknowledgecl C acknowledging^ D acknowledgement 7. A variability B variation C varied D variety 8. A finance B financial C financially D financed B subscribing C subscribed 9. A subscription D subscribes C decision 10. A deciding B decided D decisions 5. Match the literature genres with their descriptions. 1. A story about fighting between countries 2. A story about falling in and out of love 3. A story about spaceships and robots 4. A story in which a lot of exciting things happen 5. A story to make you scared 6. A story about witches and princesses 7. A story about cowboys and Indians 8. A story about murder and theft 9. A story about the everyday life of young people 10. A story in which strange and unexpected things happen

crime, detective adventure western fairy tale horror science fiction romance mystery war family

6. Complete the sentences with the words from the box. f

atlas, autobiography, cookbook, dictionary, guidebook, manual, play, textbook

L 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

She looked in th e ____for a map of Austria. It’s a great___ with lots of good recipes for fish. I read th e ____ at home before we saw it at the theatre. She tells stories about her childhood in her___ . If you don’t know a word, look it up in a ____. I’m not sure how to copy photos from my digital camera to my computer - I’ll look in th e ____. 7. We’re using an interesting____in our history classes. 8. When we went to New York, we stayed at a hotel that we found in th e _.

SCHOOL LIFE

UNIT IV

LESSON 52 1. Look a t the p ictu re s and m atch them with the names o f music styles. Complete the table and then p ractise speaking as it is given in the model.

( ----------------------------------------------------------- !-------------------------------------------------------------- \

pop music, jazz, folk music, rock music, Latin music, country music, hip-hop and rap, classical music

love rock music, .... Model:

don’t care for

can’t stand

I love listening to rock music. I like listening to Latin music. I don’t care for folk music, but I can’t stand hip-hop and rap. My friend has got different tastes in music. He loves listening to ....

2. Read the book review. In which paragraph does Jane: Give her opinion about the book? Describe what happens in the book? Give brief information about the book and its author? One of my favourite books is Northern Lights by Philip Pullman. It’s a fantasy story set in Oxford and it’s the first part of a trilogy. It’s the story of a girl called Lyra. She tries to save some children who have been kidnapped by a strange woman called Mrs. Coulter. Lyra and some friends travel north to look for the missing children, who include her best friend, Roger. The ending is very exciting, with an interesting twist.

UNIT IV

SCHOOL LIFE

I liked the book for a number of reasons. The author has created an amazing fantasy world. The story is very gripping and I found it difficult to put down. The characters are convincing. The book is sometimes compared with the Harry Potter stories. But I think it’s more thought-provoking and less childish. I thoroughly recommend it.

3. Read the review in exercise 2 again and say w hether the sentences are true o r false. C orrect the false sentences. 1. Northern Lights was written by J.K. Rowling. 2. The story is set in London. 3. The main character is a girl.

4. Jane didn’t like the book. 5. Jane thinks the book is much better than Harry Potter.

4. Look a t the words and phrases in the box. How m any o f them can you fin d in the review?

I liked the book because . In the end, ... It was written by (author). It’s a (type of a story)... It’s set in (place)

It’s the story of .... It was made into a film. The main character is (name) .. There is a twist at the end. I thoroughly recommend it. The ending is ...

5. Read a sh o rt review o f “ The Lord o f the Rings” . Use the phrases from exercise 4. The "Lord of the Rings'9 is a fantasy story. 1____ J.R.R. Tolkien. 2_____an imaginary land called “Middle Earth”, and 3____ a group of hobbits who have to destroy a magic ring. 4______called Frodo. 5_____ they succeed in destroying the ring. A few years ago 6_____ . Did you see it at the cinema? Anyway, it’s a great book - 7______ !

6. Write a review o f the book you have re ce n tly read. Use the headings to make notes first. Then w rite your review. Paragraph 1: Paragraph 2: Paragraph 3:

General information: title, author and type of the book. Story and characters: Where is it set? Who are the main characters? What happens? Your opinion: Why did you like it? For example: It’s funny/ moving/ exciting/ gripping/ interesting. It contains lots of interesting characters. I really wanted to know what was going to happen. There are lots of surprises.

LESSON 53 (OPTIONAL)

LESSON 54 1. Read o r listen to the dialogue. A c t it o u t with your p a rtn e r. Make up a sim ilar one. Jane: Do you like jazz, Victor? Victor: No, I don't like it very much. Do you? Jane: Well, yes, I do. I’m a real fan of Wynton Marsalis. Victor: Oh, does he play the piano? Jane: No, he doesn’t ! He plays the trumpet. So, what kind of music do you like? Victor: I like rock a lot. Jane: Who’s your favourite group? Victor: The Cranberries. I love their music. How about you? Do you like them? Jane: No, I don't. I can’t stand them!! 2. Read the te x t and answ er the questions. Music Everybody will probably agree that music plays a very important role in our life. We listen to music every day: concerts on TV or on the radio, or even music accompaniment of the films and advertisement melodies. We often sing when we feel happy, or when we celebrate different holidays. Most people also like to produce music - to play different musical instruments. Very often girls prefer to play the piano, or the violin, but boys usually play the guitar or the accordion. But some boys choose the drums as their favourite musical instrument. When many musical instruments play in a band, we call this band an orchestra. Of course, the music of the orchestra sounds the best. 1. What musical instruments can you name? 2. What do we call a band in which many musical instruments play the same melody? 3. What musical instruments do the girls usually play? 4. What musical instruments do the boys prefer to play? 5. Where and when can we listen to the music? 6. What role does music play in our life?

151

........ :

UNITY

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE ::: :

...

3. Use the words from the box to label the pictures.

4. Use the words from exercise 3 and s o rt them o u t into the given categories. A dd up m ore instrum ents to each category. Use the dictio na ry i f necessary. Wind / woodwind instruments

flute, ...

Brass instruments

trumpet, ...

String instruments

guitar, ...

Percussion instruments

drums, ...

Keyboard instruments

accordion, ...

5. Guess the names o f the m usical instrum ents. 1. This musical instrument is both a stringed and a keyboard instrument. Its ancestor is the harpsichord. It is th e ___ . 2. This percussion instrument makes a lot of noise. It is th e ___ . 3. This wind instrument is often used in jazz music. It is th e ____ . 4. This wind instrument is used by Lisa in the popular series The Simpsons'. It is th e ___ . 5. This wind instrument is very small. It is th e ___ . 6. This stringed instrument is very popular. It can be electric. It is th e ___ . 7. This percussion instrument has the form and the name of a geometric figure. It is th e ___ . 8. This musical instrument produces a very tender sound. It is played by Vanessa May.

6. Think o f any m usical instrum ent and w rite its description. You should include the follow ing: What the instrument is; What category it belongs to (percussion, wind, brass, etc.); What kind of sound it produces (loud, soft, tender, deep, rhythmic, melodic); Whether you can play this instrument; Whether you would like to learn to play it and why. 7. C orrect m istakes in the follow ing sentences. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

The piano is a percussion musical instrument. The violin belongs to the brass group of musical instruments. Cello is a wind musical instrument. The trumpet has got keys, so it’s a keyboard musical instrument. The drums are a string musical instrument.

153

::::::

UNIT V

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

LESSON 55 1. Together with your p a rtn e r make a lis t o f places you can hear m usic w ithout yo ur personal choice. 2. Read the te x t and say w hether you have liste d the places m entioned in the text. Music is all around us - in shopping centres, at football grounds, in taxis, at the gym, and even in hospitals. We can’t hide away from it. We also don’t have any influence on what to listen. However, we rarely think about who chooses the music, and we have no idea how they decide what music to play. “It’s a science”, explains Jim Collins, who is DJ at the Bluewater Shopping Centre. 1____ . “We usually play music in the dining areas in the shops, entrance halls and the courtyards. There you can hear a whole range of different music, from present day music hits to timeless classic songs” . “I make my selections with the help of the buyers. I consult with them at different megastores. In the morning I usually play some loud music. 2_____ . The busier the shopping centre gets, the more relaxing the music needs to be.” It’s difficult to say whether the customers ever listen to the music. Jim knows the answer. He says that once they played a Christmas song at Easter. In a few minutes a huge crowd came to the reception to tell them to change the song. “I don’t think the people care about the music on the football ground, to be honest. 3_____ ”, says Bill Newman, an announcer at Prenton Park football ground. “As usual, we play / Feel Good when our local team score, and then we play Going Home when people are leaving the stadium”. Several taxi drivers were asked by music experts as well. What is important for them is to have music playing, but it’s not important for them what they listen to. No one complains about that song is played, but the minute it gets too loud, then people complain. 4____ .

154

3. Read the te x t again and fill in the m issing sentences 1-4. a. But if we’ve got a big cup match and we play We Will Rock You, they clap. b. They just turn on the radio and listen to whatever comes on. c. It has got more than 27 million visitors who spend over 770 million pounds a year. d. But later on, it’s quieter. Focus on Grammar! Past Simple Passive Form Affirmative

Interrogative

subject + form of the verb to be (was/ were) + past participle

form of the verb to be (was/were) + subject + past participle

The book was taken to the classroom.

Was the book taken to the classroom? Negative

subject + form of the verb to be (was/ were) + NOT + past participle Those songs weren’t chosen by DJ. 4. Read the te xt in exercise 2 again and fin d a sentence in the Past Simple Passive. Turn the sentence into the active voice. 5. Look through the te x t in exercise 2 and answ er the questions. 1. When is relaxing music played in shopping centres? 2. How do we know that the people actually listen to what is played in the shopping centres? 3. How is the choice of music decided on the football ground at Prenton Park? 4. What do taxi drivers have to do so that their passengers don’t complain? 5. Why do you think some people choose to play classical music?

155

6. Read the poem s about m usic and learn one o f them b y h ea rt. Music

What's your very favourite tune? Is it from that funny cartoon?

Music brings joy, to all of our hearts, It's one of those, emotional arts.

Songs are fun, to listen and dance, Shake and jump, when you get a chance.

Sounds of melodies, that we truly adore, Brings us pure pleasure, as our spirits do soar.

Play your music, right after school, It's not about, trying to be cool.

Music that touches us, we can’t help but smile, We’re free to choose, genre or style.

When a super fun song, enters your ear, You'll get so excited, suddenly you’ll cheer.

Music clearly, enlightens our days, Makes us happy, in so many ways.

Go and pick songs, that you like the best, Enjoy your music, with smiles and zest.

7. Turn the sentences into the passive voice. 1. Who wrote this book? - Who was this book written by? 2. The children rang the bell a few minutes ago. 3. The children forgot the whole story in a few days. 4. Did the president make his speech last night? 5. Who wrote the music to this song? 6. She sang a song. 7. Somebody hit me. 8. She didn't win the prize. 9. They didn’t make their beds. 10. I did not tell them. 11. Did he send the letters? 12. Everyone knew them. 13. All the students understood the explanation. 14. Thomas and his brother built that house.

156

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

UNITV

LESSON 56 1. Read the sentences about m usic. M atch the words in bold with the definitions. 1. I prefer songs to instrumental music. 2. I love driving a car and singing along to the songs on the radio. 3. I am a hopeless singer, so I usually just whistle or hum along. 4. I don’t really enjoy recorded music on the radio or on CDs. I prefer live music. 5. I am not really interested in the lyrics - it’s the tune that’s important for me. 6. Dance music is my favourite - it has got a great beat. 7. Sometimes I hear a song and then I can’t get it out of my head. It’s very catchy. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

the words stop thinking about it make a music noise with your lips together music composed for instruments, not voices music played in front of the audience music played in a studio and put on a CD or tape melody sing as you listen musical pulse or rhythm

2. Complete the sentences with the p re se n t o r p a st simple passive o f the verb in brackets. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

How many newspapers__ (print) in Britain every day? Who__ (this play / write) by? German___ (speak) in Germany, Austria, and part of Switzerland. The royal wedding____ (watch) by millions of people in 2011. Nowadays, a lot of computers____ (make) in Korea. The Harry Potter films_____ (not direct) by Steven Spielberg. How much_____ (paper / recycle) in Poland each year? In the UK, alcohol_____ (not sell)to anyone under 18. It’s against the law.

3 . Read the te xt and then say what B ritney speaks about h e rse lf. Model:

Britney says that her mother noticed a talent in her and... BRITNEY SPEARS BY HERSELF

About my family... My mom noticed that I had a talent and really encouraged me to “go for it.” I realized after the Mickey Mouse Club that I loved performing for not only my family, but for everyone who would watch. I really wanted to follow my dream, and my family was always very supportive from the beginning. My parents play a big role in my career. I’m so thankful that they supported and believed in me. Mom is involved in my website but...she's a teacher and the people asked her if she would mind writing something. She says it's very therapeutic for her. But it’s so important that she stays my mom - that she's not a stage mom. I do my business and when I come home I can just be me and my mum can cook for me. I wouldn't like it if she was too involved. The crazy little Jamie... My little sister Jamie Lynn? She is crazy! When I was little, I was really determined but I was still rather shy and I kept to myself. She’ll tell you flat out that she is the biggest star! I asked her to be in my performance for the Grammy’s, to be the little girl at the very beginning that’s dreaming about being me and she said, 'You know, if I do that, the next day all these producers will be calling me! I'm just not ready to deal with that! My hobbies? I love to shop! I also love talking on the phone, going to movies with friends and reading romance novels! I also have a deep passion for dancing and singing... but dancing was really my first love! My favourite songs... I really like, “From the Bottom of My Broken Heart!” Not that it relates to my life, I just like it! But my personal favourite song is “Sometimes.” So I really want my fans to feel and hear how much these songs mean to me.” My favourite artists... I like Michael Jackson, Whitney Houston, Mariah Carey, Prince, Madonna, Monica, Matchbox 20, Natalie Imbruglia, N’SYNC and Backstreet Boys. That’s only a few to mention! 158

::y § § g M ! § S l l l M •

i:iiii:;;:ii:

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

UNITV

4. Read the te xt in exercise 3 again and say w hether the sentences are true o r false. C orrect the false sentences. 1. Britney’s aunt inspired the girl to take up a singing career. 2. Britney’s mother writes comments for the singer’s website. 3. Britney’s little sister Jamie believes that she sings better than her star sister. 4. Britney can’t stand talking to her close people, like friends, on her cell phone. 5. She doesn’t have any interests or activities for pleasure. 6. Britney hates all her songs. 7. Whitney Houston was on the list of Britney’s favourite singers. 5. Read B ritney Spears fa c t file and make sentences in the Past Simple Passive. Model:

December 2, 1981 - Britney’s birthday. - Britney was born on December 2, 1981.

the family moves to New York ’’Baby One More Time" brought the first success Britney releases her second album "Oops! I did it again" Britney plays a role in her first film debut “Crossroads” Forbes Magazine names Britney “ Hollywood’s Most 2002 Powerful” Music experts announce her the best selling female 2008-09 artist of the 2000s 1996 1999 2000 2002

2005

Britney gives birth to her first son, Sean.

Feb 2005

Britney won her first Grammy for the single "Toxic" as Best Dance Recording.

Sep 2006

Britney gives birth to her second son, Jayden.

6. M ini p roject. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Choose your favourite music celebrity (singer, musician). Find the information about this person. Make notes about his / her life and the path to fame. Find pictures of this person (music and lyrics if it’s a singer, music pieces if it’s a musician etc). 5. Make a presentation in front of the class about the person you have chosen. Answer any questions from your classmates. 159

•: ■

UNITY

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

::::::::: ::::::

LESSON 57.

MUSIC GENRES 1. Read the te x t and p ay attention to the words in bold. Use the dictionary i f necessary. L ist the m usic genres th a t are m entioned in the text. Model: The following music genres are discussed in the text: pop music, ... People all over the world love listening to music. They love going to concerts to hear live music, and they love listening to recordings of their favourite artists. Nearly all of the most important genres of popular music in the last century have come from the USA. This is where African and European musical traditions came together, and it’s this mixture of traditions that gave birth to popular music. Some people love listening to the melodies and lyrics of pop music, and others love moving to the beat of dance music. Some prefer the beautiful harmonies of classical music, and others like the complex rhythms of jazz or the power and excitement of rock music. There are those who like the strong beats and lyrics of hip hop, or the music of other genres like country music, folk music and Latin music. 2. M atch the words with th e ir definitions. 1. beat

a. the combining of musical notes that sound good when played or sung together

2. classical music

b. a genre of popular music in Latin America and Spain that has complex rhythms

3. country music

c. a musical genre in which artists rap over beats and sampled sounds

4. folk music

d. a pattern of beats and sounds that musicians play in time to and dancers move to

5. genre

e. a genre in which artists improvise within a rhythmic and harmonic framework

6. harmony

f. a popular music genre with short, melodic songs that are easy to remember

7. hip hop / t? _ »t rap

g. a genre of American music with origins in the rural folk music of Europe

8. jazz

h. the regular pulse in music that dancers move to and audiences clap to

9. Latin music 10. live 11.pop music 12.rhythm

music played at a concert in front of an audience

traditional music from a particular region or country

k. a kind or style of music, movie, TV show, painting, etc I.

European orchestral and keyboard music that’s written by composers

3. Fill in the blanks with the words from exercise 2. 1. Dance music always has got a strong____ . 2. Jane loves listening to ____ , especially the music of Mozart and Beethoven. 3. Many people were surprised when Ray Charles began singing ____ . 4. Did you hear any traditional ___ while you were in China? 5. In music classes at school, the only ___ we studied were classical music and jazz. 6. If singers don’t sing in ___ , it can sound terrible. 7. When my friend wants to listen to hip hop, she always puts on Kanye West. 8. If you want to hear great___ , listen to the recordings of John Coltrane and Miles Davis. 9. I hadn’t heard much ___ until I visited Mexico and South America. 10. You don't hear ___ music in dance clubs anymore, only recorded music. 11. My uncle’s nearly 60, but he still likes listening to ____ . 12. The ____ of African music are 161

...

m uch m ore co m p lex than those o f European m usic.

4. Read o r listen to the dialogue and a c t it o u t with your p a rtn e r. Jane: V icto r: Jane: V icto r: Jane: V icto r: Jane: V icto r: Jane:

Hi, V icto r! V icto r, can you hear m e? I say “ H i!” Oh, sorry, Jane. I c o u ld n ’t hear you. I w as listen ing to m usic. W hat kind o f m usic is th at? It’s pop m usic. I love it. It’s Enrique Iglesias’s best single “ I like it” . I have never heard it. It has g o t a c a tc h y m elo dy. W hen I firs t listen e d to it I k e p t h u m m in g it all day. In 2010 it w as a sm ash hit. Oh, I see. Probably I should listen not only to the father Iglesias, but to his son as well. Do you m ean Ju lio Iglesias? Yes, I do. Latin m usic is m y fa vo u rite . I love th e u p b e a t rh yth m , its fa s t te m p o . It m akes m e fe e l relaxed and happy.

5. Work in pairs. Use the expression in the boxes and make up sim ilar dialogues as the one in exercise 4. Words describing m usic : heavy, u pb e a t, ca tch y, agg re ssive, fast, happy, lively, loud, m o n o to n o u s, relaxing, re p e titive , ro m a n tic , sad, slow , m e la n ch o lic, jazzy, fu n ky, o rc h e s tra l

r Expressions : It has

g o t a c a tc h y m elody; It has g o t a fa s t te m p o ; It's ve ry cheesy; It's a tim e le s s classic; It b rin g s b a ck m e m o rie s; It w as a sm ash hit; : It m akes m e fe e l relaxed / h a p p y / e xcite d / n o s ta lg ic / sad ...;

K 6. Write 5 -7 sentences about your favourite song. Use the expressions from exercise 5 7. Turn the follow ing sentences into the passive voice. 1. S o m eo ne to ld him to sto p behaving like a ch ild . 2. A th ie f sto le m y d o g . 3. The ju d g e gave him tw o w ee ks in w hich to pay th e fin e . 4. T hey m ake th e se a rtific ia l flo w e rs o f silk. 5. T hey fe e d th e seals at th e zoo tw ic e a day. 6. W ho w ro te it? 7. T hey show ed her th e easie st w ay to do it. 8. Lig h tnin g s tru c k th e old oak. 9. A je llyfish stu n g her. 10. W hat did he w rite it w ith? - He w ro te it in p en cil.

162

UNITV

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

LESSON 58 1. Do you know m odern pop singers? M atch the photos with the names.

Bruno Mars

Justin Beiber

One direction

Rihanna

Tylor Swift

2. Read the te x t and answ er the questions a fte r it. The History of Blues W hen m illion s of A frica n s w ere tra n s p o rte d to A m e rica as slaves in th e 18th and 19th ce n tu rie s, th e ir m e lo d ie s and rh yth m s w e n t w ith them . T hey knew th a t singing to g e th e r m ade w orking easier, and it w as in th e se w o rk so n g s th a t A frica n rh yth m s and m e lo d ie s w ere p re se rve d until slavery end ed in 1856. And w hen th e y e xp re sse d th e ir fe e lin g s by c re a tin g new so ngs, A frica n m e lo d ie s co u ld be heard in th e tu ne s. It w as th is new co m b in a tio n o f A frican and W estern m usic th a t led to th e gen re we now call '’ b lu e s". S om e blues songs to ld sto rie s o f h e a rtb re a k and pain, and th e se w ere o fte n slow and sad. B ut o the rs w ere a b o u t love, or having fun, and these w ere up-tempo (having a fa s t beat) and goo d to d ance to. Various blues styles d eveloped over the years, som e in sm all to w ns o f th e A m erican south and o th e rs in citie s like C hicago and New O rleans. But w he reve r th e m usic w as played, listeners heard a sound th a t influenced a lm o st every genre o f p o p u la r m usic, fro m jazz and soul (a style o f m usic th a t co m b in e s rhythm and blues and gospel m usic) to hip hop. If y o u ’d like to hear som e early blues, try searching fo r the re co rd in g s o f Blind W illie M cTell, Bukka W hite

and Lightnin' H opkins. For later blues, try Billie Holiday, M ud dy W aters, H ow lin’ W o lf and John Lee H ooker. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

W hen w as th e b e g in n in g o f blues? W hat p e o p le cre a te d b lues m usic? W hat kinds o f sto rie s w ere typ ica l o f b lues songs? W hat fa m o u s b lues s in g e rs can you nam e? W hat m u sic g e n re s w e re in flu e n ce d by blues?

3. Read the te xt in exercise 2 and find the sentences in the passive voice. Turn these sentences into the active voice. Add up the necessary information. There is a m odel to help you. Model:

W hen m illions o f A frica n s w ere tra n s p o rte d to A m e rica as slaves in th e 18th and 19th ce n tu rie s, th e ir m e lo d ie s and rh yth m s w e n t w ith th e m . - When the Europeans transported

millions of Africans as slaves to America in the 18th and 19th centuries, their melodies and rhythms went with them. 4. Go round the class and ask your classm ates about th e ir m usic preferences. Then com plete the table and p re se n t your findings to the re s t o f the class. Model: B: A: B: A: B:

A: W hat style o f m usic do you like?

I like hip hop and rap and so m e kind o f rock. W ho is y o u r fa v o u rite s in g e r o r m usician? I o fte n listen to Pink Floyd, M aroo n 5 and o th e rs. W hich is y o u r least fa vo u rite m usic gen re ? I d o n ’t listen to classica l m usic. R o c k ’n ’roll d o e s n ’t in te re s t m e to o . I kn ow m any p e o p le are crazy a b o u t Elvis Presley, b u t his so n g s d o n ’t sound e xcitin g to me.

C la s s m a te ’s nam e and su rn am e

164

Favourite style s and s in g e rs / m usician s

tmms

Least fa v o u rite g e n re s and s in g e rs / m usician s

5. Listen to the CD review and com plete the ch a rt. Enrique Iglesias is one o f the m ost fu lfillin g a rtists o f th e c u rre n t pop scene. I d e cid e d to buy E nriq u e ’s Spanish alb u m s a fte r enjoying his English album so m uch. First o f all, I have to say th a t his Spanish alb u m s are very d iffe re n t fro m his English one, th e y contain m ostly slow songs, b u t th e y ’ re still aw esom e! Listening to his Spanish s tu ff m ade m e beco m e an even b ig g e r fan! Cosas Del Amor is ju s t bre athta king ! If you love g o rg e o u s ballads, then you should buy this album ! E nriq u e ’s ballads are w ha t fantasies are m ade of. I’ve never heard ballads filled w ith so m uch p o e try and sung so em otionally. I d o n 't know Spanish, b ut luckily I w as able to fin d tra n sla tio n s o f th e songs so I know w ha t h e ’s singing about. These so ng s are so ro m a n tic and beautiful. ’’Nunca Te Olvidare" has g o t only a piano and violins in th e b a ckg ro u n d ; it’s stunning, sad, and beautiful. R eturning to th e CD, it's very g oo d, I highly re co m m e n d it.

Singer: Enrique Iglesias__________________________ Album:______________________________________ Most popular song:____________________________ Album also includes:____________________________ Why you recommend the album:__________________

___________________________ J 6. M ini p ro je c t: CD review. Think o f your favourite CD and w rite its review. Use the m odel in exercise 5 and the fram e given below. The sin g e r:

The title o f th e CD: is a(n )

w ith

. H e /sh e is a ta le n te d sin g e r

vo ice . H is /h e r so n g s are

The m o st p o p u la r song is

. The a lb u m also in clu d e s

. I s tro n g ly re c o m m e n d th e CD b e ca u se

165

LESSON 59 1. M usic is n o t only about singing. Som ebody has to com pose m elodies. Do you know prom inent com posers? M atch the photos with the names. What can you say about each m usician?

1. F ryd e ryk F ranciszek C hopin - D 2. W o lfg a n g A m a de us M oza rt 3. Ludw ig van B eethoven

4. R ob e rt S chum ann 5. Jo ha nn S ebastian Bach 6. M ykola Lysenko

2. Now m atch each com poser’s name with the b rie f notes from th e ir biographies. 1. A G erm an com poser, one o f the m ost fa m o u s and influential o f all c o m p o s e rs . His b e s t-k n o w n c o m p o s itio n s in clu d e 9 sym p h o n ie s, 5 piano c o n c e rto s , 1 violin c o n c e rto , 32 piano so na ta s w ith th e m ost p op ula r M o o n lig h t sonata, 16 string qua rtets, his g re a t opera, Fidelio. D uring his last ye ars he w e n t c o m p le te ly d e a f b u t ke p t w ritin g m usic. 2. B orn in S alzburg, he show ed m usic a b ility fro m his e a rlie st c h ild h o o d . He w as c o m p e te n t on ke yb o a rd and violin by age five, and he c o m p o s e d fro m th e age o f five and p e rfo rm e d b e fo re E uropean royalty. He c o m p o s e d m o re th an 600 w o rks. The c irc u m s ta n c e s o f his e arly death are still a m yth. 3. A Polish c o m p o s e r and a v irtu o so p ia n ist o f th e R om a ntic era, w ho w ro te p rim a rily fo r th e solo piano. A t th e age o f 21 he se ttle d in Paris and d u rin g th e last 18 years o f his life, he gave o nly 30 p u b lic p e rfo rm a n c e s . He s u p p o rte d h im s e lf by selling his co m p ositio ns and teaching piano, fo r w hich he was in high dem and. 4. A G erm an c o m p o s e r and influ e n tia l m usic c ritic . He le ft th e s tu d y o f law, in te n d in g to pursue a c a re e r as a virtu o so pianist, b u t a hand in ju ry end ed th is d re a m . He th e n fo c u s e d his m usical e n e rg ie s on c o m p o s in g .

166

UNITV

5. A G erm an c o m p o s e r and org an m usician o f th e B a ro q u e p eriod . His c o m p o s itio n s in clu d e th e B ra n d e n b u rg C o n ce rto s, th e G o ld b e rg V ariations, th e M ass in B m inor, tw o Passions, and o ve r th re e h u n d re d ca nta ta s. He is now g e n e ra lly re g a rd e d as one o f th e g re a te s t c o m p o s e rs o f all tim e . 6. A U krainian co m p o se r, pianist, c o n d u c to r and e th n o m u sico lo g ist. D uring his tim e at Kiev U niversity, he c o lle c te d and a rra n g e d U krainian fo lk s o n g s , w hich w ere p u b lish e d in seven volum es. O ne o f his p rin cip a l so u rc e s w as th e ko b za r O stap Veresai (a fte r w ho m he la te r nam ed his son).

3. Work in pairs. Ask and answ er the questions given below. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Have you g o t m u sic classe s a t sch o o l? Do you like th em ? Can you play a m usical in stru m e n t? W hich? How w ell? Can you read m usic note sh ee ts? How w ell? Have you g o t a g o o d sin g in g voice? W hat s o rt o f so n g s do you like sing ing ? 5. Can you re co g n ize m usic w ritte n by any cla ssica l c o m p o se rs? W hich ones? 6. H ow m any m usical in s tru m e n ts fro m an o rc h e s tra can you re co g n ize o r nam e? W hich ones?

4. Read the te x t about Wolfgang M ozart and p u t the paragraphs a -g in the c o rre c t order. Then com plete the blanks with the c o rre c t linking words from the box. “Music is my life and my life is music. Anyone who does not understand this is not worthy of god.” - W. A. M ozart. a. _____ , d e sp ite his fa m e he s tru g g le d to m anage his fin a n c e s and m oved betw e en p e rio d s o f p o ve rty and p ro sp e rity. M o za rt e arned a su b sta n tia l sum fro m his su cce ssfu l o p e ra s, b u t he w as e xtra va g a n t in s p e n d in g and o fte n e n d e d up in fin a n cia l d iffic u ltie s . b. M o za rt w as born in S alzburg to a m usical fa m ily. From an e arly age, th e yo u n g M o za rt sh ow e d all th e sign s o f a p ro d ig io u s m usical ta le n t. By th e age o f 5 he co u ld read and w rite m usic, and he w o u ld e n te rta in p e o p le w ith his ta le n ts on th e k e y b o a r d ._____ he w as 6 he w as w ritin g his firs t c o m p o s itio n s . He w ro te his firs t o pe ra , M itrid a te Re di Ponto, in 1770 w hen he w as o nly 14 ye a rs old. c . _____ in 1782, he m a rrie d a g a in st th e w ishe s o f his fa m ily; he had 6 c h ild re n b u t o nly 2 survived infancy.

UNITV

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

:■■■■V- ■ :

d. M o za rt w as ve ry p ro d u c tiv e until his health g o t ve ry bad and he d ie d o f kidn e y fa ilu re in 1791, age d 35. e. The w o rk o f M o za rt is e p ic in sco p e and p ro p o rtio n . He co m p o s e d o p e ra s, sym p h o n ie s, c o n c e rto s , and sing le p ie ce s fo r th e piano. In th e b e g in n in g o f his ca re e r, M o za rt had a p o w e rfu l a b ility to learn and re m e m b e r fro m th e m usic he heard fro m o th e rs. But, as he m atu red he d e ve lo p e d his very own style and in te rp re ta tio n s . f . ___M o za rt w as b ro u g h t up a Rom an C a th o lic, som e o f his g re a te s t w o rk s are re lig io u s in nature. g. ______ his ch ild h o o d , he w o u ld fre q u e n tly to u r va rio us p ala ces a ro u n d E urope playing fo r royal g u e s t s . ____he w as 17, he a c c e p te d a p o s t as a c o u rt m usician in S alzburg, _____in 1781, he m oved p e rm a n e n tly to Vienna w h e re he stayed fo r th e rest o f his life. In Vienna, he b e ca m e w ell know n and w as o fte n in d e m a n d as a c o m p o s e r and p e rfo rm e r.

5. The language o f m usic can be often found in m any idioms. M atch the idiom s with th e ir meaning. Use the dictionary if necessary. Make up your own sentences with each idiom. Model:

fa c e th e m usic - to a c c e p t c ritic is m o r s o m e th in g you have d one.

p u n ish m e n t fo r

E xam ple se n te n ce : If she lies to me, then she'll face the music. fa c e the m u sjc

to tell everyone p ro u d ly a b o u t yo u r a chievem ents

m aking very sm all ch an ge s to so m e th in g in o rd e r to m ake it w o rk as w ell as p o ssib le rin g s a to ch a n g e y o u r o p in io n c o m p le te ly , e sp e cia lly b eca use you kn ow it will brin g you an a dva ntag e bell to a c c e p t c ritic is m o r p u n ish m e n t fo r s o m e th in g you fin e tu n in g have done b lo w y o u r to d e c id e how to deal w ith a situ a tio n as it develops, own tru m p e t ra th e r th a n a ctin g a c c o rd in g to plans m ade e a rlie r m usic to m y ears

change your tune play it by ear

to be som ething th a t you are very pleased to hear

so m e th in g , esp. a nam e, is fa m ilia r to you

......

SSSSSSs

LESSON 60 1. Read o r listen to the interview with Ruslana in 2 0 0 5 . Then say the follow ing: W hat c o u n trie s did she visit? W hat a w a rds did she get? W hat m usic g e n re s d oe s she like listen ing to ?

Interviewer: At w h a t p o in t in y o u r life you are now , at th e tim e w hen you are giving th is interview ? Ruslana: I am a m b itio u s and have g o t e no ug h p o te n tia l to m ove fo rw a rd . I am w o rkin g fo r th e fu tu re , and n ot ju s t e n jo yin g th e fam e. I have g o t g re a t ideas fo r new show s, new a rra n g e m e n ts, new so n g s and co s tu m e s. Interviewer: Lately, y o u ’ve been tra ve llin g and to u rin g a lot, giving p re ss c o n fe re n c e s and m ee tin g p eo p le . W h a t have you g ain ed in th e se trave ls? Ruslana: A lo t o f th in g s, b u t th e m ain one — a lo t o f e xp e rie n ce . E xperience is n o t so m e th in g th a t you can gain sittin g a t hom e. I’ve le a rn t a lo t o f th in g s a b o u t the w o rld . In som e c o u n trie s I’ve b e co m e q u ite w e ll-kn o w n . In T urkey, fo r exam ple, th e y gave m e th e Person o f th e Y ear A w ard w hich is usually given o nly to th e T urks — and I’ m a fo re ig n e r. Also, in T u rke y th e y w e lco m e d m e w ith a huge p ic tu re m ade o f flo w e rs w hich said, Ruslana, we love you! In Israel, G reece, and C ypru s I w as given a ve ry w arm re c e p tio n , and in G erm any, S w eden and B e lgiu m th e re are m any Ruslana fan clu b s. I’ve e sta b lish e d goo d re la tio n s w ith jo u rn a lis ts and even w ith so m e o fficia ls. I’ve been given p re se n ts; I’ve rece ived invita tio n s to co m e to sta y a t re s o rts as a w ay o f a p p re c ia tio n . Interviewer: W hich m u sic — a p a rt o f yo u r own, o f co u rse — do you like best? Ruslana: I like “ e th n ic m u s ic ” — fo lk m u sic o f S erbia, T urkey, M oldova, R um ania, H ungary. B ut lately I’ve begun listen ing to classica l m u sic to o — a fte r all, I w as e d u ca te d

169

;::::

UNITV

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

: :::::.....: :

at a m usic co n se rva to ry! V e rd i’s R equiem , B ra h m s ’ S e co nd C o n c e rto fo r th e Piano and O rch e stra , B eethoven — b u t e ve ryb o d y likes him . And also I like hard rock, real hard. Interviewer: Did you g e t to m e e t any c e le b ritie s o r stars? I did. C eline Dion w as one o f th e m . I m e t m any sta rs in Ruslana: Las Vegas, at th e aw a rds p re se n ta tio n c e re m o n y w hen I w on th e W o rld M u sic Aw ard as a p op sin g e r w ho had sold th e g re a te s t n u m b e r o f CDs w ith her m usic o u tsid e her co u n try. Interviewer: H ow d o e s U kraine lo o k to you a fte r all y o u r travels? Ruslana: I began to u n d e rsta n d th e U krainian m e n ta lity and p sych o lo g y m uch b e tte r. And I saw how b e a u tifu l m y c o u n try is. Interviewer: Do you th in k y o u ’ ll p re serve y o u r “ w ild ” im age th ro u g h o u t y o u r ca re er? I’ m a person w ho is e xp e rim e n tin g and fa n ta sizin g all th e Ruslana: tim e . The e n e rg y o f th e C arp ath ian fo lk c u ltu re and m usic gives m e m any ideas and it will ta ke m any a lb u m s to g e t th e se ideas im p le m e n te d in m usic. And I th in k th e s p irit o f W ild D ances, th e s p irit o f fre e d o m and n atu ra ln e ss will sta y w ith m e fo re ve r.

2. How can you characterize Ruslana on the basis o f what she says in the interview? There is a m odel to help you. Model: I th in k, Ruslana is an a m b itio u s person. She seem s ve ry h a rd w o rkin g . She also loo ks ....

3 . Listen to the sto ry o f “ Wild Dances” and fill in the fa c t file o f the song. Then try to re te ll the sto ry on the basis o f the inform ation you have g o t in the table. " Wild Dances" is a sing le by U krainian s in g e r-s o n g w rite r Ruslana. The song w on th e Eurovision Song C o n te st 2 0 0 4 held in T u rke y w ith an a m o u n t o f 280 p oints. A fte r q u a lifyin g se co n d fo r th e Eurovision Song C o n te st 2 004, it s c o re d a to ta l o f 280 p o in ts in th e fin al, m aking it th e firs t and only v ic to ry fo r U kraine. W ith a m ixtu re o f English and U krainian lyrics, "W ild D a n ce s" had th e d is tin c tio n o f b e co m in g th e firs t Eurovision w in n e r to be sung at least p a rtly in a lan g ua ge o th e r than English sin ce th e ru le -c h a n g e o f 1999, w hen c o u n trie s w e re allow ed to sing in

170

..............

..... • .....

:::::

a la n g u a g e o f th e ir ch o o sin g , ra th e r than one o f th e ir o fficia l languages. W ith th is w in, U kraine b e ca m e th e th ird ex-U SSR m e m b e r to win th e C o n te s t a fte r Estonia and Latvia having p re vio u sly don e so. The song w as re m e m b e re d fo r an e n e rg e tic p e rfo rm a n c e , w hich Ruslana gave in a le a th e r co stu m e , in sp ire d by e th n ic tra d itio n o f U kraine. The w o rk on th e song lasted fo r a b o u t 3 m onths. E diting and so un d e n g in e e rin g w as d o n e by R uslana to g e th e r w ith s p e c ia lis ts fro m Kiev, London and N ew York.

The year of Eurovision

The country which hosted the contest

The number of points the song got in the final

The languages of the lyrics of the song

The other former USSR countries which won Eurovision

The duration of work on the song

4. Read the lyrics o f «Wild Dances». Find the m usic fo r the song. Sing it to ge the r with yo ur teacher and fill in the missing words. Translate the song into Ukrainian. Wild Dances J u s t m aybe I’m 1_______ , The w o rld sp in s rou nd and rou nd and round S h i-d i-ri-d i-d u y , s h i-d i-ri-d i-d a -n a S h i-d i-ri-d i-d u y , s h i-d i-ri-d i-d a -n a . I w a n t you to w a n t m e as I 2_______ R ound and ro u n d and rou nd S h i-d i-ri-d i-d u y , s h i-d i-ri-d i-d a -n a S h i-d i-ri-d i-d u y , s h i-d i-ri-d i-d a -n a . F orever and ever go, go, go w ild d a n ce rs!!! D a y -n a -d a y -n a , w anna be loved, D ay-na, g on n a ta ke m y w ild 3 D a y-n a -d a y -n a , 4 _______ above, D a y -n a -d a -n a -d a , I’ m w ild ‘n ’ d a n cin g . Hey! D esire, inside tw o, My 5 sp in s rou nd and rou nd and rou nd S h i-d i-ri-d i-d u y , s h i-d i-ri-d i-d a -n a S h i-d i-ri-d i-d u y , s h i-d i-ri-d i-d a -n a

171

UNITV

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

::::::::::::::::::::::::

5. Read the te x t and fill in the gaps with the words th a t b est com plete the sentences. Ruslana Stepanivna Lyzhychko (born 24 May 1973), known as Ruslana, is a World Music Award and Eurovision Song 1____ winning singer, holding the title of People’s Artist of Ukraine. Ruslana was the UNICEF Goodwill Ambassador in Ukraine in 2004-2005. She is recognized as the most 2___ Ukrainian female solo singer internationally and was 3____ in the top 10 most influential women of 2013 by the Forbes magazine. The U.S. Secretary of State honoured her with the International Women of Courage 4____ in March 2014. She is a singer, songwriter, producer, musical conductor, multi instrumentalist, dancer, voice actress and social activist. She writes, 5____ and produces her own songs and music videos. She won the 2004 Eurovision Song Contest with the song Wild Dances and received 280 points, which at that time was a 6____ of points. Following her 7___ , she rose to fame in Europe and became one of the biggest pop stars from the Eastern part of the continent. Her winning song Wild Dances has dominated the European 8____ for 97 weeks peaking at number one in Belgium for 10 consecutive weeks. Her Eurovision winning song was included on the official 9___ called The Very Best of Eurovision at the celebration of the 60th 10____ of the contest. Her repertoire includes songs performed mainly in Ukrainian and English, but she also recorded songs in Spanish and Latin languages.

1. A 2. A 3. A 4. A 5. A 6. A 7. A 8. A 9. A 10.

B competition festival B happy rich B chosen included B award medal B rewrites creates B top peak B victory defeat B tops tables album B single A ceremony B festival

172

C C C C C C C C C C

championship successful selected prize listens best win lists lyrics anniversary

D contest D kind D consisted D diploma D composes D record D fight D charts D song D holiday

M USIC IN OUR LIFE

U N IT V

LESSON 61 1. Read o r listen to the interview. A c t it o u t with yo ur partner. Then with your p a rtn e r make up a sim ilar interview. Victor: Jane: Victor: Jane: Victor: Jane: Victor: Jane: Victor: Jane: Victor: Jane: Victor: Jane:

What’s your favourite music? It’s disco music. Do you know when disco music started? Oh, back in the 1970s, I think. I see. How many disco CDs have you got? Oh, hundreds. I have lost count of them! Where do you keep them? On the shelves in my room. Which was the first disco record you bought? Oh, I can’t remember. Which piece of disco music do you like I guess it’s Lost in Music by Sister Sledge. How often do you listen to it? Not very often. I have got much homework.

2. Read the te x t about a prom inent Ukrainian com poser. Pay attention to the words in bold. Say w hether the sentences a fte r the te x t are true o r false. C orrect the false ones. Mykola Vitaliyovych Lysenko (22 March 1842 6 November 1912) was a Ukrainian composer, pianist, conductor and ethnologist. Lysenko was initially a student of Biology at the Khark iv University, studying music privately. On a scholarship which he won from the Russian Music Society he took further professional music studies at the Leipzig Conservatory. It is there that he understood the importance of collecting, developing and creating Ukrainian music rather than following the work of Western classical composers. On his return to Kiev he continued to create Ukrainian theme compositions. His approach to composition was not supported by the Russian Imperial Music Society which promoted a Great Russian cultural presence in Ukraine. As a result Lysenko broke his relationship with them, never composed any music set to the Russian language. He also didn’t allow any translations of his works into the Russian language. The Ems Ukaz, which banned the use of Ukrainian language 173

in print, was one of the obstacles for Lysenko; he had to publish some of his works abroad. In order to improve his orchestration and composition skills the young Lysenko traveled to St. Petersburg where he took orchestration lessons from Nikolay Rimsky-Korsakov in the mid-1870s, but his Ukrainian national position and hate for Russian autocracy stopped his career. He supported the 1905 revolution and was in prison in 1907. In 1908, he was the head of the Ukrainian Club, an association of Ukrainian national public figures in Kiev. For his opera Lysenko insisted on using only the Ukrainian language. Tchaikovsky was impressed by Lysenko's Taras Bulba and wanted to stage the work in Moscow, but Lysenko didn’t allow this to happen, because he didn’t want to stage it in Russian. In his later years, Lysenko raised funds to open a Ukrainian School of Music. Lysenko's daughter Mariana follow ed in her father's footsteps as a pianist, and his son Ostap also taught music in Kiev. 1. M. Lysenko was a musician by his university education. 2. The composer realized the importance of folk music in Germany. 3. Lysenko’s love for Ukrainian music and culture was greatly welcomed by the Russian authorities. 4. He paid the price for his beliefs by getting into prison. 5. Lysenko had good relationship with Russian musicians. 6. Lysenko’s Taras Bulba was staged in Moscow. 7. The composer’s children continued his music career. 3. Answ er the questions about Mykola Lysenko. 1. How did Lysenko manage to study in Leipzig? 2. What did he learn from his experience in German conservatory? 3. What was the result of controversy between Lysenko and the Russian Imperial Music Society? What problems did Lysenko meet with because of that controversy? 4. Where did Lysenko improve his skills of composition and orchestral music playing? 5. Why wasn’t Taras Bulba staged in Moskow? 6. How many children did M. Lysenko have?

174

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

UNITV

4. Read the te xt in exercise 2 again and find the words which mean the follow ing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

something that makes the process difficult to go on a sum of money granted to a student for his/her studies to imitate another person to produce (a play, performance) on a stage a school of music to prohibit, not to allow a person who directs an orchestra or chorus intense dislike

5. Put the follow ing sentences into the passive voice. 1. Does the idea interest you? 2. The lawyer gave him the details of his uncle’s will. 3. Beavers make these dams. 4. Most people opposed this. 5. Anyone with the smallest intelligence could understand these instructions. 6. We shall not admit children under sixteen to watch this film. 7. A rainstorm flooded the camp. 8. The howling of wolves kept him awake all night. 9. Ms. Hopkins invited her to dinner. 10. Thomas Edison invented the phonograph. 19. Water surrounds an island. 11. A maid will clean our hotel room. 12. A doctor examined the sick child. 13. The police arrested James Swan. 14. A large number of people speak Spanish. 15. The secretary will answer the phone call. 16. The teacher’s explanation confused Carlos. 17. My mistake embarrassed me. 18. Helicopters fascinate children. 19. Shakespeare wrote Hamlet. 20. This news will amaze you. 6. Use the m ind map to speak about music.

.......: : :

M USIC IN OUR LIFE

REVISION LESSON LESSON 62 1. Agree o r disagree with the given statem ents. There is a m odel to help you. Model:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Shopping centres would be nicer without music. - I don’t agree completely. People spend much time shopping. It would be boring to walk around the shop for several hours without pleasant music on. Moreover, there are many people in big shopping centres. They make much noise. Without music this noise would be dreadful to hear.

MP3 players are cheaper than they used to be. Classical music is more relaxing to listen than dance music. The piano is harder to learn to play than the guitar. CDs should be less expensive than they are. Films are as enjoyable as music. Music isn’t as important as many people say it is.

2. Use the words to w rite questions fo r a pop quiz. Then try to answer the questions. Use the words who, which, o r th a t 1. Name / female pop star / sold more records than any other woman? - What is the name of the female pop star who has sold more records than any other woman? 2. Band / Number One song in the USA was / Wonna Hold Your Hand? 3. Name / country / Bob Marley was born? 4. City / Nirvana and Pearl Jam formed? 5. Title / the most famous song / The Rolling Stones played? 6. Instruments / are used by every rock band? 3. Turn the follow ing sentences from passive into active. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Was the window broken by him? Where could such fine art be found? Why was your servant abused by you?? Was your purse stolen by anyone? Were your feelings hurt by anyone? Were you invited by Alice? By whom was the snake killed? Why were you punished by him? Who was laughed at by you? 176

4. Use the words and expressions from exercise 5 (lesson 55) to describe the following pieces o f m usic. Find th e ir songs in the Internet and match the pictures o f CDs with the names and songs. 1. Sorry by Justin Beiber

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Cake by The Ocean by DNCE Hands to Myself by Selena Gomez Out of the Woods by Taylor Swift Work by Rihanna HELLO BY ADELE Something in the Way You Move by Ellie Goulding Perfect by One Direction

5. C orrect m istakes in the given statem ents. Model:

classical music - a pattern of beats and sounds that musicians play in time to and dancers move to. It’s incorrect. Classical music is a European orchestral and keyboard music that’s written by composers.

1. country music - a genre of popular music in Latin America and Spain that has complex rhythms 3. hip hop / "rap" - a popular music genre with short, melodic songs that are easy to remember 5. jazz - a musical genre in which artists rap over beats and sampled sounds

2. folk music - a genre in which artists improvise within a rhythmic and harmonic framework 4. pop music - a genre of American music with origins in the rural folk music of Europe 6. live music - traditional music from a particular region or country

6. Speak and then w rite about your favourite m usic genre. There is a m odel to help you. Model: My favourite style of music is pop music, because it is breathtaking and full of energy. When I listen to pop music it makes me remember happy moments and forget the problems of everyday life. It helps me to relax when I’m tired, and entertains me when I’d like to have fun.

LESSON 63 1. Listen to the presentation about Shakira and do the quiz. Shakira Isabel Mebarak was born on February 2, 1977 in Barranquilla, Columbia. When she was a little girl Shakira was very talented, she sang and wrote poetry and stories. She wrote her first song at the age of eight. Her first album, Magia, was recorded at the age of thirteen. Shakira says her music is a combination of different cultures and styles. Her native Columbian music is reflected in her songs. She also loves Arabic music because her father is Lebanese (he is from Lebanon). She sings mainly in English and Spanish. Shakira’s musical variety and talent for languages make her a very international singer and songwriter.

1. What is the name of the city Shakira was born? a. Bogota

b. Cartagena

c. Barranquilla

2. What age was Shakira when she wrote her first song? a. 8 b. 12 3. When was her first album recorded?

c. 18

a. when she was 10 b. when she was 13 c. when she was 20 4. What nationality is Shakira’s Dad? a. American b. Japanese c. Lebanese d. Spanish 5. What languages does Shakira use while singing? a. Spanish b. English c. Spanish and English and Columbian and Arabic 6. What is Shakira’s second name? a. Isabel

17Й

Lisa

c. Louise

2. Read the s to ry and say w hether the sentences are true o r false. C orrect the false sentences. Louise Farrenc (1804-1875) came from a family of artists but decided to take up music. At seventeen, she married another musician and they had a daughter. In her twenties, Louise started to compose music and her works were popular around Europe. In 1842, she became the first woman teacher at the Paris Conservatory. Louise’s daughter was a brilliant pianist and often performed her mother’s works. When her daughter died young, Louise stopped composing music forever. 1. Louise Farrenc was born to a family of musicians. 2. She married a man who was good at painting. 3. She, as well as many other women, taught music at the Paris Conservatory. 4. Her daughter played the piano perfectly. 5. Louise refused to compose music because of her teaching career at the Paris Conservatory. 3. Look a t the p ictures o f national Scottish and Ukrainian m usical instrum ents. Can you name them ? Say what category o f m usical instrum ents they belong to (percussion, brass, strin g , e tc.). Describe the kind o f sound they produce. Model:

The Scottish national musical instrument, .., produces a loud voiced sound, while the Ukrainian .... produces a very gentle quiet sound. It also... .

179

4. Complete the sentences with the c o rre c t form o f the verbs (active o r passive) in brackets. In prehistoric times, huge herds of horses (live) ____ throughout the Americas. But then, for some unknown reason, they (disappear) ____ completely from North and South America. Even though the e arly horses (die) ____ out of the Americas, they (survive) ____ in Asia. Long ago, horses (domesticate) ______ by central Asian nomads. At first, horses (u se )_____ in war and in hunting, and oxen (use) _____ for farming. Later, horses also (becom e)____ farm animals. These animals (reintroduce) ____ into the Americas by Spaniards in the early fifteenth century. Spanish explorers (come) ____ in ships to the New World with their horses on board. When the explorers (return)_____ to Spain, they (leave)______ some of their horses behind. These (develop)_____ into wild herds. Native American tribes in the western plains (begin)_____ to use horses around 1600. Wild horses (capture) _____ and (tame) ___ __ for use in war and in hunting. In the I950s there were several million wild horses in North America, By the 1970s, that number had become less than 20,000. The wild horses (h u n t)____ and (k ill)_____ principally for use as pet food. Today in the United States, wild horses (p ro te ct)____ by law. They (can kill, n o t) ____ for sport or profit. What is your opinion? (Should protect, wild horses)____ by law? 5. Write ten sentences in the Past Simple Passive describing what happened la s t m onth. Model: My favourite cup was broken by my younger sister last week. I was given a good mark in French yesterday. My mother was sent to an important business trip two weeks ago.

180

LESSON 64 1. Read the poem s and learn one o f them b y h ea rt. Enjoy music!

Music is Fun Music is wonderful, and so much fun for me, When I sing, dance, and listen, I feel very free. When I’m dancing, I think of a new move, As I practice, I gradually improve. Singing is something, I constantly do, Even when, I’m tying my shoe. Listening to music, is so fun and sweet, When I hear my songs, they wake both my feet.

It doesn’t matter, which instrument you play, As long as your hair, is invisible or grey. I’m not saying, old musicians are best Some actually require, help getting dressed. It all comes down, to the art of the tune, If you sing softly, you’ll know how to croon. Look at your lyrics, you may need to change. Some just may seem, a little bit strange. Those that master, the low and high pitch, Have a good shot at becoming, famous and rich. But if all fails, continue to enjoy, Because music to the ears, is a beautiful toy.

2. M atch the pictures with the words. Instrum ents string wind brass percussion keyboard

a. cello, b. viola, c. violin, d. acoustic guitar, e. bass, f. ukulele, g. electric guitar, h. mandolin, i. harp, j. banjo k. flute, I. piccolo, m. clarinet, n. oboe, o. bassoon, p. saxophone, q. recorder r. trombone, s. French horn, t. trumpet, u. tuba v. kettle drum, w. bongos, x. conga, y. drums, z. cymbals, aa. xylophone bb. organ, cc. digital /electric piano, dd. grand piano, ee. synthesizer, ff. accordion

181

UNITV

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

3. Read the te x t about Sviatoslav Vakarchuk and his band “ Okean Elzy” . Put the paragraphs a-e in o rd e r. Make a fa c t file fo r the pop s ta r. a. In 2003 Sviatoslav had become an Honorary Ambassador of Culture in Ukraine. In 2005 he became a Goodwill Ambassador for the United Nations Development Programme. b. Vakarchuk supported the Orange Revolution (2004) and the Revolution of Dignity (2013-2014). He is now involved in many social and cultural projects. He is one of the most successful musicians in Ukraine and has got a degree in theoretical physics. He has released 9 studio albums together with his band, “Okean Elzy” . c. Sviatoslav speaks Ukrainian, Russian, English and Polish fluently. He answered all questions correctly and won the grand prize (1 million hryvnias) for the first time on the Ukrainian version of Who Wants to Be a Millionaire? He donated his winnings to orphanages in Ukraine. d. Slava Vakarchuk (born May 14, 1975) is the lead vocalist of “Okean Elzy” , the most successful rock band in Ukraine. His father, Ivan

Vakarchuk, is a professor of physics at Lviv University and the former Minister of Education and Science in Ukraine. e. In support of their latest album “Zemlia” in spring 2013, the band went on a stadium tour throughout cities in Ukraine, Russia, Belarus, USA, Canada, and a number of countries in Western Europe. In the summer of 2014, “Okean Elzy” performed a number of concerts on the biggest stadiums in Ukraine. These concerts were dedicated to the band’s 20th anniversary. Their performance in Kyiv on Olympiyskiy Stadium brought over 75 thousand people, which broke the record for the largest amount of people attending a concert by a Ukrainian band. 4. Answ er the questions using passive constructions. 1. What foreign languages were you taught at school. 2. What should someone be given when he’s hysterical? 3. In a cross-examination, who is asked what by whom? 4. Wages or a salary - which is a teacher paid? 5. What is a patient given before an operation? 6. If you wrote to a school for information, what might you be sent? 7. What would you most resent being told? 8. What opportunity would you like to be offered? 9. How much is a Member of Parliament paid in your country? 10. What would you need to be lent if you were hard up? 5. Find the lyrics o f your favourite song by Slava Vakarchuk and “ Okean Elzy” . Find the melody o f this song in the Internet. Translate one stanza (куплет) into English and then sing your English version to the music. Write your translation in your copy book.

LESSON 65 7. Use the p ictu re o f the orchestra stru cture and describe the position o f instrum ents and m usicians in the orchestra p it. Model: In the front left hand corner of the orchestra pit, the first violins are usually located. In the back left hand corner of the pit, the piano can be positioned and also percussion musical instruments are played there. In the ....

xylophone

triangle

tu b a / trumpets

glockenspiel cornet clarinet

iff

cymbals

trombones

//III

bass drum

snare drum

clarinets tubular bells

4 t piano

gong

'i/i/P T 2nd violins

1st violins

horns

timpani

violas > English v horn

double basses

cellos

2. Change the follow ing sentences from passive into active co nstruction. 1. The ship was put into quarantine and passengers and the crew were forbidden to land. 2. My paintings will be exhibited for the first time by New Arts Gallery. 3. Someone will be found to take her place. 4. He was made to give his passport. 5. Why wasn’t the car locked and put into the garage? 6. The stones were thrown by the student 7. The football player was kicked on the leg by a member of the opposing team. 8. The fire was finally got under control. 9. The problem of school education will be discussed tomorrow at the teachers’ meeting.

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

UNITV

3. Read the te x t about G lastonbury festival and say w hether you would like to go and see such an even? W hy/ Why not? The first Glastonbury Festival took place in 1970 and was organised by Michael Eavis, who still runs the festival now on his farm in Somerset in the south-west of England. Michael charged people just J1 to enter, and the ticket included free milk from the farm. Only 1,500 people attended on that occasion, but this number has grown greatly since then. In 2011, there were approximately 100 times more people in the crowd and tickets, which cost J195 each, sold out within 4 hours. The festival takes place almost every year in the last weekend of June and lasts for three days. Although it is best known for contemporary music, Glastonbury hosts other performing arts such as dance, comedy and theatre.

Countless famous British musicians have played at the festival, including Sir Paul McCartney, Oasis and Coldplay, however the festival also attracts international interest, and such singers as Beyonce Knowles, Stevie Wonder and Jay-Z took part in it as well. In 2000, when only 100,000 tickets were sold, about 250,000 people attended the event - many of whom jumped over the fence to get there. The festival has made substantial contributions to charity over the years. In 2003, over a million pounds was donated to Greenpeace and WaterAid.

4. Find the num bers given below in the te xt. Write a sentence to say what they re fe r to. The firs t one is done fo r you. The number of people who attended the first Glastonbury festival

1,500 100,000 150,000 4 1970 2000 250,000 1 195 1,000,000

5. Your frie n d invites you to go to a m usic festival. Ask and then w rite questions about the follow ing: Where it takes place; What you can see there; What style of music will be played during the festival; What famous musicians will participate in the festival; How long it will last; Where you can stay; How much the ticket costs. Model:

186

That’s a good idea, I mean, going to the festival. Where does it take place? What can we see there, I mean ....

::::::::::

•:

i:iiii:;;:ii:

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

UNITV

. .. ::::::::::

LESSON 66 1. Read o r listen to the dialogue and a c t it o u t with your p a rtn e r. Victor:

Good morning. I wonder if you could help me. I am looking for a book called “Computing Made Easy” . Shop assistant: It’ll be over there in the “Science and Technology” section. Victor: I’ve looked but I can’t see it on the shelves. Assistant: Let me just check on the computer... Do you know the name of the author? Victor: I think it’s Hammond. Assistant: Ah, yes. No, I’m sorry, we don’t have it in stock. But I can order it for you. Victor: Yes, please. How much is it? Assistant: 12,99 pounds. Victor: And how long will it take? Assistant: about a week or ten days. Victor: That’s fine. Assistant: Ok, if I could just take some details... 2. Work in p a irs. Make up a dialogue follow ing the ch a rt below .

187

: .....

UNITY

MUSIC IN OUR LIFE

3. Answ er the follow ing questions. 1. What do you call someone who: a) composes music? b) plays the drums? c) sings? d) conducts an orchestra? 2. What instruments d o e s____ play? a) a chellist; b) a guitarist; c) a pianist; d) a violinist. 4. Read the te xt and choose the w ord th a t b e st com pletes the sentences. From the moment we 1 are born, we start learning about the world 2__ us. We learn a great deal of things over a very 3___ period of time, and this forms the foundation of all our future learning. 4__ _ to the age of six, we are extremely sensitive and we develop the important skills that will prepare us for 5 ___ life. Therefore, it is very important to have a good preschool programmer which helps us to develop hand-eye co-ordination and problem-solving abilities, as well as exposing us to a 6__ variety of stimuli and materials. Maria Montessori created 7__ a programme, which helps children to develop their intelligence and 8__ _ of independence. The Montessori Method, as it 9 __ , combines practical activities, which stimulate the senses of touch and smell, with mathematical and language development activities. The children are completely free to choose which activity to 10 ___ in and when. This encourages their self-confidence and independence. This 11___ of teaching is very popular with 12 ___ parents of young children, as it involves learning which focuses on the use of all the senses 13__ those important years. 1. A is 2. A against 3. A short 4. A Above 5. A after 6. A broad 7. A so 8. A appreciation 9. A known 10.A play

B B B B B B B B B B

are among small Over next far such awareness labelled do

C C C C C C C C C C

be around little Near later rich quite understanding titled participate

D were D along D tiny D Up D older D wide D many D sense D branded D take

11. A plan 12. A lots 13. A during

B scheme B many B while

C approach C much Cat

Dmethod D plenty D for

5. Which type o f m usic do you associate with the following? 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

The 1930s, Louis Armstrong and Ella Fitzgerald, - jazz The 1950s, “Rock around the Clock” , Elvis Presley. The 1960s, Aretha Franklin and Stevie Wonder. The 1970s, Bob Marley, Jamaica and the UK. The 1980s, The Clash, short spiky hair and nose rings. The 1990s, MC Hammer, fast, rhythmical talking with an instrumental background.

6. Read the description o f d iffe re n t styles o f m usic. M atch the descriptions with the music styles.

a. music of African-American origin with improvisation and a strong rhythm b. popular music with a strong beat, usually played with electric guitars and drums c. a soft, soothing form of instrumental music often used to promote relaxation d. traditional songs often performed with simple instruments such as the banjo and guitar e. music that is popular today in the US, especially in the Southern states. Often based on the music of cowboys in the American West, it is accompanied by a banjo, violin, or guitar

LESSON 67. (OPTIONAL) 189

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

LESSON 68 1. Read o r listen to the telephone conversation and a c t it o u t with yo ur p a rtn e r. Assistant:

North-East tourist information. How can I help you? Jane: Hello, I need some information. Assistant: What station are you travelling from? Birmingham New Street. Jane: Assistant: And where are you travelling to? Jane: Leeds. Assistant: OK. When are you travelling? Jane: On Friday the 18th. Assistant: And what sort of time? Jane: Late morning. Assistant: OK. Right. Depart Birmingham New Street 11:30, arrive Leeds 13: 33. Jane: 11:30. OK. Thank you very much. Assistant: You are welcome. 2. Look a t the map o f G reat B ritain and m atch the num bers with the geographical p arts o f this country. The South West The Midlands The North East The South East The North West Scotland East Anglia Wales Northern Ireland

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

3. Look a t the table and make up sentences about the UK. Model: The full name of the country is the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland. Very often the name "United Kingdom” is used. Sometimes the name "Great Britain” is used. United Kingdom (the United Kingdom of Great Britain & Northern Ireland) Population:

over 60,000,000

Official language:

English

Currency:

British pound (GBP)

Telephone country code:

+44

Capital:

London

Main religions:

Christian, Muslim

Internet country code: Continent:

.uk Europe

Focus on Grammar! Cardinal numerals in English are read like this: 123 - one hundred and twenty-three; 407 - four hundred and seven; 3,538 - three thousand five hundred and thirty-eight; 73,005 - seventy-three thousand and five; 5,300,050 - five million three hundred thousand and fifty. HUNDRED, THOUSAND, MILLION The words "hundred, thousand, million” can be used with "one" or "a" (if "one" is meant). But only "one" is used before these words if they are followed by numerals in order to express an exact number. Examples: I saw about a hundred people there. One hundred thirty-five people were present at the meeting. The lake is about a hundred and fifty miles from the nearest city. The lake is at a distance of one hundred fifty-two miles from the nearest city. Their house is almost a hundred and ten years old. Their house is one hundred ten years old. The words "hundred, thousand, million" do not take the plural ending "s" when they are followed by numerals in order to express an exact number. But the words "hundred, thousand, million" can take the plural ending "s" when they are followed by " o f + noun, and have the meaning "a great number, a lot of". Examples: We need three hundred volunteers. - We saw hundreds of people there. They sold two thousand cars. - There are thousands of books in her collection. The population of Britain is about 60 million people. - The new radio program attracted millions of listeners.

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

4. Choose the c o rre c t w ord com bination. 1. Hundreds of people / hundreds people were in the streets of the festival capital. 2. It was reported that there were fifteen thousand / fifteen thousands people damaged in the earthquake. 3. There are more than two million / two millions Polish immigrants in the United States of America. 4. Millions of Ukrainians / millions Ukrainians live in the United States of America. 5. Millions of trees /m illio n s trees are lost in the world every year. We should start planting new trees as soon as possible. 6. The population of Ukraine is about forty six million people / millions people.

5. M atch the m anners the B ritish people usually follow with th e ir explanations. Do stand in line

A smiling face is a welcoming face.

It is im polite to It is impolite for men to wear hats indoors stare a t anyone in especially in churches. public Do say “ s o rry ” We only kiss people who are close friends and relatives. Do n o t p ic k your When yawning or coughing always do it with nose in public your hand. Do cover your In England we like to form orderly queues and M outh wait patiently for our turn e.g. boarding a bus. Do say "Excuse Privacy is highly regarded. M e" Do Smile When you are first introduced to someone, do it with your own right hand. Do not g re e t The British are disgusted by this. If your people with a kiss nostrils need de-bugging, use a handkerchief. Do take your hat If you accidentally bump into someone, say it. o ff when you go They probably will too, even if it was your fault! This is a habit and can be seen as very indoors amusing by an 'outsider'. Do Shake Hands If someone is blocking your way and you would like them to move, say this phrase and they will move out of your way. 6. What manners would you recom m end to a visitor com ing to Ukraine? Use exercise 5 as a m odel.

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

LESSON 69 1. M atch the adjectives with th e ir definitions. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. I. m. n.

beautiful boring busy crowded dull exciting interesting lively noisy old peaceful pretty quiet ugly

1. not new 2. not making much noise 3. exciting because a lot of things are happening 4. extremely attractive to look at, giving you great pleasure 5. not quiet 6. not interesting in any way 7. calm and quiet without any worry or excitement 8. too full of people 9. full of people, vehicles and movement 10. extremely unattractive and unpleasant to look at 11. not interesting, bright or shiny 12. attracts your attention because it seems unusual or exciting 13. pleasant to look at but is not impressive 14. making you feel excited

2. How well you know G reat B ritain. Look a t the map o f the UK. Put the c ity names on the map. 3. Read the inform ation about British cities and com plete the table a fte r it. Birmingham is in the Midlands. It was a major industrial city. This is no longer the case, but it is still the second largest city in England. C a rd iff is on the south coast of Wales. It’s a pleasant city with green open spaces. It was an important port in the past. Now you will find more offices in the port than ships. Edinburgh is on the east coast of Scotland. It’s a beautiful city with a castle and fine streets such as

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

P rince S tre e t. E dinb u rg h has g o t a festival o f m usic and d ra m a every su m m er. Glasgow is on th e rive r C lyde on th e w e s t side o f S co tla n d . It has a fa m o u s m useum and a rt gallery. Liverpool is on the rive r M ersey, n ot fa r fro m M a n ch e ste r. It’s fa m o u s fo r its fo o tb a ll te a m s and fo r th e B eatles. In th e past it w as a m a jo r p o rt and in d u stria l city. London is th e ca p ita l o f th e U nited K in g d o m . It’s in th e south o f England. It’s an im p o rta n t fin a n cia l ce n tre . Its p o p u la tio n is a b o u t 13 m illion p eople. Manchester is in th e n o rth -w e s t o f England. Like Liverpool it w as a big p o rt and ind u stria l c ity b e fo re . And M a n c h e s te r has also tw o fa m o u s fo o tb a ll te a m s, M a n c h e s te r U nited and M a n c h e s te r City. Newcastle is a lively c ity in th e n o rth -e a s t o f E ngland. It’s w e ll-kn o w n fo r art, c u ltu re and its n ig h tlife , and o f co u rse , its fo o tb a ll te am .

City's name

Characteristic features

Location

B irm in g h a m C a rd iff E dinb u rg h G lasgow Liverpool London M a n c h e s te r N ew castle

4. Ask and answer questions about places on the map (exercise 3). Model:

A: Do you know w he re M a n c h e s te r is? B: Yes, it ’s a c ity in th e n o rth -w e s t o f England.

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

5. Read the explanations and then match the pictures with the words. An island is a p ie ce o f land c o m p le te ly s u rro u n d e d by w a te r. An island can be ve ry sm all o r ve ry big. An island can be in a lake o r in a river o r in th e sea. If it is land w ith w a te r all a ro u n d it, it is an island. The " s " in island is m ute. The w o rd island is p ro n o u n c e d / a il n d /, w ith its firs t syllab le s tre sse d . The w o rd Iceland is th e nam e o f a c o u n try (so m e tim e s ca lle d R epublic o f Iceland). H ow ever, th e c o u n try o f Iceland is also an island b eca use it is su rro u n d e d by w a te r (the N orth A tla n tic O cean). Iceland b e g in s w ith a ca p ita l ' T b eca use it is a nam e. The w o rd Iceland is p ro n o u n c e d / a is l n d /, w ith its firs t syllab le stre sse d . Ireland is th e nam e o f an island to th e w e s t o f G reat B ritain. The island o f Ireland co n ta in s tw o p o litica l units: Republic of Ireland (also called Eire), w hich is a c o u n try co ve rin g a b o u t 80% o f th e island o f Ireland; Northern Ireland, w hich co vers a b o u t 20% o f th e island o f Ireland and is p o litic a lly p a rt o f th e U nited K in gd o m . Ireland beg ins w ith a ca p ita l " I " b e ca u se it is a nam e. The w o rd Ireland is p ro n o u n c e d / a i rl n d /, w ith stre ss on firs t syllable.

6. Write in words. 2 5 4 tre e s, 836 universities, 3 ,0 0 0 ,0 0 0 p eo p le , 2 5 ,6 9 7 3 9 ,9 5 6 ,3 7 8 stu d e n ts, 9 2 3 ,0 0 0 km , 5 ,3 8 4 kilo g ra m s o f s u g a r

books,

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

LESSON 70 1. Read or listen to the dialogue and do the quiz. Act out the dialogue with your partner. Then make up a similar one. C u sto m e r: Excuse m e. How o fte n do tra in s go to London? C lerk: Every half hour. The next one leaves a t 3 :05 . C u sto m e r: And how long d oe s it ta ke to g e t th e re ? C lerk: A b o u t tw o and a h alf hours. W ould you like a tic k e t? C u sto m e r: Yes, I w ou ld. C lerk: O n e -w a y o r ro u n d -trip ? C u sto m e r: O ne-w ay, please. C lerk: T h a t’ ll be 73 pounds. C u sto m e r: And w h e re do I ca tch th e train ? On tra c k 11. C lerk:

1. Trains go to London once every 2. The trip takes____ two hours. 3. It costs 73 pounds____.

a. b. a. b. a. b.

hour thirty minutes less than more than to go there to go there and come back.

2. Read the story about the British flag and get ready to retell it. The fo rm a l nam e o f th e B ritish national fla g is Union Flag, b u t it is c o m m o n ly know n as th e Union Jack. It c o m b in e s th e St. G e o rg e ’s c ro s s o f E ngland, St. A n d re w ’s c ro ss o f S co tla n d and St. P a tric k ’s c ro s s o f Ireland. “ U n io n ” sym bo lize s th e union o f E ngland and S c o tla n d in 1606, w hile “ J a c k ” re fe rs to th e fla g by w hich a ship show s its n atio na lity. The u p rig h t red c ro ss on a w h ite b a c k g ro u n d is th e c ro ss o f St. G e org e, th e p a tro n sa in t o f England. St. G e o rg e ’s Day fa lls on th e 2 3 rd o f A pril and is re g a rd e d as E n g la n d ’s national day. On th is day som e p a trio tic E nglishm en w e a r a rose p inned to th e ir ja cke ts. A red rose is th e national e m b le m o f E ngland fro m th e tim e o f th e W ar o f Roses. The w h ite d ia g o n a l cro ss on a blue b a ck g ro u n d is th e c ro s s o f St. A ndrew , th e p atro n sa in t o f S co tla n d , w ho w as c ru c ifie d in 69 AD on a c ro s s fo rm e d like th e le tte r “ X ” . St. A n d re w ’s Day (30th o f N ove m be r)

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

is re g a rd e d as S c o tla n d ’s national day. On th is day The S co ts w e a r a th is tle in th e ir b u tto n h o le s . As a national e m b le m o f S co tla n d th is tle a p p a re n tly w as firs t used in th e 15th c e n tu ry as a sym b o l o f d e fe n ce . The O rd e r o f th e T histle is one o f th e h ig h e st o rd e rs o f kn ig h th o o d . It w as fo u n d e d in 1687, and is m ainly given to S co ttish n ob le m e n . The dia g on al red c ro ss on a w h ite b a c k g ro u n d is th e cro ss o f St. P atrick, th e p a tro n sa in t o f Ireland. He w as a b ish o p and a m issio n a ry in Ireland and died in 4 61 . St. P a tric k ’s Day (1 7 th o f M a rch ) is re g a rd e d as a national day in N o rth e rn Ireland and an o fficia l bank h o lida y th e re . The national e m b le m o f Ireland is sh a m ro ck. A c c o rd in g to th e leg e nd , it w as th e p la n t ch ose n by St. P a trick to illu stra te th e C hristian d o c trin e o f th e T rin ity to th e Irish. The national fla g o f th e UK ca m e into b ein g in 1606 as a re su lt o f th e union w ith S co tla n d , w hen St. A n d re w ’s c ro ss w as a d d e d to th e

+ O rig in a l U n io n Flag

Ire la n d

( 1606 )

C u rre n t U n io n Flag

( 1801 )

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

c ro s s o f St. G e org e. In 1807 N o rth e rn Ireland b e ca m e p a rt o f th e UK and St. P a tric k ’s cro ss w as a d d e d to th e o th e r tw o. The w elsh fla g , ca lle d th e W elsh d ra g o n , re p re s e n ts a red d ra go n on a w h ite and gre en b a c k g ro u n d . St. D avid ’s Day (1st o f M a rch ) is th e c h u rc h festival o f St. David, a 6th c e n tu ry b ish o p and m onk, th e p atro n sa in t o f W ales. This h o lida y is re g a rd e d as th e national h o lida y in W ales. On th is day m any W elshm en w e a r e ith e r a ye llo w d a ffo d il o r a leek p in n ed to th e ir ja c k e ts . O ne can see tw o a nim als on th e B ritish c o a t o f arm s. O ne o f th e m is th e lion. The “ king o f b e a s t” has been used as a sym bo l o f national s tre n g th and o f th e B ritish m o n a rch y fo r m any ce n tu rie s. The o th e r one is th e u n ico rn . It is a m ythica l anim al th a t lo o ks like a horse w ith a long s tra ig h t horn g ro w in g fro m its fo re h e a d , and is a sym bo l o f p urity.

3. Read the text in exercise 2 and correct mistakes in the table.

4 . Read the text in exercise 2 and make up its plan. Then try to retell the text according to your plan. Model: 1. The reason fo r th e nam e “th e Union J a c k ” . R etelling: The B ritish fla g is ca lle d th e Union Ja ck. “ U n io n ” - b e ca u se it sym bo lize s

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

th e union o f all p a rts o f Britain th a t m ake up a c o u n try. “ J a c k ” b eca use th a t w as th e nam e fo r th e flag w h ich is p u t on a ship to sh ow th e c o u n try o r n a tio n a lity it b e lo n g s to. 2. The English fla g . R etelling .... 3. The S co ttish fla g . R etellin g ....

Exercise 5. How well do you know about Britain? Match the questions with the answers. W hat is th e o fficia l nam e o f th e UK? W hy is th e w ho le o f Ireland n ot in th e UK? W hat are p e o p le ca lle d in th e UK?

W hat is th e ca p ita l o f W ales? W hat is th e ca p ita l of N o rth e rn Ireland? W hat c o u n trie s m ake up th e UK?

W hen w as (m a de )?

th e

UK fo rm e d

C a rd iff B e lfa st England, S co tla n d , W ales and Ireland (th o u g h m o st o f Ireland is now in d e p e n d e n t. O nly Northern Ireland is p a rt o f th e UK now ) On J a n u a ry 1, 1801 and c o n s titu te s th e g re a te r p a rt o f th e British Isles. th e U nited K in gd o m o f G reat B ritain and N o rth e rn Ireland B e fo re 1922 th e UK in clu d e d Ireland, b u t w hen th e Irish Free S tate ceased to be p a rt o f th e Union th e title ch a n g e d to in clu d e ’Northern Ireland'. B ritish, a lth o u g h th e y have d iffe re n t n a tio na lities.

Exercise 6. Mini project. Work in groups. presentation about one of the following flags.

Prepare

a class

In y o u r p re s e n ta tio n , you sh o u ld in clu d e th e fo llo w in g in fo rm a tio n : W hat c o u n try th e fla g re p re se n ts. W hat is show n on th e fla g . W hat th e h isto ry b eh ind th e fla g is.

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

LESSON 71 1. Look at the map of Great Britain. Read the beginning of the description of the countryfs geographical position and finalize it using the given prompts and the word combinations in bold.

North Atlantic Ocean

Northern Ireland

Ireland

1. The UK is situated n o rth -w e s t o f th e European c o n tin e n t betw een th e A tla n tic O cean and th e N orth Sea. It has a to ta l land area o f 2 44 ,1 00 square kilom etres, o f w hich nearly 99% is land and the re m a in d e r inland w ater. From north to south it is a b o u t 1,000 kilom etres long. 2. In th e north east, the UK is washed by th e N orth Sea. In th e w est, ..... (A tlantic O cean). 3. The island o f G reat Britain ..... (west, th e Irish Sea). The island o f Ireland ....(th e Irish Sea, th e A tla n tic O cean). 4. In th e south, G reat Britain .... (the English C hannel). 5. N orthern Ireland .... (to th e w e st o f th e island o f G reat Britain).

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

2. Read the text and then say what changes have occurred in the process o f getting the British citizenship. Pay attention to the words in bold. Model: The c e re m o n y o f sw earing an oath o f a lle g ia n ce has been b ro a d e n e d . The g o v e rn m e n t has in tro d u c e d ... About n in e ty th o u sa n d p e o p le apply to b e co m e B ritish citizens every year. N ow each o f th e m w ill have to ta ke a w ritte n te s t b e fo re th e y can qualify as citizens. For years th e fu tu re B ritish citize n s s im p ly had to swear an oath of allegiance in fro n t o f a law yer and th en receive a c e rtific a te . B ut in 2 0 0 4 B ritain introduced a compulsory citize n sh ip c e re m o n y w h ich re q u ire d new citize n s to ta ke a b ro a d e r oath p ro m is in g to re s p e c t B rita in 's rig h ts, fre e d o m s and laws and all o f th is in fro n t o f civic dignitaries d re sse d in fu ll regalia. The g o v e rn m e n t now has gon e even fu rth e r: it has in tro d u c e d a te s t to c h e c k th e kn o w le d g e o f th e c o u n try and its lan g ua ge . The te s t co n ta in s tw e n ty -fo u r q u e stio n s on life in th e U nited K in g d o m and lasts fo r 4 5 m in u tes. If a p p lic a n ts d o n ’t pass th e firs t tim e th e y can try again and again. The q u e stio n s range fro m sim p le te s ts o f kn o w le d g e (such as - w h a t's th e m in im u m age fo r buying a lc o h o l? )to e xp lo rin g m o re co m p le x cu ltu ra l issues (H ow in te re ste d are yo un g p e o p le in p o litics? ) The g o v e rn m e n t believes th e te s t is p a rt o f a p ro c e s s th a t w ill help new citize n s fe el th e y b e lo n g to th e co u n try. S u p p o rte rs o f such c h a n g e s p o in t to o th e r c o u n trie s w hich have g o t s im ila r sch e m e s - p a rtic u la rly th e U nited S tates w h e re citize n sh ip c e re m o n ie s have long been common practice. O p p o n e n ts how ever say it's all to o n a tio n a listic and p uts u n d u e p re s s u re o n n e w c o m e rs , w o rk in g a g a in st th e e ffo rts to b uild a m u lti-c u ltu ra l s o c ie ty in B ritain.

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

3. Read the text in exercise 2 again and match the words on the left with their definitions on the right. to swear an oath of allegiance a. unnecessary influence b. something which must be done applicants have long been common practice c. just arriving (to the country) civic d. to promise officially that you will follow the laws of a country dignitaries opponents e. traditional and official ceremonial costumes regalia f. government officials compulsory g. people who have applied to become British citizens h. have been done regularly for a long time undue pressure newcomers i. people who are against something

4. British stereotypes. Listen to the interviews with three people and then put a name according to the expressed opinions about the British. Kate, age 15: I th in k th e B ritish are q u ite m ise ra b le - in fa c t, w e like a g o o d jo ke , b u t we are a b it g lo o m y and p e ssim istic. W hen it c o m e s to sp o rt, fo r exam ple, w e c h e e r on B ritish te a m s, b u t w e a re n ’t really s u rp rise d w hen th e y lose. W e a c c e p t u n d e ra ch ie ve m e n t as th e norm . I th in k A m e rica n s are d iffe re n t: th e y e x p e c t to w in. Sam , age 14: We, th e B ritish, seem to be co ld and u n frie n d ly. P eople d o n ’t ch a t. W e d o n ’t say hello to o u r n e ig h b o u rs. I w o u ld rarely re co g n ize m y n e ig h b o u rs in th e stre e t. S o m e tim e s it ’s d iffic u lt to m ake frie n d s . W e seem to be ra th e r reserved. I have been to so m e eastern E uropean co u n trie s, like Poland, U kraine - th e re th e p e o p le are m ore s o c ia b le and frie n d ly . I s o m e tim e s envy th e m . Jake, age 17: B ritain is a m u ltic u ltu ra l c o u n try. T he re are m any p e o p le o f d iffe re n t e th n ic g ro u p s, and you can hea r a b o u t 300 lan g u a g e s in th e stre e t. N ew p e o p le are arrivin g all th e tim e , so th e c o u n try is ch a n g in g d ay by day. It’s a ve ry c o m p e titiv e , fa s t-m o v in g sta te . P eople here are n ot a fra id o f w ork, th e y kn ow w h a t th e y w an t and how to g e t it.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

They aren’t very hospitable. They work very hard. They don’t talk to each other very much. They’ve got a good sense of humour. They are quite motivated. They aren’t optimistic.

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

5. Look at the picture and make up sentences according to the stereotype statements. There is a model to help you. Model: I live in th e past. - The B ritish are ve ry co n se rva tive . T hey are ve ry slow to in tro d u c e new th in g s. They seem to live in th e p ast (It loo ks like th e y live in th e past).

I live in the past

I never refuse a drink

I don’t care what people think

I don’t speak a foreign language

I’m a different person when the sun’s out

I’m lost without my dog

I’m not bothered about a bit of dust

I wouldn’t live anywhere else!

6. How would you describe people: a) from your home town / city / village / Ukraine? b) from another country you have been to / you have read about? Use the model to write your descriptions. Model: P eople in m y to w n seem to be frie n d ly and ta lka tive . You can see m any p e o p le ch a ttin g to each o the r. A t th e sam e tim e th e y are ra th e r h a rd -w o rk in g , m o d e s t and reliable. I have read m uch a b o u t th e French. T hey are ve ry o p tim is tic . T hey also seem to be q u ite fu nny. S o m e tim e s th e y laugh very lo u d ly ju s t in th e s tre e t o r in so m e p u b lic places. T hey are also ve ry p olite, b u t q u ite o fte n th e y can be a rro g a n t.

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

LESSON 72. WALES 1. Read or listen to the dialogue. Act it out with your partner. (People are singing “Hen Wlad Fy Nhadau”) V icto r: Jane: V icto r: Jane: V icto r: Jane:

Jane, do you u n d e rsta n d w h a t th o s e p e o p le are sin g in g ? N o t m uch, b eca use I c a n ’t sp e a k W elsh, b u t I kn ow th a t it is th e national a nth e m o f W ales. It’s ca lle d “ Land o f m y fa th e rs ” . You, th e B ritish, c a n ’t live c o m fo rta b ly in W ales. W hy have you m ade such a c o n clu sio n ? B ecause you d o n ’t sp e a k W elsh. W e d o n ’t, b u t m o st W elsh p e o p le sp e a k English flu e n tly. T h a t’s w hy we d o n ’t have any p ro b le m s in th is co u n try. W e are u n d e rs to o d e veryw here in W ales.

2. Match the facts about Wales with the correct category. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

11. M a jo r citie s

h. C a rd iff i. 2 0 ,7 7 9 sq km j. Red dragon on a green and w hite field. k. Bala (4 .4 sq km )

Flag C apital city A rea The lan g ua ge P opulation L arge st lake The highest mountain peak 8. O fficia l anim al 9. N ational day 10. L o n g e st river

S n o w d o n, 1085 m e tre s C ym raeg (W elsh) 1st o f M a rch D ragon C a rd iff, S w ansea and N e w p o rt Tow y 103 km 2 ,9 1 8 ,7 0 0

3. Read the text and check some of the answers in exercise 2. W ales is in n o rth -w e s t E urope and is p a rt of G reat B ritain w ith C a rd iff as th e ca p ita l city. The nam e W ales c o m e s fro m th e C ym raeg w o rd G walia, m eaning in English "H o m e la n d ” . It la te r b e ca m e Latinized as W alia, th e n by th e N orm an s to W ales. W ales (C ym ru in W elsh) is a land o f rug by, sing ing and b e a u tifu l s c e n e ry situ a te d on th e w e ste rn side o f th e UK. Its p o p u la tio n is ju s t u n d e r th re e m illion w hich is a b o u t 5 %

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

o f th e to ta l UK p o p u la tio n . The m ain cities, b e sid e s C a rd iff, are S w ansea and N ew port. W ales is m o u n ta in o u s c o u n try w ith its h ig h e st peak nam ed S now don. Technically, Wales is a principality. This means that it is ruled by a prince. Traditionally the Prince o f W ales is the eldest son o f the English m onarch. The co u n try has n ot been politically ind ependent since 1282, w hen it w as c o n q u e re d by King Edw ard I o f England. It w as ruled fro m London until 1999, w hen th e firs t e le c tio n s to th e W elsh N ational A sse m b ly w ere held. The A sse m b ly has som e p o w e rs s p e c ific to people in W ales and can m ake decisions on areas such as education and health. As W ales rem ain s p a rt o f th e UK, th e M e m b e rs o f P a rlia m e n t fro m W ales have seats in th e UK P a rlia m e n t at W e stm in ste r. The laws w hich passed by th e P a rlia m e n t in W e s tm in s te r still a p p ly to W ales.

W ales is know n fo r its g re a t a c to rs : R ichard B u rton , and to d a y Sir A n th o n y H opkins and C ath e rin e Z eta Jo ne s. The o th e r p ro m in e n t p e o p le fro m W ales are: Laura Ashley, a fa m o u s fa sh io n c re a to r; David

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

Lloyd G e org e - p ast B ritish Prim e M in iste r; S ir G e org e Everest - a fa m o u s tra v e lle r and e xp lo re r, The h ig h e st p eak in th e w o rld is nam ed a fte r him ; Tom Jo n e s - a fa m o u s m usician . The c o u n try is also know n fo r its C e ltic tra d itio n s and th e Red D ragon on its fla g .

4. Read the text in exercise 3 again and answer the questions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

W hat d o e s th e nam e o f W ales m ean as tra n s la te d into English? W ho is believed to rule W ales a c c o rd in g to its status? W hen w as W ales c o n q u e re d by King Edw ard I? W hich year did the first elections to the Welsh governm ent take place? W hat fam ous British people who are originally from Wales do you know?

5. Match the descriptions of four famous Welsh people with the names given in the box. A - She was born in South Wales, near Swansea, in 1969. She started acting at an early age and has starred in blockbusters like ‘Trie Mask of Zorro” , “ Traffic” and “Chicago” .

She is married to Hollywood star Michael Douglas and has two children.

B - He was born in South Wales in 1940. He is a singer and his most famous songs are “ It’s not unusuar, “Delilah” or

more recently, “Sex Bomb” . He is well known for wearing tight trousers and exotic shirts on stage.

C - He was born in 1937 in Port Talbot, South Wales but now he lives in Hollywood. He’s a very famous actor. He played the character of Hannibal Lecter in 1991 in ‘Trie Silence of the Lambs” .

D - This football player was born in Cardiff and plays for Manchester United and the Welsh national football team. He has played for Manchester United since 1991, so is one of the longest serving players in the team.

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

6. Group work. Imagine you have won a trip to Wales. You will go with your class and will stay for one week. There are lots of things you can do on holiday in Wales. Here are some of the options. Discuss the options with a group. You must choose the three you would prefer to do. There is a model to help you. M odel: S tu d e n t A: The idea o f w a tch in g a ru g b y m atch is g o o d b u t w e can do th a t on te le visio n fro m hom e. I guess, visitin g C a rd iff C astle is a m ore im p o rta n t o p tio n . We w o n ’t have a n o th e r ch a n ce to see it in real. S tu d e n t B: T h a t’s a g o o d idea. I th in k w e all sh o u ld a g re e to th a t. I w o u ld also s u g g e s t ... . S tu d e n t C: To m y m ind, visitin g th e C astle is fine, b u t n o t everyone is in te re ste d in W elsh h istory. W h a t a b o u t g oin g on a to u r in S w ansea? It’s a lovely c ity w ith m any a ttra c tio n s and sigh ts. ... a. W atch a ru g b y m atch. b. Learn to sp e a k W elsh. c. Go h o rs e -rid in g in th e co u n try s id e . d. Do a W elsh c o o k e ry co u rse . e. V isit C a rd iff C astle. f. Learn to s u rf at th e beach. Listen to a c o n c e rt o f W elsh sing e rs. h. Go sh o p p in g in C a rd iff c ity ce n tre . i. Go on a to u r in Sw ansea. j- Go m ou ntain bikin g in th e c o u n try s id e .

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

LESSON 73 1. Scan the text in exercise 2 and answer the following questions. 1. W ho b u ilt th e T ham es Tunnel? 2. W hy did th e y need to build a tu n n e l? 3. W ho uses th e tu n n e l to d a y?

2. Read the text and choose the answer that best completes the sentence. Then get ready to retell the story. Two h u n d re d ye ars ago in 1806 Isa m b a rd K in gd o m B runei w as b orn. He w as th e son o f a French civil e n g in e e r - civil e n g in e e rs plan, 1___and build roads, b rid g e s and p u b lic b u ild in g s. And Isam bard K in g d o m B runei fo llo w e d th e sam e 2 ___path as his fa th e r and b e ca m e one o f th e w o rld ’s m o st fa m o u s e n g in e e rs. D uring his life Brunei d e sig n e d and b u ilt d o c k s e n clo se d a reas o f 3___w h e re sh ip s are 4 ____, u nlo ad ed and re p a ire d . He also d e sig n e d and b u ilt railw ays, ste a m sh ip s and m uch m ore. W ith his fa th e r, B runei d e sig n e d and b u ilt th e h is to ric T ham es T unnel w hich is now used by th e East London line o f th e London U n d e rg ro u n d train 5___. The T ha m es T unnel is 35 fe e t w ide and 1,300 fe e t long, beneath th e River T ham es b etw e en R o th e rh ith e and W apping. T hey nee de d a w ay o f 6 s tu ff a cro ss th e river as w ell as up and d ow n it. It w as im p o ssib le to build a b rid g e here b eca use o f 3 ,0 0 0 ta llm asted ships. The o nly w ay to do it w as to m ove s tu ff u n d e r th e river b u t no one had ever don e th a t b e fo re . A c tu a lly ,th a t w as th e firs t tu n n e l u n d e r a river anyw h ere in th e w o rld . P eople u n d e rs to o d th a t th e b est w ay to build b e lo w th e g ro u n d is to build above th e g ro u n d and sin k it. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

A A A A A A

d ra w c a re e r sand u p lo a d e d s tru c tu re ta kin g

B B B B B B

invent jo b w a te r d o w n lo a d e d system tra n s p o rtin g

C C C C C C

devise w o rk w ood loaded plan m oving

D D D D D D

d esig n o cc u p a tio n glass o verloa de d c o m p le x g e ttin g

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

3. Match the words with their definitions. tu n n e l

a. so m e o n e w ho plans, d e sig n s and b u ild s roads, b rid g e s and p u b lic b u ild in g s

s te a m sh ip

b. to m ove d o w n w a rd s

civil e n g in e e r

c. a passage th a t g oe s u n d e r th e g ro u n d , th ro u g h a hill

e n clo se d

d. large co m m e rc ia l boat, e s p e cia lly one driven by steam

to sink

e. s u rro u n d e d w ith

4. Look at the table and write down about the population in certain places in Great Britain. There is a model to help you. Model:

The p o p u la tio n o f E ngland in 2 0 0 4 w as fifty m illion n in e tyth re e th o u sa n d e ig h t h u n d re d p eo ple . In 200 5 it w as ....

Population (mid 2004)

Population (mid 2005)

Population (mid 2006)

Population (mid 2007)

England

50,093,800

50,431,700

50,762,900

51.1 million

Northern Irela nd

1,710,300

1,724,400

1,741,600

1.8 million

Scotland

5,078,400

5,094,800

5,116,900

5.1 million

Wales

2,952,500

2,958,600

2,965,900

3.0 million

United Kingdom

59,834.900

60,209.500

60,587,600

60,975,000

Administrative Division

5. Here are some facts about British climate and weather. Read the information and then give advice on how to get prepared for the trip to Britain. There is a model to help you. Model: T hey say it d o e s n ’t rain in B ritain every day, b u t you should ta k e an u m b re lla in y o u r su itcase. If you w a n t to relax in fin e w e a th e r and g e t su n ta n n e d w hile you are in B ritain, you sh ou ld go in Ju ly o r A ugust, b eca use th e se are th e w a rm e s t m o n th s o f th e ye a r w ith average te m p e ra tu re s o f 2 4-29°C ...

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

C o n tra ry to p o p u la r b elief, it DOES NOT rain every d ay in England o r in th e re st o f th e UK! H ow ever, it is alw ays advisable to b rin g som e typ e o f w a te rp ro o f clo th in g and keep y o u rs e lf p sych o lo g ic a lly p re p a re d ! B ritain is an island c o u n try and th e s u rro u n d in g sea gives England a va rie d clim a te . You never know w h a t th e w e a th e r w ill be like fro m one day to th e o th e r. It can be su nn y one d ay and rainy th e next. As B ritain has such a va ria b le clim a te ch a n g in g fro m d ay to day, it is d iffic u lt to p re d ic t th e w e a th e r. In g en era l th e re are w arm su m m e rs and co o l w in te rs. The su m m e rs are c o o le r th an th o s e on th e c o n tin e n t, b u t th e w in te rs are m ild e r. The overall clim a te in England is ca lle d te m p e ra te m a ritim e . This m eans th a t it is m ild w ith te m p e ra tu re s n ot m uch low e r th a n 0°C in w in te r and n ot m uch h ig h e r than 32°C in su m m e r. Ju ly and A u g u s t are n o rm a lly th e w a rm e s t m on th in England. A ro un d th e co asts, F ebruary is n o rm a lly th e c o ld e s t m o n th , b u t inland th e re is little to ch o o se b etw e en Ja n u a ry and F eb rua ry as th e c o ld e s t m onth. P ro b a b ly th e b est m o n th s to travel in England are M ay, June, S e p te m b e r and O cto b e r. These m o n th s g e n e ra lly have th e m o st p le a sa n t te m p e ra tu re s and less rain. Ju ly and A u g u st are th e w a rm e s t m on th s, b u t th e y are also th e w e tte s t. The su n n ie st p a rts o f th e Britain are along th e so uth c o a s t o f England. The m ain in flu e n ce on th e B ritish c lim a te is close p ro x im ity to th e A tla n tic O cean, n o rth e rn la titu d e , and th e w a rm in g o f th e w a te rs a ro u n d the land by th e G ulf S tre am (a w arm c u rre n t o f th e n o rth e rn A tla n tic O cean).

6. Look at the picture. Read or listen to the weather forecast and say whether the sentences are true or false. Correct the false sentences. G ood evening, and here is th e w e a th e r fo re c a s t fo r to m o rro w . S c o tla n d w ill be co ld and it w ill sn o w a little in th e m o rn in g . In th e n o rth e ast it will be a w e t day and rain m ay m ove to W ales and th e M id la n d s d u rin g th e a fte rn o o n . In th e e ast it will be g e n e ra lly dry, b u t dull and clou d y. In th e south and th e so u th w e s t it will be a b rig h t c le a r d ay w ith sunshine, b u t it m ay rain d u rin g th e evening. In th e south e ast it m ay be fo g g y d u rin g th e m o rn in g , b u t th e a fte rn o o n will be clear. It m ay be w in d y la te r d u rin g th e day.

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

UNIT VI

It w ill be a g o o d d ay in th e so uth w e s t o f England. It w ill rain in th e n o rth east. The m o rn in g s will be c le a r in th e so uth east. It w ill n ot rain to m o rro w in th e so uth. It m ay rain in th e M id la n d s and W ales. It w ill sn o w in th e m o rn in g in W ales.

6. Give words for the given definitions. You can find the words in the text in exercise 5. lo c a te d n e a r o r n e x t to th e s e a - maritim e having m uch va ria tio n o r d ive rsity s itu a te d in th e in te rio r p a rt o f a c o u n try o r reg ion n ea rness in place, tim e th e a n g u la r d is ta n c e n o rth o r so uth fro m th e e q u a to r o f a p o in t on th e e a rth ’s su rfa ce , m e a sure d on th e m eridian o f th e p o in t 6. a p o rtio n o f an ocean o r sea p a rtly e n clo se d by land 7. d e s ig n e d to p re v e n t w a te r fro m e n te rin g o r p a s s in g th ro u g h

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

LESSON 74. NORTHERN IRELAND 1. Look a t the photos. What do you know about Northern Ireland? Work in pairs and try to choose the right answers. 1. W hat is th e p o p u la tio n o f N o rth e rn Ireland? a. 1 ,8 1 0 ,8 6 3 m illion p e o p le b. 2 ,8 1 0 ,8 6 3 m illion p e o p le c. 3 ,8 1 0 ,8 6 3 m illion p e o p le 2. W hat lan g ua ge do p e o p le usually sp e a k in N o rth e rn Ireland? a. English b. W elsh c. Irish 3. W hat is th e clim a te like in N o rth ern Ireland? a. h o t and d ry b. co ld and sn ow y c. rainy and w e t 4. W hat is th e ca p ita l o f N o rth e rn Ireland? a. B e lfa st b. D ublin c. C a rd iff 5. W ho w as th e ca p ta in o f “th e T ita n ic ” ? a. C aptain W illiam Ja m e s S m ith c. C aptain Edward John S m ith b. C aptain S am uel Edw ard S m ith d. C aptain Jo hn F re d rick Sm ith

212

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

2. Read the brochure about Northern Ireland and find the answers to questions in exercise 1.

Northern Ireland has a population of about two million people. The official language is English but people usually speak Irish. People call the island of Ireland the “Emerald Isle” because it is very green. It often rains in Northern Ireland. The countryside is very beautiful and Irish people are very friendly.

Belfast - a great capital Have a great time in Belfast. There are wonderful shops, restaurants, music life and lots of cultural attractions. Walk around the busy streets, visit the museums, or relax in one of the parks. Belfast is the home of the Belfast Telegraph, Irish News, and The News Letter, the oldest Englishlanguage newspaper in the world still in publication. Go to Belfast Strand Cinema where you can watch the best films of the world.

Great People of Northern Ireland Some of the best world famous people are from Northern Ireland. For example, Gary Moore, a prominent guitarist, Thomas Andrews, a world famous architect and others.

> V

< Legends Go to Dunluce Castle and see the famous Dunluce Stone. People say this stone has got magic powers and you become a brilliant speaker when you touch it! What is more: do you know that Titanic was build in Belfast? Visit its renowned shipyards.

Around the country Explore Northern Ireland: drive, walk or cycle around the beautiful coast and the green countryside. Stop in wonderful old towns and villages and visit historic castles and churches.

Fun activities Horse riding, fishing, cycling and walking are popular activities. There are fantastic beaches, too. Try surfing or scuba diving - or just have a swim!

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

3. Read the brochure again and say whether the sentences are true or false. Correct the false sentences. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

N o rth e rn Ireland is ve ry g reen. The Irish p e o p le are n ot ve ry h o sp ita b le and frie n d ly. There are g o o d sh o p s in B elfast. W hen you to u c h th e D un luce S tone, you b e co m e happy. There are m any h is to ric b u ild in g s in N o rth e rn Ireland. S kiing is a p o p u la r a ctivity in N o rth e rn Ireland. The b e a ch e s are rea lly g oo d.

4. Find the synonyms for the words “famous” and “places of interest” in the text in exercise 2. 5. Work with your partner. Take turns to ask and answer questions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

W hat W hat W hat W hat W hat W hat W ho

im a g es s p rin g to m ind w hen you hea r ’ N o rth e rn Ire la n d '? are th e g o o d th in g s and bad th in g s a b o u t N o rth e rn Ireland? is N o rth e rn Ireland m o s t fa m o u s fo r? do you know a b o u t N o rth e rn Ire la n d ’s history? do you th in k a b o u t N o rth e rn Ireland p eople? do you know a b o u t th e g e o g ra p h y o f N o rth e rn Ireland? are th e m o st fa m o u s N o rth e rn Ireland p e o p le you know ?

6. Choose any city in Great Britain. Find information about this city and prepare a similar brochure as the one in exercise 2. Write it down in your copy book.

214

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

LESSON 75. SCOTLAND 1. Read or listen to the dialogue. Act it out with your partner and then make up a similar one. Jane: V icto r: Jane: V icto r:

Jane:

V icto r:

Jane:

W h e re in B ritain w o u ld you like to live V icto r? In S co tla n d . T h a t’s a g o o d ch o ice . Can you give any reasons? It’s a ve ry b e a u tifu l c o u n try. There are high sn ow y m o u n ta in s and g re en plains and valleys. M oreo ve r, S co tla n d has g o t ve ry h e ro ic past. I have read a lot a b o u t brave S co ts w ho fo u g h t fe a rle s s ly fo r th e in d e p e n d e n c e o f th e ir hom e land. W hat about its c lim a te and w e a th e r? The w in te rs in S co tla n d can be ra th e r co ld , you know . I love w in te rs w ith sn ow and so m e co ld . W h a t I love a b o u t S co tla n d is its w o n d e rfu l citie s w ith m any h is to ric b u ild in g s, ca stle s and fo rtre s s e s , and a lo t o f m o d ern houses to o . Y our s to ry a b o u t S co tla n d is so g o o d . You p e rsu a d e d m e to m ove to th is p a rt o f B ritain.

have

a lm o st

2. Work in pairs. Guess the answers to the questions about Scotland. 1. 2. 3. 4.

W hat is th e ca p ita l o f S co tla nd ? a. G lasgow b. E dinburgh c. D ublin W hat is th e p o p u la tio n o f S co tla nd ? a. 5 m illion b. 10 m illion c. 15 m illion W hich rare anim als can you fin d in S co tla n d ? a. b row n b ears b. g o ld e n eag les c. w olves W hich o f th e s c ie n tis ts is n ot S co ttish ? a. A. G .Bell (in ve nte d th e te le p h o n e ) b. T. Edison (in ve nte d a lig h t bulb ) c. A. F lem ing (d isco ve re d p en icillin )

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

3. Read the text and check your guesses from exercise 2. S co tla n d is p a rt o f th e U nited K in gd o m of G reat B ritain and N o rth e rn Ireland, b u t it has g o t its own p a rlia m e n t, fo o tb a ll and ru g b y te a m s, and th e re are sp ecia l S co ttis h b an kno te s. The c o u n try has a p o p u la tio n o f a b o u t five m illion p eo ple . In E d inb u rg h, w hich is th e ca p ita l city, th e re are lots o f m o d e rn fa c ilitie s like shops, re sta u ra n ts, s p o rts club s, etc. The old to w n loo ks ve ry m uch in te re stin g . T here is a h is to ric ca stle th e re as w ell. S co tla n d has lovely m o u n ta in s and lakes (called “ lo c h s ” ). T here are n ea rly e ig h t h u n d re d islands, so you s h o u ld n ’t be su rp rise d to see so m e seals th e re . T here are som e anim als w hich are in d a n g e r o f e xtin c tio n . T hese are brow n b ears and w olves. G olden eag les are sp ecia l b ird s in S co tla n d , b e ca u se it is th e only p lace in th e UK w h e re you can see th e m . If lu ck strik e s you, you m ig h t see th e Loch Ness M o n ste r! S co ttish p e o p le are ve ry p ro u d o f th e ir c o u n try and its cu ltu re . T here w ere a lo t o f s c ie n tific a ch ie ve m e n ts as w ell. T elevision w as invented by Jo hn Logie Baird. T he te le p h o n e w as firs t c o n s tru c te d by A. Bell. P enicillin w as d isco ve re d by a p ro m in e n t S co ttish s c ie n tis t A le xa n d e r F lem ing. T here are fa m o u s S co ts in th e w o rld o f lite ra tu re to o . The w rite rs A rth u r C onan D oyle (S h e rlo c k H olm es w as w ritte n by th is w rite r) and R ob e rt Louis S tevenson (T reasure Island) are fro m S co tla n d . Every ye a r on th e 25th o f Ja nu ary, the S co ts c e le b ra te th e b irth d a y o f th e ir national p oe t, R ob e rt Burns.

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

4. Read the text again and say whether the sentences are true or false. Correct the false sentences. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

All houses in E dinburgh are m od ern . T here are over 800 S co ttish islands. G olden eag les can be fo u n d anyw h ere in G reat B ritain. R o b e rt S tevenson is th e a u th o r o f S h e rlo ck H olm es. R o b e rt B urns is a fa m o u s S co ttish scie n tist.

5. Mini presentation. Divide the class into several groups. Each group should collect some information about Britain and the British (you can check w w w .p ro je c tb rita in .c o m for a start). Then have all-class presentation on what you have found. The following are the topics to look for: 1. C u sto m s and tra d itio n s . 2. B ritain to d a y. 3. D aily life o f th e B ritish. 4. English ch a ra cte r. 5. S p o rts and leisure 6. A ctivitie s in B ritain. 7. Food and d rink. 8. H istory. 9. E ducation. 1 0 . G o vern m e nt. 11 .T o u rist in fo rm a tio n .

6. Use the mind map given below to speak about Great Britain.

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

REVISION LESSONS LESSON 7 6 . LONDON AND THE LONDONERS 1. Read or listen to the dialogue and put it in the correct order as you listen. Act it out with your partner and then make up a similar one. V icto r: Jane:

V icto r:

Jane: Jane:

N ever m ind, it goes all a ro u n d London. L e t’s lo o k a t th e m ap first. I d o n ’t w a n t to g e t lo st in th e tu be . C om e one Jane, shall we go to P icca dilly C ircu s o r to T ra fa lg a r S quare? W here is th e n e a re st u n d e rg ro u n d sta tio n , Jane? Y o u ’ve g o t a nice sense o f h um ou r, V icto r! J u s t th e re , at th e c o rn e r o f th e stre e t.

2. Complete the conversations below with the best answer: 1. You are g o in g to London on a tra in . You w a n t to kn o w w h a t tim e you will arrive. You ask th e p a sse n g e r next to yo u :_ ________ a. Excuse m e, w h a t tim e d oe s th is tra in arrive in London? b. Hello. Are w e n ea rly th e re ? c. Do you know if th is tra in will arrive in London? d. Y o u 're w e lco m e . We w ill arrive in th e m o rn in g . 2. Y our frie n d Jane is m ee tin g you a t th e sta tio n . Jane ca lls you on y o u r m o b ile and a sks:__________ a. W hat tim e w ill you m e e t th e tra in ? b. Is th e sta tio n n e a r London? c. W hat tim e d oe s y o u r tra in arrive? d. W hen is y o u r tra in g o in g to be n e a r m e? 3. Y our tra in a rrives on tim e and Jane is w a itin g to see you. You have n o t seen each o th e r fo r a long tim e. You say to Ja n e :__________ a. W e ’ve been a ble to m e e t fo r such a long tim e. b. It's been a long tim e since w e had tim e. c. I saw you b e fo re , m aybe a ye a r ago. d. Long tim e no see.

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

3. Study the facts about London. Then make up a similar fact sheet about Kyiv. Compare the two cities. Use the model to help you. Model: Kyiv is a s m a lle r c ity than London. B ut it is yo u n g e r. And it has a low e r p o p u la tio n d e n sity... London is th e biggest city in B ritain and in Europe. London o c c u p ie s o ver 6 2 0 square miles. London has a p o p u la tio n o f 7 ,1 7 2 ,0 3 6 (2001). A b o u t 12 p e r c e n t o f B rita in ’s overall p o p u la tio n live in London. London has th e h ig h e st p o p u la tio n d e n s ity in B ritain, w ith 4 ,6 9 9 p e o p le p e r sq u a re kilo m e tre . London is in th e s o u th e a s t o f England. London is th e se a t o f ce n tra l g o v e rn m e n t in B ritain. The ta lle s t b u ild in g in London is th e C anary W h a rf T ow er. London w as th e first city in the world to have an underground railway, know n as th e ’T u b e ’ . S om e o f th e m o st im p o rta n t p e o p le fro m c o u n trie s all o ve r th e w o rld visit th e Q ueen a t B u ckin g h a m Palace. T here are over 100 th e a tre s in London, in clu d in g 50 in th e W est End. London th e a tre a c c o u n ts fo r 4 5 % o f all UK th e a tre a d m issio n s and over 70% o f b o x -o ffic e revenues.

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

4. Answer the questions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

W hat co m e s to m ind w hen you hea r th e w o rd ‘ L o n d o n ’? Do you th in k London is th e g re a te s t c ity in th e w o rld ? W hat are y o u r fa vo u rite im a g es o f London? W hat do you kn ow a b o u t life in London? W hat is y o u r im age o f L ondoners? W ould you like to live in London? W h y / w h y not? W hat th in g s can to u ris ts do in London? W hat do you th in k o f th e d iffe re n t London a cce n ts? Is London th e b e st p lace to live in th e UK?

5. Do the quiz about London. 1.

2. 3.

4. 5.

6. 7.

The R om an nam e fo r London was: a) A nglium a) D anube b) C apitalum b) T ham es c) Londinium c) Rhine The river in London is ca lle d th e ... In th e p h o to , you can see a) Big Ben a) th e m e tro b) H yde Park b) th e snake c) T o w e r B rid g e c) th e tu b e L o n d o n e rs call th e London u n d e rg ro u n d railw ay The Q ueen lives in .... a) B u ckin g h a m Palace a) 2008 b) D ow ning S tre e t b) 2010 c) 2012 c) T ra fa lg a r S quare The London O lym p ics w e re in ... ..... is n o t a London fo o tb a ll te a m . a) A rsenal b) Everton c) C helsea

6. Write down in full words all the figures you can find in exercise 3. There is a model to help you. Model:

620 sq u a re m iles - six hundred and twenty square miles.

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

LESSON 77 1. Read or listen to the dialogue and act it out with your partner. V icto r: Jane: V icto r: Jane:

V icto r: Jane: V icto r:

Listen. W h a t do you th in k o f th is song? It’s g o o d - I like it. W ho is it? A new b a n d .... S om e local guys. Do you like th e m ? T hey are local? Really? T h e y ’re p re tty g o o d . W h o ’s th e lead sin g e r? I like her. She so u n d s like M ariah Carey. Yes, e v e ryb o d y says th a t. It’s m y frie n d , Kate. W h o ’s th e b oy sing ing w ith her? I’ m n ot sure a b o u t him . Uh... a ctua lly, th a t’s me. I’ m in th e band, to o.

2. Complete the questions with personal pronouns and the questions - with everybody, nothing or nobody. 1. A: B: 2. A: B: 3. A: B: 4. A: B: A: B:

I listen to h ip -h o p a lot. Do you listen to Jt,_ to o ? Yes. Everybody in m y class listens to h ip -h o p . R icky M artin - he w as on TV last n ig h t. Do you k n o w ___? O f c o u rs e I d o . _____ know s R icky M artin. I d o n ’t really like classica l m usic. Do you ever listen t o ___? Yes, b u t w ith e a rp h o n e s - _____in m y fa m ily likes it. I like Alicia Keys. S h e ’s a good singer. W hat do you th in k o f ___ ? O h , ____m u c h . ______is a fan o f A licia Keys in m y class. M y favourite band is Coldplay. I think th e y’re great. Do you lik e __ ? Yeah. T h e y ’ re th e b e s t . _____ plays ro ck like th e y do.

3. Choose the correct word. 1. The Beatles w ere a fa m ous British orchestra/band. 2. C old pla y’s new song has gone straig ht into the top/box ten. 3. We haven’t seen this g ro up on scene/stage. 4. The spectators/audience sang along w ith the band. 5. I always w anted to hear them perfo rm live/living. 6. Social surrou n din gs seem to affect/effect the m usic and lyrics o f d iffe re n t m usicians. 7. He was ta pp ing his fo o t to the rhythm/rhyme o f the m usic. 8. He plays m usic entirely fro m mind/memory. 9. Live m usic can be transmitted/broadcast over the radio, TV o r the Internet. 10. Som e a m ateur m usicians have private/personal m usic lessons with a teacher.

UNIT VI

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

4. Read the text and match the headings with the paragraphs. Body image School

Mobile phones School uniform

Bullies Free time

Clothes and looks

A. B ritish te e n a g e rs sp en d m o st o f th e ir tim e at sch o o l. P upils in B ritain can leave sch o o l a t 16 (yea r 11). This is also th e age w hen m o s t p u p ils ta ke th e ir firs t im p o rta n t exam s, GCSEs. T hey ta ke betw e en five and te n s u b je c ts and th a t m eans a lo t o f stu d y in g . T hey are sp e n d in g m o re tim e on h o m e w o rk th an te e n a g e rs have ever d o n e b efo re. B. V isit a lm o s t any sch o o l in B ritain and th e firs t th in g y o u ’ll n o tice is th e sch o o l unifo rm . A lth o u g h sch o o l u n ifo rm has its a dvantages, by th e tim e m o st te e n a g e rs are 15 o r 16 th e y are tire d o f w ea rin g it. C. Fifty p e r c e n t o f te e n a g e rs in B ritain say th e y have been b u llie d b eca use o f th e ir race, looks, a cce n t, in te llig e n c e o r fo r no reason a t all. S ixteen te e n a g e rs in B ritain kill th e m se lve s e very ye a r b e ca u se o f b ullyin g , a p ro b le m now ca lle d “ b u lly c id e ” . D. In B ritain, te e n a g e rs ju d g e you by th e s h irt o r tra in e rs you are w e a rin g . F orty p e r c e n t o f B ritish te e n a g e rs believe it ’s im p o rta n t to w e a r d e s ig n e r labels. T eenage fe e t in B ritain w e a r N ike o r A didas and th e m ore expensive, th e b e tte r. E. T e e n a g e rs in B ritain w o rry a b o u t th e ir loo ks and th e ir w e ig h t, like in m any o th e r w e ste rn co u n trie s. M o re th an 70 p e r c e n t o f g irls in B ritain are on a d ie t, a lth o u g h o n ly one in e ig h t o f th e m is o verw eig ht! F. Like te e n a g e rs all o ve r th e w o rld , B ritish te e n a g e rs love to chat. The m ob ile p ho ne is an e ssential th in g fo r m o st B ritish te e n a g e rs . M ore than 90 p e r c e n t o f 12 to 1 6 -y e a r-o ld s have one. M any e xp e rts believe th a t m o b ile s sto p te e n a g e rs s p e n d in g m on ey on c ig a re tte s and sw eets. G. M usic is th e n u m b e r one in te re s t fo r British te ens. B u t th e y c e rta in ly d o n ’t all like th e sam e m usic. UK g a rag e , h ip -h o p and new m etal are all p o p u la r. T ee n ag ers love g o in g o u t to o . H ow ever, fin d in g so m e w h e re to go is n ’t alw ays easy. It’s no su rp rise th a t B ritish te e n a g e rs sp en d m ore tim e online than E uropean o r A m e rica n te e n s and use c h a t ro o m s to m ake a new frie n d .

GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

UNIT VI

5. Fill in the gaps with the words from the box.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

about

fo r

on (2x)

out

H ow m uch tim e do you usually s p e n d _____h om e w o rk? A re you t i r e d _____w e a rin g / n ot w e a rin g a sch o o l u n ifo rm ? Do you ju d g e p e o p le ____th e ir b eh avio r o r clo th e s? Do you usually n o tice d iffe r e n c e s d e s ig n e r labels? A re p u p ils o f y o u r sch o o l b u llie d _____ th e clo th e s th e y w ear? Do you w o r r y ____y o u r w e ig h t? W hy are you e ating so little ? Are y o u ___a d ie t? W hat do you sp e n d m oney____? M obile, sw eets, books, e tc? Do you like g o in g ____a t th e w e e ke n d ?

6. Turn the following sentences into the Passive Voice. 1 . T hey p rin t th is n e w sp a p e r in London. -

This newspaper is printed in London. 2 . T hey w e a r th e se sh oe s in H olland. 3. T hey b u ilt th a t ch u rch five h u n d re d years ago. 4. T h e y ’ve sto len m y bike. 5. T hey d o n ’t eat p o rk in Iran. 6 . T hey m ake pasta in Italy. 7. T hey d id n ’t tra n s la te his firs t novel. 8 . T h e y ’ve c a u g h t th e ro b b e rs.

223

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

LESSON 78 1. Look a t the pictures o f Ukrainian citie s. M atch th e ir names with the p ictu re s. Say what you know about each city. a. Kharkiv

b. Lutsk

c. Zaporizhya

d. Lviv

e. Chernivtsi

f. Odesa

2. Read the te x t and answer the questions a fte r it. Pay attention to the words in bold. Climate A certain place has some weather during a long period of time. We say it is a climate. Climate has a very important influence on plants, animals and humans. It’s different in various parts of the world. In Ukraine climate is usually mild and moderate, sometimes wet. But recently climate has changed a lot. Though it hasn’t changed naturally. We can say that the climate has been changed by people. Scientists think the world is becoming hotter. Winters have become warmer. Sometimes there is little snow in January, and there were winters when it rained on the New Year’s Eve. Many people say that it is so because of the greenhouse effect (парниковий ефект). It works like this: sunlight gives us heat; some of the heat warms the atmosphere, and some of the heat goes back into space. But much heat cannot go there, as during the last 100 years people have produced a lot of carbon dioxide (вуглекислий газ). This gas in the

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

atmosphere is like glass in a greenhouse. It lets heat get in, but it doesn’t let much heat go out. So the atmosphere becomes warmer. Where does the carbon dioxide come from? People and animals breathe in oxygen (кисень) and breathe out carbon dioxide. We produce carbon dioxide when we burn things. Trees take this gas from the air and produce oxygen but in the last several years people have cut down too many trees, as a result, there aren’t enough trees to take this dangerous gas. So there is more and more carbon dioxide. As we can see, climate changes in different parts of the world from year to year. These changes can be dangerous for our planet. That’s why we must do something to stop these changes, otherwise we may all die. 1. What is climate? 2. Is climate always the same in different parts of the world? Does it change? 3. What can you say about the climate in Ukraine? 4. What do you know about the greenhouse effect? 5. Why doesn’t all the heat go back into space? 6. Why does the atmosphere become warmer? 7. How can the greenhouse effect influence the climate on our planet in the future? 3. M atch the words with th e ir definitions. moderate

a person

carbon something to the contrary; in a different way or manner dioxide greenhouse the power to change or affect someone or something; the power to cause changes without directly forcing them to happen otherwise

the whole mass of air that surrounds the Earth

oxygen

average in size or amount (neither too much nor too little)

atmosphere

different from each other

influence various human

a gas that is produced when people and animals breathe out or when certain fuels are burned and that is used by plants for energy in photosynthesis a chemical that is found in the air, that has no colour, taste, or smell, and that is necessary for life a building or part of a building that has glass walls and a glass roof and that is used for growing plants

UNIT VII

UKRAINE

Focus on Grammar! Present Perfect Passive Read the sentence in bold type in the second paragraph of the text in exercise 2. Compare it with the previous sentence. What can you say about these two sentences? The present perfect passive is useful when you want to describe something that was done in the past without a lot of information about when it was done, how, why, etc. S + (has or have) + been + past participle Compare: Active: Thomas has written many books. Passive: Many books have been written by Thomas. Interrogative form (has or have) +S + been + past participle

4. Turn the follow ing sentences into the Passive Voice. Model:

Z o o ke e p e rs have c a p tu re d th e lion in th e fo re s t. The lion has been c a p tu re d in th e fo re s t by th e zo o ke e p e rs.

1. Everybody has ce le b ra te d J o a n a ’s birthday. 2. They have cleaned the classroom . 3. Kerrie has paid the bill. 4. I have eaten a ham burger. 5. I have ope ne d the present. 6. They have not read the book. 7. You have not se nt th e parcel. 8. Linda has cleaned the kitchen. 9. O ur m o th e r has w ate re d th e plants. 10. The h e a d m a ste r has fin ish e d th e report.

5. Fill in the blanks with the words from the box. f humans, otherwise, various, moderate, atmosphere, influence, oxygen, greenhouse

<________________________________________________________________________________>

1. Her d o c to r re c o m m e n d e d 1 m o d e ra te exercise. 2. She has rem ain ed under the 2 _____o f her frie n d s . 3. 3______ s o m e tim e s d o n ’t pay a tte n tio n to w h a t w ill happen in th e fu tu re . 4. We n eeded to m ove th e p la n ts into th e 4 _____b e fo re th e firs t fro s t killed th e m . 5. I d id n ’t like th e e n d in g , b u t 5_____it w as a ve ry g o o d book. 6. He has lived in p la ce s as 6_____as N ew Y ork and B eijing. 7. C hanges in th e 7 _ ___ have been n o tice d by th e e xp e rts. 8. You m ay g e t sle e p y in y o u r room if th e re is n ’t e n o ug h 8_____th e re .

6. Make up your own sentences with the words from the box in exercise 5. Write your sentences in the copy book.

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

LESSON 79 1. Read o r listen to the dialogue and a c t it o u t with your p a rtn e r. V icto r: Jane: V icto r:

Jane: V icto r: Jane: V icto r: Jane:

Jane, did you kn ow th a t U kraine is la rg e r than B ritain? W ell, I have never th o u g h t a b o u t th at. Is it rea lly larg er? It is! I am n o t kid d in g . W h a t is m ore, U kraine is th e se co n d la rg e st c o u n try in Europe. You d o n ’t say so! I d id n ’t kn ow that! W hat a b o u t France? Is it s m a lle r than U kraine? Yes, it is. B ut it ’s th e th ird la rg e s t c o u n try a fte r Russia and U kraine. H ow do you know all th a t? I love G e og rap hy. T h a t’s m y fa v o u rite su b je c t. I see.

2. Read the te xt about Ukraine's geography and say w hether the sentences are true o r false. C orrect the false sentences.

UNIT VII

UKRAINE

The g e o g ra p h y o f Ukraine varies greatly from one region o f th e co u n try to another, but the m ajority o f the co u n try lies w ithin the East European Plain. Ukraine is th e se co n d largest co u n try by area in Europe a fte r the Russian Federation. Its various regions have diverse g e o gra ph ic and clim atic features ranging fro m th e highlands to the lowlands. U kraine has a s tra te g ic p o sitio n in East C entral Europe: lying on th e n o rth e rn sh o re s o f th e B lack Sea and th e Sea o f Azov, it b o rd e rs a n u m b e r o f European c o u n trie s - Poland, Slovakia and H ungary in th e w est, B elarus in th e n o rth , M oldova and R om ania in th e s o u th -w e s t and Russia in th e east. The to ta l g e o g ra p h ic area o f U kraine is 6 0 3 ,5 5 0 sq u a re kilo m e tre s. The m o st p a rt o f its area is fla t. The m o u n ta in s in U kraine c o ve r o nly 5 per c e n t its te rrito ry . There are th e C rim ean M o u n ta in s in th e so uth and th e C a rp a th ia n s in th e w est. H overla is th e h ig h e st p ea k o f th e U krainian C arp ath ian s. It is 2,061 m e tre s high. T here are seven m a jo r rivers in U kraine: Desna, D nipro, D nister, D anube, P rypyat, Siverian D onets, and S o u th e rn Buh. The clim a te o f U kraine is d e te rm in e d by its g eo gra ph ical location. U kra in e ’s te rrito ry lies in th e te m p e ra te b e lt and its clim a te is te m p e ra te ly co ntin en ta l w ith co ld w inte rs and w arm sum m ers, only th e so uth e rn co ast o f the C rim ea is s u b tro p ica l. U kra ine 's clim a te s are influ e nce d by th e hum id air fro m th e A tla n tic O cean. The average yearly te m p e ra tu re in U kraine varies betw een + 5 ..+ 7 C in th e north and + 1 1 ..+ 1 3 C in th e south. Ja nu ary is th e c o ld e s t m onth and Ju ly is th e h o tte s t one. The average te m p e ra tu re in Ja nu ary is 7 deg re e s below zero. The average te m p e ra tu re in Ju ly is 23 d e g re e s above zero. The hig h est rainfall is observed in th e w estern p art o f Ukraine, in the C arpathians. This is th e w e tte s t place in Ukraine. The rains are fe w on th e co astlin e o f th e Black Sea and th e Sea o f Azov. On the main p art o f th e c o u n try rain falls enough to cultivate d iffe re n t a g ricu ltu ra l plants. T here are m o re than th re e h u n d re d citie s and to w n s in U kraine. The b ig g e s t o f th e m are th e ind u stria l c e n tre s such as Kharkiv, D onetsk, D n ip ro p e tro vsk, Lviv. O desa, M ykolayiv, K herson are th e m o s t im p o rta n t p o rts o f U kraine. All p a rts o f U kraine have g o t sim ila r c lim a tic and g e o g ra p h ic fe a tu re s.

UKRAINE

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

UNIT VII

Poland is lo ca te d to th e e ast o f U kraine. M o u n ta in s o c c u p y th e m a jo r p a rt o f o u r co u n try. M o st o f U kra in e ’s clim a te is s u b tro p ic a l. Ja nu ary, F ebruary and D e ce m b e r are co ld m o n th s in U kraine. The d rie s t area o f U kraine is th e so uth o f th e co u n try. U k ra in e ’s te rrito ry is w ashed by tw o seas. The c lim a te o f o u r c o u n try is g re a tly in flu e n ce d by h um id a ir fro m th e B lack Sea.

3. Look a t the map in exercise 2 and say what countries does Ukraine b o rd e r on. Pay attention to the stru ctures in bold. Model: In the east Ukraine borders on Russia (or Russian Federation). In the west, Ukraine is bordered by Poland. It also has borders with .... 4. Look a t the map o f Europe. Use the m odel in exercise 3 and say what neighbours do such countries b o rd e r on: 1. 3.

S lovakia G e rm a ny

2. 4.

A u stria M old ova

5. Turn the follow ing sentences into the Passive Voice. 1. Has she phoned him ? 2. Have th ey noticed us? 3. The g overnm ent has repaired th e road. 4. The stu d e n t has learned lessons. 5. The school has ordered new books. 6. M y cousin has prepared the meal. 7. M y pen friend has sent the email to me. 8. The children have eaten all the straw berries. 9. I have dow nloaded a very nice song fro m the Internet.

6. Answers the questions below. Write them. Use the m odel to help you. Model: W hat is th e ca p ita l o f U kraine? - The ca p ita l o f U kraine is Kyiv. 1. W hat are th e m o st im p o rta n t U krainian rivers? 2. W hat m o u n ta in s can you fin d in th e w e s t o f U kraine? 3. W hich p a rt o f U kraine receives m o re rainfall? 4. W hat is th e to ta l area o f U kraine? 5. D oes U kraine b o rd e r on T urkey? W hat kind o f b o rd e r is th a t? 6. W hat is th e average w in te r te m p e ra tu re in U kraine (in January, fo r exam ple )?

UNIT VII

UKRAINE

LESSON 80 1. Look a t the pictures and try to m atch them with the names.

(

Dnistrovsky Canyon, Svityaz Lake, Podilsky Tovtry, HranitnoStepove Pobuzhzhya, Ascania Nova, Marble Cave, Synevyr Lake

^________________________________________________________________________________ >

2. Read the te x t and com plete it with the sentences from the box. Pay attention to the words in bold. Seven Natural Wonders of Ukraine Ascania Nova, a natural preserve in the land of Khersonshchyna. It co ve rs an area o f 11 th o u sa n d h ecta res. It is m o stly steppe w ith m ore th an 4 0 0 sp e cie s o f g ra ss and flo w e rs. The se ctio n o f th e preserve, The Park, sp re a d s o ve r an area o f a b o u t 200 h e cta re s and c o n sists o f several p arts. There are a b o u t 150 s p e cie s o f tre e s and bush es in th e

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

park. 1_____ . M o re th a n 60 sp e cie s o f b ird s and m any sp e cie s o f s te p p e mammals in h a b it th e Park and th e preserve. A m o ng th e b ird s you can see w h ite and b la ck swans, flamingos, cranes, gre y partridges, and larks, a ste p p e eagle. Camels, lamas, zebras and w ild horses can be fo u n d here to o . T o u rists have a ch a n ce to travel a c ro s s c e rta in se ctio n s o f th e p re serve on fo o t, on h o rs e b a c k o r in to u ris t buses. Dnistrovsky Canyon is a 2 5 0 -k ilo m e tre s tre tc h o f th e D n iste r River fro m th e Z o lo ta Lypa River to th e Z b ru ch River. 2_____ . In th e villages lo ca te d in th e canyon, th e re are old c h u rc h e s and cave m o n a ste rie s, ruins o f fo rtre s s e s , and o th e r h isto rica l and a rc h ite c tu ra l lan d m a rks. Svityaz lake is th e b ig g e s t and d e e p e s t lake in U kraine. It sp re a d s over a te rrito ry o f 2 ,6 7 2 h e cta re s. 3 ______ . Svityaz is one o f th e S h a tsky Lakes, fa m o u s fo r th e ir g re a t sce n ic natural beauty. The w a te r in th e lake is clean and has a nice, s o ft ta ste . Podilsky Tovtry, th e Land o f K h m e ln ych ch yn a . It is a national park. The T ovtry is a range o f low hills th a t can be seen fro m th e s u rro u n d in g plain. 4 ______ . S im ila r g e o lo g ica l fe a tu re s have been fo u n d in G reat B ritain and th e USA. M ineral w a te rs o f th e area are know n fo r th e ir e xce lle n t quality. Hranitno-Stepove Pobuzhzhya.This area inclu d e s several p la ce s in th e land o f M ykola yivsh ch yna w h ich cre a te a ro c k y ca nyo n o f th e River P ivdenny Buh. 5______ .The Island o f Hard a ttra c ts to u ris ts as a p lace w hich used to be one o f th e fa m o u s C o ssa ck ce n tre s. M arble C a ve .lt is th e m o st b e a u tifu l cave a m o ng o th e r natural caves in th e C rim ean M ou ntain s. The cave has several “ h a lls” w hich are c o n n e c te d by c o rrid o rs o f over tw o th o u sa n d m e tre s in length. 6 ______ . A b o u t one k ilo m e te r o f c o rrid o rs and caves has been o pe ne d fo r to u ris ts . Synevyr lake, th e land o f T ra n sca rp a th ia . It is th e m o st a ttra ctive lake o f th e U krainian C arp ath ian s. It’s lo ca te d 989 m e tre s above th e sea level; its w a te r area is over 4 h e cta re s; its m axim um d e p th is 22 m e tre s, and th e average d e p th is o ve r 8 m etre s. The lake is over 10,000 ye ars o ld .8______ . R ight in th e c e n tre o f th e lake you can see a tin y island.

UNIT VII

UKRAINE

A. P lants and anim als o f th a t area to g e th e r w ith th e ro cks and the river m ake up a tru e w o n d e r th a t has g o t b e a u tifu l w a te rfa lls and o th e r s c e n ic a ttra c tio n s . B. The c o rrid o rs run u n d e rg ro u n d a t th e d e p th o f sixty m etre s. C. Its m axim um length is 9 ,2 2 5 m e tre s, and its m axim um w id th is a b o u t 4 ,0 0 0 m etre s. The m axim um d e p th is 5 8 .4 m e tre s and the a verage d e p th is 6 .9 m etres. In a sto rm , w aves are as im p ressive as on a re g u la r sea. D. The lake is su rro u n d e d by m ou ntain slo p e s w ith tre e s, m any o f w hich are h u n d re d s o f years old.

E. These lim e sto n e hills are th e last rem ain in g tra c e s o f th e re e fs th a t o n ce existed in w h a t w as th e M io ce n e Sea; th e reefs w ere fo rm e d by c o u n tle s s n u m b e rs o f sea shells. F. T ypical are m aples, C rim ean pines, oaks, elm s, fu r-tre e s , ashes, w h ite a cacia s and w e e p in g w illo w s th a t g ro w on th e banks o f th e p ic tu re s q u e pon d w hich is lo ca te d in the ce n tre o f th e park. G. The ca nyon p ro vid e s a d ra m a tic view w ith m ig h ty ro c k s s tre tc h in g a cro ss th e river in several p la c e s !_________________

3. Give words fo r the given definitions. 1. An area w h e re plants, anim als, m inerals, e tc., are p ro te c te d . - a

natural preserve 2. A large, fla t are a o f land w ith g ra ss and ve ry fe w tre e s. 3. A typ e o f anim al th a t fe e d s m ilk to its yo u n g and th a t usually has hair or fu r covering m ost of its skin. 4. A larg e bird th a t has ve ry g o o d e y e s ig h t and th a t kills o th e r b ird s and anim als fo r fo o d . 5. A d e e p valley w ith ste e p ro c k sid e s and o fte n a stre a m o r river flo w in g th ro u g h it.

6. A large hole th a t w as fo rm e d by natural p ro ce sse s in th e side o f a c liff o r hill o r u n d e r th e g ro un d . 7. A large area o f fla t land w ith o u t tree s. 8. An area in a stre a m o r river w h e re run nin g w a te r fa lls dow n fro m a high place. 9. A ty p e o f w h ite sto ne th a t is c o m m o n ly used in b u ild in g . 10. An are a o f m oving w a te r th a t is raised above th e m ain s u rfa c e o f an ocea n, a lake.

4. In the te xt in exercise 2, fin d the sentences in the Present P e rfe ct Passive and make them active. Model: The pre serve has been tu rn e d into a p o p u la r to u ris t a ttra c tio n . - The people have turned the preserve into a popular tourist attraction.

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

5. Look a t the p ictu re s, name them and say which things can o r cannot be found in the area o f the seven natural wonders o f Ukraine. Use exercise 2 to help you. Model:

It’s a w e e p in g w illow . It can be fo u n d in A scania Nova.

6. Use the te xt in exercise 2 to answ er the follow ing questions. Write the answers in your copy book. 1. W hich reg ion o f U kraine is Svityaz lake lo ca te d ? W h a t do you know a b o u t th e lake? 2. W h a t kind o f te rrito re is A scania Nova situ a te d ? W hat sp e cie s o f p la n ts and a nim als can be seen th e re ? 3. W h a t are th e a ttra c tio n s o f D nistro vsky C anyon? 4. W h a t re m in d s o f th e e xiste n ce o f th e M io ce n e Sea ree fs in H ra n itn o -S te p o ve Pobuzhzhya? 5. W h a t do you kn ow a b o u t th e M a rb le Cave? 6. W h a t can be seen in th e m id d le o f S ynevir lake? W here is th e lake lo ca te d ?

UNIT VII

UKRAINE

LESSON 81. PROMINENT UKRAINIANS 1. Read o r listen to the dialogue and a c t it o u t with your p a rtn e r. Jane: Victor: Jane: Victor: Jane: Victor:

Victor, do you know who invented the PayPal and designed the platform fo r Facebook? No, I d o n ’t. Why are you asking me? I am not an IT expert. Shame on you! Max Levchin did it. He is a Ukrainian. You should know the prom inent people o f your m otherland. T h a t’s great! I d id n ’t know that. Sylvester Stallone is a Ukrainian by origin too. The same can be said about David C opperfield. Wow! You have inspired me to learn m ore about fam ous Ukrainians.

2. Outstanding Ukrainians in sports. Read the te xt and choose the words th a t b e st com plete the sentence. A. Andriy Shevchenko is a Ukrainian fo o tb a lle r who 1___ fo r the Ukraine national team as a forw ard. He is the th ird -h ig h e st goalscorer in Cham pions League history and the third to p goalscorer in all European com petitions (67 goals). His m ost prestigious awards w ere the Golden Ball in 2004 and the UEFA C ham pions League in 2003 with Milan. B. Liliya Podkopayeva is the 1996 O lym pic all-around cham pion. She 2__ w idely known as one o f the best gym nasts in history. She is the proud ow ner o f 45 gold, 21 silver and 14 bronze m edals. C. Serhiy Bubka is six times w orld cham pion, European cham pion (1986) and O lym pic cham pion (1988). He 3___ the w orld record fo r m en's pole vaulting 35 tim es (17 o u td o or and 18 indoor records). He was the first to clear 6.0 m etres and the firs t and only to clear 6.10 m etres. He 4 __ the cu rre n t o u td o or w orld record o f 6.14 m etres, set in 1994 in Italy and the cu rren t indoor w orld record of 6.15 m eters, set in 1993 in Ukraine. D. Yana Klochkova is a Ukrainian swim m er, who 5___five O lym pic m edals. 4 gold m edals 6__ in the 200 m eter individual event and the 400 m eter individual event at the 2000 and 2004 Sum m er O lym pics. Her silver m edal cam e in the 800 m eter freestyle at the 2000 Sum m er Olym pics.

UKRAINE

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

A A A A A A

has been played have been bro ke is h old in g has been w on are co m in g

B B B B B B

w ill play w as been is bro ken holds w on have co m e

UNIT VII

C C C C C C

has played D plays is D w ill be has been b ro ke n D b re aks has held D held has w on D had w on have been co m e D cam e

3. Write a ll the synonyms you know fo r the w ord «famous». Then make up a sentence with each synonym. 4. Read a p e rs o n ’s fa c t sheet and te ll a sto ry about h im / her. There is a m odel to help you. Model: R ob e rta B o n d a r w as born on D e ce m b e r 4, 1945 in S a u lt Ste. M arie, w hich is in O ntario, C anada. She c o m e s fro m a fa m ily o f e th n ic U k ra in ia n s....... - B orn: 4 - B orn: 15 Ju ly D e ce m b e r 1975, Kyiv, U kraine; 1945, S ault - c o m p u te r Ste. M arie, s c ie n tis t and O ntario, e n tre p re n e u r’ C anada, in fa m ily o f - c o -fo u n d e r (w ith P eter e th n ic Thiel) o f PayPal; U krainians; - C a n a d a ’s - 1991: m oved firs t fe m a le to th e U nited Max Rafael S tate s w ith his a s tro n a u t and Roberta Levchin fa m ily, se ttle d Bondar th e firs t in C hicago, n e u ro lo g is t in Illinois; sp ace; - d e ve lo p e d a p o p u la r p a ym e n t - has rece ived m any h o n ou rs p ro d u c t know n as PayPal; (the O rd e r o f C anada, th e O rd e r o f O ntario, th e NASA - 2004: fo u n d e d Slide, a p ersonal S pace M edal, over 22 m e d ia -sh a rin g service fo r social h o n o ra ry d e g re e s, e tc .); n e tw o rkin g sites such as M yS pace and F acebook; - on th e list o f C anadian M e d ica l Hall o f Fam e - 2010: sold S lide to G oogle fo r $ 1 8 2 m illion; - 2010, A u g u st 25: b e ca m e G o o g le ’s n ew e st Vice P re sid e n t o f E ngineering.

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

5. M ini p ro je c t Work in p a irs. Prepare a presentation about w orld famous Ukrainians in the follow ing spheres: a) modern inform ation technologies; b) science and inventions; c) music and a rt; d) film industry. In y o u r p re se n ta tio n , you sh ou ld in clu d e th e fo llo w in g in fo rm a tio n : A p e rs o n ’s nam e, d a te o f b irth , th e p lace o f birth; The U krainian roo ts; C u rre n t p lace o f re sid e n ce ; W h a t a ch ie ve m e n ts have been / w e re g ain ed ;

6. Write the sentences in the Passive Voice. 1. C harles Darw in w ro te ‘T h e Origin of Species”. 2. S o m eo ne p u b lish e d ‘T h e Origin of Species” in 1859. 3. T hey serve very d e lic io u s fo o d a t th a t re sta u ra n t. 4.H as anyone ever h yp n o tize d you? 5. S o m e th in g co n fu se d me in class ye ste rd a y. 6. S o m e th in g e m b a rra sse d m e ye ste rd a y. 7. The g o v e rn m e n t a u th o ritie s have c h a n g e d th e nam e o f th is s tre e t fro m Bay Avenue to M artin Luther King W ay. 8. The film m ake rs film e d m any o f th e Tarzan m ovies in th e rain fo re s t in P uerto Rico. 9. They e sta b lish e d th e Red C ross in 1864. 10. W hen did so m e o n e e stab lish th is sch o o l?

7. S ort o u t the w ord into the given columns. plain, m aple, eagle, hill, s u b tro p ic a l, m ild, p on d, ste p p e , co a stlin e , cra n e , ca nyo n, te m p e ra te belt, cave, p a rtrid g e , c o n tin e n ta l, h ighland, lake, lark, elm , low land, pine, m ou ntain slop e , w e e p in g w illow , rock, w a te rfa ll, river, rainfall, th e B lack Sea, river b a n k / clim atic features

land

w ater basins

plants

anim als

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

LESSON 81. UKRAINIAN SUPERSTITIONS 1. Read o r listen to the dialogue and a c t it o u t with your p a rtn e r. Jane: V icto r: Jane: V icto r: Jane: V icto r: Jane:

V icto r:

V icto r, S top! D o n ’t go! W hy? W h a t’s w ro n g ? Are you OK, Jane? S top lau g hin g a t m e, V icto r. A b la c k c a t has ju s t cro sse d th e s tre e t in fro n t o f you. S o... w hy sh ou ld I stop? It is a bad sign fo r a person to keep g oin g along th e s tre e t a b la c k c a t has ju s t cro sse d . Jane, do you believe in th o se silly s u p e rstitio n s? I do believe! Last ye a r I le ft hom e and fo rg o t m y m o b ile th e re . I had to re tu rn b a ck to ta k e m y m obile. I am su re you have heard o f th e s u p e rs titio n - never re tu rn hom e even if you have fo rg o tte n s o m e th in g th e re . A t sch o o l th a t day I g o t a bad m ark in every su b je ct. W hat co u ld it be? It c o u ld be th e w ay you did y o u r h o m e w o rk - and you did it badly.

2. What superstitions do you know? Try to say them in English. Model: Do n ot ta ke o u t litte r o r w a te r fro m y o u r house a fte r th e su n se t.D o n ot give knives o r scisso rs as p re se n ts. If you w a n t s o m e b o d y to have th e m as a g ift fro m you m ake sure th e se ite m s are “ b o u g h t” fro m you fo r a s y m b o lic p rice .

3. Read the te xt and arrange it in the c o rre c t order. The firs t paragraph has already been chosen fo r you. a. S u p e rs titio n s can be d ivid ed into several g ro u p s. “ D o n ’t do it” s u p e rs titio n s are p a rtic u la rly n u m e ro u s and have ro o ts in a very d is ta n t past. M o st o f th e m have died out, b u t so m e are still p ra c tis e d . Such s u p e rs titio n s are o f th e kind th a t m any p e o p le w o u ld n ot ig n o re th e m . b. T he re are s u p e rs titio n s th a t b e lo n g to th e cu ltu ra l tra d itio n and th e se are e n o rm o u s in th e ir va rie ty. M any person s, even in th e m o st d e ve lo p e d and la rg e ly irre lig io u s so cie tie s, have held, s e rio u s ly o r h a lf-se rio u sly, irra tio n a l b e lie fs c o n c e rn in g m e th o d s o f fig h tin g bad in flu e n ce o r b rin g in g g o o d , fo re te llin g th e fu tu re , and healing o r p re ve n tin g sickn e ss o r a c c id e n ts . A fe w s p e c ific fo lk tra d itio n s , such as a b e lie f in th e evil eye o r in th e p o w e r o f a m u lets, have been fo u n d in m o st p e rio d s o f h isto ry and in m ost

UNIT VII

UKRAINE

p a rts o f th e w o rld . O th e rs m ay be lim ite d to one co u n try, re g io n , o r village, to one fa m ily, o r to one social o r vo ca tio n a l g ro u p . “ D on’t w histle in d o o rs!” is an o rd e r th a t a boy has heard fro m his grandm a. “W hy?” som e boys ask. “ Because if you do, th e re ’ll be no m oney in this hou se!” But it’s n ot an explanation, o f course. It is one o f the m ost ch aracteristic fe atures o f any superstition th a t in m ost cases, th ere seem s to be no rational explanation. M any a tte m p ts have been m ade to discover th e circu m stan ce s th a t gave rise to this or th at superstition, or dig deep into th e roots o f the age -o ld traditions, or study the su bco nscio us o f the people w ho believe in suppestitions, but it seem s not m uch success has been achieved. The w o rd “ s u p e rs titio n ” s u g g e s ts a b e lie f o r p ra c tic e fo r w h ich th e re a p p e a rs to be no rational reason. Every re lig io u s system te n d s to a c c u m u la te s u p e rs titio n s — a C hristian , fo r e xam ple, m ay believe th a t in tim e o f tro u b le he w ill be g u id e d by th e B ible if he o p e n s it at ra n do m and rea ds th e te x t th a t firs t strike s his eye. In fa c t, all re lig io u s b e lie fs and p ra c tic e s m ay seem s u p e rs titio u s to th e p erson w ith o u t re ligio n. P eople m ay d e ve lo p th e ir p ersonal su p e rstitio n s, b u t w e ’ ll deal w ith s u p e rs titio n s th a t have g ained w id e p o p u la rity in U kraine and are still p ra ctise d . T hough no results o f a la rg e -sca le research into th e su p e rstitio n s o f th e U krainians are available, it is p ro b a b ly quite safe to say th a t m any p eople in U kraine to d a y feel u n co m fo rta b le if a b la ck ca t w alks across yo u r path in fro n t o f you. They w ould feel so m e th in g has to be done to fig h t the possible ill e ffe c ts on th em th a t they, fo r no a p p a re n t reason, believe m ay be caused by th a t sm all and harm less anim al ju s t p e a cefully ta king a w alk and m inding its own business — m any w ould look fo r a cro ss o r w ood to to u ch ; som e w ou ld sp it over th e left sh o u ld e r th re e tim es, ch an ge the d ire ctio n o f th e ir w alk o r try to w alk around th e place the b la ck ca t has w alked across, o r w ait fo r so m eone else to cross th e im aginary line along w hich the ca t has w alked — th e person w ho does it w ou ld th u s ta ke th e evil p ow er o f th e b la ck ca t m agic upon him self. M o st o f th o se w ho do such th in g s w ould not be able to explain w hy th e y do it, b ut w ould a d m it th a t the b la ck ca t w alking in fro n t o f th em can bring bad luck.S o m e research su g g e sts th a t in old tim es, it w as w idely believed th a t it w as th e devil h im self th a t w alked around in the shape o f a b la ck cat. To sum up, it is p o ssib le to say th a t th e s tu d y o f s u p e rs titio n s m ay help u n d e rsta n d b e tte r ce rta in a s p e c ts o f a n c ie n t b e lie fs and

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

c o n d itio n s o f life, and can even reveal som e u n e xp e cte d “ shady c o rn e rs ” o f th e hum an m ind. h. S om e s u p e rs titio n s have b e co m e so w id e -s p re a d th a t m any p e o p le th in k th a t th e y keep so m e tra d itio n s ra th e r th a n believe in th e se irra tio n a l s u p e rs titio n s . P ro h ib itio n to w o rk on S unday, fo r exam ple g o e s m uch d e e p e r into th e p ast than se em s at firs t gla n ce. E th n o g ra p h ic m a te ria ls o f th e n in e te e n th c e n tu ry sh ow th a t th e re w as a b e lie f th a t existed in a ve ry d is ta n t p ast —“ w o rkin g on S u n da y m ay tu rn you into a w e re w o lf.” 1

4. Write down a ll the superstitions m entioned in the te xt in exercise 3. 5. M atch the pictures with the superstitions.

1. D o n ’t kill a s p id e r in th e house. 2. If a glass b re aks at th e w e d d in g - th e new ly m a rrie d co u p le will soon g e t d ivo rce d . 3. D o n ’t cro ss th e c a t’s w alking in fro n t o f you. 4. If you w a n t to reach w h a t y o u ’ve pla n ne d, kn o c k y o u r fin g e r a g a in st th e w o o d th re e tim e s. 5. D o n ’t do a n yth in g im p o rta n t on F riday 13 - it w ill n o t tu rn o u t w ell.

6. Find the passive stru cture sentences in the te xt in exercise 3 and turn them into the Active Voice. Model: A C hristian , fo r exam ple, m ay believe th a t in tim e o f tro u b le he w ill be g u id e d by th e B ible if he o p e n s it a t ra n do m and reads th e te x t th a t firs t s trike s his eye. - A Christian, for example, may believe that in

time of trouble the Bible will guide him if he opens it at random and reads the text that first strikes his eye.

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

LESSON 82 1. Speak about your visits to d iffe re n t places in Ukraine. Model:

I have been to Lviv tw o tim e s (tw ice ). I have visited Lugansk re g io n several tim e s. I w as in C he rkasy in 2 003. I have never been in Poltava. I am p la n nin g to go th e re next su m m e r.

Rivnr

Chernihiv

•»**«*»

•W |n

Volyn

Sumy 7 h y to m y r •Mv

Kiev Lviv Trmopil

HP Chuxaf

Kharkiv

Luhamk

Cherkaty

Khmel Ivjn o T rjn kivtk

Poltava

***

Vinnytsii «OvwmM K iro vohrad

Dniprojxtrovsk

• WVvy, R»

Krtvtta«

Donetsk

Mykolaiv Z jp o ri/h u

Odessa

■

<■

Crimea .£ + * * * y » w v m ri

•V'Wi*

2. Read the c ity presentations and say whether the sentences are true o r false. C orrect the false sentences. Chernivtsi.

C hernivtsi c e le b ra te s th e d ay o f th e C ity on O c to b e r 8. It is th is d a te th a t w a sfo u n d in th e firs t know n w ritte n m en tio n a b o u t it in 1408. A n o th e r re c e n t ce le b ra tio n in C hernivtsi w as th e 130th a n n ive rsa ry o f th e C he rnivtsi N ational U niversity, w hich is nam ed a fte r Y ury Fedkovych, a

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

prominent poet, playwright, translator, folklorist, and public figure in the Land of Bukovyna in the second half of the nineteenth century. The university was founded in October 1875 and at present it has fifteen departments and is considered to be one of the leading schools in Western Ukraine. Poltava. Poltava has always been known as a hospitable place, with beautiful churches and gardens. The first written mention of Poltava dates to the year 1174; at that time it was named as Ltava. On June 27 1709, a major battle was fought not far from Poltava. The battle was lost and with it Ukrainian independence. Ukraine found itself completely absorbed by the Russian Empire. Like in most other ancient cities of the world, the most interesting part of Poltava is its old section. It is there, on Ivanova Hora, that you find the restored house where the Ukrainian poet Ivan Kotlyarevsky once lived. His long and comic poem Eneyida was the first literary work written in the new Ukrainian literary language. Odesa. Once upon a time, there lived a Spanish adventurer, Don Jose de Ribas, who came to the Russian imperial court closer to the end of the eighteen century. He made an impressive military career. When he was appointed the governor of Odesa, he suggested the Empress Catherine II to build a big port at the Black Sea coast.The Belgian architect Franz de Vollan was invited to design the layout of the city. Don Jose de Ribas became Osyp Deribas to suit the local speech, the first “mayor” of Odesa. Lviv. Once, the king of the Lands of Halych and Volyn named Danylo, went on a tour of his kingdom, accompanied by his son Lev. When they were crossing the Poltva River, the king looked around and exclaimed in admiration, “My son, look at that hill! It would be a shame not to build a castle on it, and a town around it! And then I would name it after you, and give it to you!” This is what one of the popular legends says about the foundation of Lviv, one of the most important cities of Ukraine, and one of the most beautiful too. 241

UNIT VII

UKRAINE

Among the cities of Ukraine Lviv stands out as a place of impressive architectural landmarks of many architectural styles and epochs. In its long history Lviv has seen many wars and invaders — Tartars, Poles, Lithuanians, Turks, Austrians and others tried to establish their rule over Lviv. It was in Lviv that the first Ukrainian newspaper, Gazette de Leopol, was published in 1776. Lviv was a place that inspired the creativeness of Ukrainian and Polish artists, scholars and writers. Ivan Franko, the prominent Ukrainian author of the late nineteenth-early twentieth century; Adam Mickiewisz, one of the best Polish poets of the nineteenth century; Stanislav Lyudkevych, the remarkable composer, Mykhailo Hrushevsky, the historian and first president of the Ukrainian People’s Republic — all of them were either born or lived in Lviv. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Chernivtsi was founded in 1875. Yurij Fedkovych is a famous Ukrainian composer. The battle at Poltava determined the sad future of Ukraine. Don Jose de Ribas was a Belgian architect who designed the construction process of Odesa. 5. Lviv was named after the son of King Danylo. 6. The first cup of coffee was made in Lviv in 1776.

3. Look a t the p ictures and make up sh o rt conversations as in the m odel. YES I'm from Ukraine rJO it’s not t of Russia

Model: A: A lot of people in the world consider Ukraine a part of Russia. B: It’s a common stereotype, but it is wrong. Ukraine isn’t part of Russia. My country is an independent state. YES I'm fro m U kraine w e have another m ore fam ous Shevchenko

NO we don't have snow the whole year

NO Russian is not my lançuaçe

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

4. Answ er the questions. Write the answers in your copy book. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

When was Poltava founded? What architectural landmarks in Poltava can you name? What famous people lived and created in Lviv? How was Odesa’s port built? Who was the first major of Odesa? What year was Chernivtsi National University founded?

5. Use the m ind map to speak about Ukraine.

6. Read the te x t in exercise 2 and com pare the cities. Use additional reference m aterials. Follow the given c rite ria : age; population; location; architecture. Model:

Lviv is older than Chernivtsi. Lviv was founded in 1256, while Chernivtsi was founded in 1408. At the same time, Lviv and Chernivtsi are located in the western part of Ukraine. In my opinion, Odesa is more beautiful than Poltava, because you can see many different styles of architecture in Odesa. There aren’t many architectural landmarks in Poltava.

7. Use exercise 2 as a m odel and w rite a description o f your favourite Ukrainian town o r city. You should include the inform ation about: the h isto ry o f the place; its geographical position; h istorica l and a rch ite ctu ra l sights; famous people; m odern life.

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

REVISION LESSONS LESSON 83 1. M atch the words in column A with the words in column B. A:

European St.Sophia Kyiv-Cave Majdan St. Andrew Cathedral of Dnipro Kyiv Opera

Church Nezaleznosti River House Square Monastery Cathedral St.Volodymyr

2. Answ er the questions. 1. What famous places in Kyiv do you

2. 3. 4. 5.

know? Why are they so famous? Who lived in Kyiv-Cave Monastery? What do you know about these people? What art galleries and museums are worth visiting (варті, щоб їх відвідати) in Kyiv? What famous places in Kyiv do you know that are good for doing shopping? What would you suggest to visit in Kyiv to a person who is interested in theatrical playing?

3. Read the poem and try to learn three stanzas b y heart. ODE TO THE UKRAINE: A PROPHECY From ashes of forgotten centuries Like Phoenix bird, we see the rise again. And Flourishing throughout the future years O glorious and beautiful Ukraine Cruelly held beneath the Russian heel. Deprived of human rights and liberty. Within our very hears we strongly feel The transformation of your destiny. 244

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

Although the man-made evil holds its sway, We all must strive to reach our final goal. No human power on this Earth can stay The inner will of the national soul. Go read the annals of world’s history, Where much less cruel powers in the past Fell from the blows of righteous victory. The end to Moscow’s rule must come to last. Faith of our Fathers shall, at last, prevail. Beyond man’s reach: behind the dim unknown, Almighty God abides, Who cannot fail In keeping watch above His very own. We, Too, must have strong faith to truth adhere. Work hard, so we may freedom's cause enhance. Help to create ideal atmosphere That would ensure Ukraine’s deliverance. By VOLODIMIR BARABASH 4. M atch the names o f outstanding Ukrainians (o r people with Ukrainian roots) with the description o f th e ir achievem ents. Use any reference m aterial i f necessary. born in a family of immigrants from Kiev; an actor with a career in film, television, and theatre since 1960. Some of his most noted films are Midnight Cowboy, Lenny, All the President's Men, Kramer vs. Kramer, Tootsie, Rain Man, and Wag the Dog.

an actor, filmmaker, screenwriter, film director and occasional painter. Two of the notable characters he has portrayed include boxer Rocky Balboa and soldier John Rambo. Olga Kurylenko

UNIT VII

Mila Kunis

UKRAINE

a worldwide famous film director, screenwriter, film producer and video game designer. His grandfather of his mother’s side came from Odessa, on father’s side from a small Ukrainian village. His favorite dish - Ukrainian borsch. a Ukrainian-born actress, supermodel, fashion designer, singer and public figure, who was on the cover of more than a hundred magazines, and starred in such movies as Return to the Blue Lagoon (1991), The Fifth Element (1997), Joan of Arc (1999), Ultraviolet (2006), and the Resident Evil (2002).

Dustin Hoffman

Steven Spielberg

her family moved from Ukraine to LA when she was 7. In 2010, she won the Marcello Mastroianni Award for Best Young Actor or Actress at the 67th Venice International Film Festival for her performance as Lily in Black Swan.

following a successful career in France, this actress has crossed over into American movie roles in Hitman (2007). She played the Bond girl, Camille, in Quantum of Solace (2008) a sequel to 2006's Casino Royale.

5. Write the sentences in the Passive Voice. 1. Teachers don’t teach calculus in elementary school. 2. No one delivers the mail on holidays. 3. Will someone deliver the mail tomorrow? 4. The plant workers made my tape recorder in Japan. 5. Where did they make your tape recorder? 6. My grandfather has made that table. 7. No one has ever hypnotized me. 8. Have my directions confused you?

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

LESSON 84 1. L e t’s revise the vocabulary o f this u n it. Say the words which mean the follow ing: a. A gas which is the result of breathing out by people or animals; b. A necessary chemical component found in the air; c. A building with glass walls and roof used for growing plants; d. A large area of flat land without trees; e. Something that shows where an area ends and another area begins; f. The amount of rain that falls on a particular area; g. An area where plants, animals, minerals are protected; h. Ground that goes upward or downward; i. A large animal that has got a long neck and one or two humps on its back and that is used for desert travel; 2. List the adjectives which can be used to describe Ukrainians as a nation. Then use the lis t to describe and com pare the people o f Ukraine with o th e r nations based on the common stereotypes and your personal experience. There is a m odel to help you. Model: In my opinion, Ukrainians are very hospitable and friendly. We always meet the strangers and guests with bread and salt. I know that people of my country are hard-working. They are also kind and have got a sense of humour. Ukrainians are quite educated and clever, that’s why so many important discoveries have been made by people of Ukrainian origin. Ukrainians are more hard-working than Italians, for example. People in Italy don’t work for some hours in the afternoon. They have got a siesta and sleep. Ukrainians, on the contrary, have a very short break for lunch.

UNIT VII

UKRAINE

3. Take turns to ask and answ er the questions. 1. What are the general characteristic features of the climate in Ukraine? Is it the same in all parts of our country? 2. What influences the climate in general? What influences the climate in Ukraine? 3. Does the climate influence the life of people in Ukraine? In what ways? Have there been noticed any changes in the climate in Ukraine for the recent years? 4. Describe typical winter weather in different parts of Ukraine. 5. Describe typical summer weather in different parts of Ukraine. 6. What do you know about the greenhouse effect? 7. What can you say about the geographical position of Ukraine? 4. Fill in the blanks with the words from the box. 1. There were 1_____ levels of chemicals in the lake. 2. Her ideas have gradually gained 2_____ in the class. 3. Emily Dickinson had a major 3____ on his poetry. 4. Art allows us to express things that we would not be able to express 4___ 5. We have eaten 5________ dishes, ranging from very sweet to rather sour. 6. The planets have different 6_____ . 7. No living creature can live without 7_____ .

otherwise, various, moderate, atmosphere, influence (2 times), oxygen

■ ■ ■

5. Turn the follow ing sentences from the Passive into the Active Voice. The firs t sentence has already been done fo r you. 1. The pages have been cut from this book. That’s why I can’t learn this lesson. - Someone has cut the pages from this book. That's why I can't learn this lesson. 2. This newspaper hasn’t been read yet. 3. The stones were thrown by the student who was afterwards seen in the central street of the town. 4. This activity has been used by many teachers worldwide. 5. The football player was pushed to the ground by his opponent. 6. The fire was finally got under control by the firefighters.

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

7. The plan hasn’t been well thought by the leader at all.6. Mini project. Find information about a beautiful natural wonder of Ukraine and get ready with a presentation about this place. In your presentation, you should: - say the name of the place and its location; - give some historical background of the place (if possible); - prove its beauty and describe the place; - mention the most remarkable features that would inspire people to visit this place. - create a PowerPoint presentation with images of the place. Model:

My presentation today will be about Sofiyivka, a beautiful park which is located near the town of Uman, Cherkasy region. It was designed by a loving husband, Polish king Philip Potocki, as a gift for his wife, Sofia. She was a lady of exceptional beauty. The park has got many alleys, ponds and lakes with many rare species of trees, bushes and flowers. There are a lot of relaxation areas with benches, fountains and beautiful sculptures. Sofiyivka is a masterpiece of horticulture (мистецтво садівництва).

249

UNIT VII

UKRAINE

LESSON 85 1. Name a ll the prom inent Ukrainians (or people with Ukrainian roots) you know. M ention th e ir achievem ents. Include the following categories: a) people of the past and present day celebrities; b) famous Ukrainians of the Arts and Literature; c) outstanding Ukrainian inventors and scientists; d) cinema industry celebrities with Ukrainian roots. 2. Read the te xt and choose the word the b e st com pletes the sentence. Lesya Ukrayinka (Lesya Petrivna Kosach) 1__ on February 13, 1871 in the town of NovhorodVolynsky in the Land of Volyn, Ukraine. Her parents did not 2__ their children to school, but educated them 3__ . Lesya’s mother was afraid that attending school which was russified, would be bad for her children culturally. She wanted 4__ them in Ukrainian society, appreciating Ukrainian culture and their Ukrainian roots. Lesya learnt to read when she was four. Among the authors whose books she 5___ reading in her later childhood were Pavlo Chubynsky (Ukrainian writer who retold folk stories), Taras Shevchenko (his Kobzar collection of poems in particular), Jules Verne, Daniel Defoe. Among the friends of Lesya’s family were remarkable cultural figures — the prominent historian Mykhailo Drahomanov (Lesya’s uncle); the writer Mykhailo Starytsky, and the composer Mykola Lysenko. It was Lysenko who saw Lesya’s musical talent. Visits to fairs, attending religious feasts and weddings were a great joy to Lesya. In the winter of 1881, on Vodokhreshcha she 6__ to the river to watch this colourful celebration. But she got her feet wet soon after she 7__ there. Instead of going home, she stayed until the end of the ceremony. It was rather cold that day. The consequences were tragic — she developed the tuberculosis of bones which until her death thirty two years 8__ was a source of constant pain and ill health. She went through several operations but they helped only for a short time. One of her hands was painful with tuberculosis and her dream to become a musician 9__ . Because of her illness Lesya couldn’t get a formal education but thanks to her mother and her uncle, Mykhailo

UKRAINE

UNIT VII

Drahomanov, she became a widely 10__ person, could read and speak many languages. Lesya spent her last ten years mostly abroad — the Caucasus, the Crimea, Italy and Egypt, with only occasional visits to Ukraine, but the state of her health remained bad. But she kept writing. The choice of the penname was not accidental. Lesya wanted to emphasize her Ukrainian roots. Her poetry, no matter where she was, was always rich in soft and kind melodies of her native land. In 1907 she married Klyment Kvitka, a music critic and folklorist whom she 11__ for a long time. They settled first in the Crimea, then moved to Georgia. Finally, in 1912, Lesya wrote“Lisova pisnya” (The Forest Song). She wrote it in eleven days. It was her best work, a reflection of her soul and heart. The image of Mavka 12__ by Lesya on the basis of her own life: “Yes, I’m alive, I’ll live forever, What’s in my heart can never die!” But Lesya died on August 1, 1913 at a health resort in Surami, Georgia. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

A born A sent A at home A raise A enjoys A has gone A had come A late A is ruined A educating A knew A was created

B has been born B sended B in the house B rise B enjoyed B was going B came B lated B has been ruined B education B known B created

C was born C have sent C from home C risen C has anjoyed C gone C was coming C later C was ruined C educated C has known C is created

D bore D send D in home D be raised D was enjoyed D went D has come D lates D were ruined D educatedly D had known D has been created

3. Read the te xt in exercise 2 again and find the words which mean the follow ing: 1. the production of an image by or as if by a mirror 2. something that is an origin or source 3. a name used by a writer instead of the writer’s real name

UNIT VII

UKRAINE

4. a serious disease that mostly affects the lungs and in which there is fever, cough, and difficulty in breathing 5. something that happens as a result of a particular action or set of conditions 6. a reproduction or imitation of the form of a person or thing 4. Read the fragm ent o f the poem b y Volodymyr Sosiura “ Love Ukraine ” and learn it b y heart. Love Ukraine Love Ukraine, like sun that you love Like wind, like grass, and like water, Whenever you’re happy, in moments of gladness, At times of trouble, do love. Love Ukraine when asleep or awake The glamorous your Ukraine The beauty of it, always alive and new And language of hers full of charm. Amongst the brother-made nations, like garden in dew She shines through the ages again Love Ukraine with all of your heart And all of the deeds that you make...” 5. Write the sentences in the Passive Voice. 1.No one will collect the garbage tomorrow. 2. People spell "writing" with one "t". 3. People don’t spell "writing" with two "t’s". 4. People spell "written" with two " t’s". 5. The construction workers will build a new hospital next year. 6. When did they build the Suez Canal? 7. Olga wrote that composition. 8. The University of Minnesota has accepted my brother. 6. Imagine your pen frie n d from G reat Britain has decided to visit Ukraine. In his le tte r he / she asks you to arrange a four-day to u r around your country. Write a le tte r to your pen frie n d suggesting the ideas fo r the tour. Give your reasons why he / she should visit the places you suggest. Use lesson 14 to help you rem em ber the stru cture o f a le tte r.

LESSON 86 (OPTIONAL)

UNIT V III

LESSON 87. WORKING IN THE MEDIA 1. Guess what life is like fo r a jo u rn a lis t interview ing celebrities: do jo u rn alists enjoy this? Do they earn a lo t o f m oney? How busy are they? Are they pop u la r themselves? Read o r listen to the conversation to confirm yo ur guesses. The interviewer: Jake, how many famous people have you interviewed in your career? Jake Houston, celebrity journalist: Hundreds of pop stars and film stars. The interviewer: So, who have you met? Jake Houston: From the world of music, I’ve met Kylie Minogue, Robbie Williams, the boys from “Oasis” , and a lot more. The film stars I’ve done interviews with include Tom Hanks, Patrick Swayze, Goldie Hawn, Ben Stiller, Sandra Bullock. I can’t remember all the names right now. The interviewer: I see. Do you just phone the celebrities and ask to interview them? Jake Houston: Not exactly. It’s not that easy. At the beginning of my career I had to pay to people who had contacts with celebrities to ask them for interviews. But now I run the company called Celebritext. I have been working in the media for quite a lot of years. We specialize in doing celebrity interviews, so I’ve got lots of contacts in the industry. When a new movie or CD comes out, the film or record company contacts me and says that the star is happy to give some interviews. I don’t always do the interviews myself. The other journalists at my company do that as well. When the interview has been done, I then sell it to newspapers or magazines all round the world. The interviewer: And what are the stars like when you meet them? Jake Houston:

It depends. Mostly they are really friendly. Robbie Williams was very funny. I have had some arguments as well, but not strong ones. For example, Tom Hanks and I had an argument about space exploration when I interviewed him for the movie “Apollo 13“ . The interviewer: Who would you like to interview in the future? Jake Houston: I haven’t met Madonna yet. I’d love to interview her, but it’s quite difficult to get an interview with her. The interviewer: Have you enjoyed this interview today? Jake Houston: Very much! Actually, it’s the first time I’ve been interviewed. I usually ask the questions, but I do not answer them! 2. Say whether the sentences are true o r false. Correct the false ones. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Jake has interviewed a lot of celebrities. He enjoyed his interview with Tom Hanks. He does the interview only for Celebritext. Other people often interview Jake. At the beginning of Jake’s professional activity he could easily ask any celebrity for an interview.

3. Read the interview in exercise 1 and choose the c o rre c t answer. 1.

Why does Jake know a lot of people in the media? a. Because he specializes in doing celebrity interviews b. Because he runs his own company in London c. Because he’s been working in the media for a long time d. Because film and record companies contact him When does a film or record company contact Jake? a. When the celebrities are in good mood b. When the company has produced a new product c. When the company needs to find a new journalist d. When Jake has done an interview with a star Jake does not always__ a. Win the arguments he has with the stars b. Find it easy to think good questions c. Respect the celebrities he interviews

d. Agree with what the stars say in interviews Jake sometimes asks other people t o __ . a. Do the interviews for him b. Sell the interviews for him c. Contact the film or record company for him d. Contact the celebrity for him

Focus on Grammar! Adverbs of degree: Quite / Rather / Almost Quite is often used to show the degree of certain quality. Both quite and rather are used to modify adjectives and adverbs to mean "more than a little, but not very": He's quite well-known. She greeted me quite cheerfully. You seem ra th e r unhappy today. It was a ra th e r sad story. Rather has less force than quite. Rather means "to a degree." Quite, in contrast, means "to a significant degree". When someone is rather sad, the degree of sadness is less than if the person is quite sad. Is he well-known? Oh yes, quite! I quite agree with you! We can use rather with comparatives. Quite is never used with them. Their new house is rather smaller than their old one. (NOT: Their house is gBtte^mafTer than the old one.) Almost means ‘nearly’, ‘not quite’ ‘not completely’. It is an adverb of degree. When almost modifies a verb, it normally goes before it. I have alm ost finished the job. If the verb is a form of be, almost goes after it. There were alm ost sixty people there. Almost can modify an adjective, and then almost goes before it. I am alm ost ready to leave. He is alm ost certain to win. Almost can be used with every, all, nothing and no one. He calls him mom alm ost every day. She has broken alm ost a ll of her toys. A lm ost no one wished him on his birthday. There was alm ost nothing to do. Almost can be used with expressions of time and quantity. I spent alm ost two months (OR nearly two months) in Australia. That used laptop costs alm ost 3000 hrn. (= ... nearly 3000 hrn.)

Alm ost can be used with always and never. It cannot be used with som etim es, occasionally or often. He is alm ost always late for work. She is alm ost never on time for school. 4. Complete the sentences with almost, quite, o r rather. 1. __ all people in the world want to lead a better life. 2. The film w as____ good but the book was much better. 3. “What was the examination like?” “___ difficult, I am afraid.” 4. I w as___pleased with the hotel but she w a s___ disappointed. 5 . ___ all junior high students in Japan and Korea have to study hard to pass high school examinations. 6. She lives__ near me, so we can see each o the r___ often. 7. John is a hard working student but he i s ___ slow. 8. I have been told a strange ghost story. It i s ___ incredible. 9. I ___ had a bad accident yesterday. I have to drive more carefully. 10. The cat __ scratched my leg, but I managed to take it away. 11. We had __ arrived in the city when it started to snow. 12. She has been t o ____ all countries in Asia. 5. Choose the c o rre c t word. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

It’s quite/rather colder today than it was yesterday. Ann didn’t like the book but I thought it was quite/rather good. He quite/rather agrees with you. She is clever but rather/quite lazy. What he said was quite/rather true. I don’t rather/quite understand what he means. It’s quite/rather an interesting novel. I didn’t expect to see them in my town. It was quite/rather a surprise.

6. Complete the sentences conversation in exercise 1.

with

some

words

from

the

1. A ____ is a person who writes for newspapers and magazines. 2. Famous people, particularly pop stars, actors and TV presenters, are sometimes known a s _____ . 3. Newspapers, magazines, TV, radio and films are all examples of t h e ____ . 4. When a film ___ _ out, you can go and see it at the cinema. 5. There’s an interesting ___ with Gwyneth Paltrow in this week’s “Gossip”. 7. Make up your own sentences with almost, quite, rather (three sentences fo r each adverb).

LESSON 88 1. Work with your p a rtn e r and discuss what qualities a jo u rn a list needs. 2. Read o r listen to the article and check your ideas. L ist the skills necessary fo r effective professional a ctivity o f a jo u rn a list as m entioned in the text. If you want to work in the media or as a journalist, it’s a good idea to learn as many relevant skills as possible. Any good job involves using lots of different skills, and that’s what your goal is! For example, learning about digital technology is a good start. You never know when you may have the opportunity to take that important photograph! Knowing a foreign language is quite important too. The ability to communicate in a foreign language “opens a lot of doors” . Getting some work experience during the holidays on the local newspaper is also a good idea. That’s the best way of making important contacts. Of course, if you consider a career of a journalist, you will need to be good at writing. You can find a website that encourages new writers to send in their work or start your blog to try yourself in writing. Finally, if you really want to follow a career in the media, it’s important to do your best to succeed, to be hard-working and never give up! 3. M atch the skills on your lis t (exercise 2) with the pictures.

257

4. Read the introduction and the conclusion of the article in exercise 2 again. What does each of them do? Introduction : a. b.

Gives th e re a d e r an idea o f w h a t th e re st o f th e a rtic le is g o in g to be a b o u t S ta rts im m e d ia te ly w ith th e firs t p o in t th e w rite r w a n ts to m en tion

Conclusion: a. b.

Gives fu rth e r d e ta ile d in fo rm a tio n M akes a gen era l s ta te m e n t a b o u t th e to p ic

5. Use the article in exercise 2 and write an introduction and a conclusion for an article on the topic: “How to become a TV news reporter”. 6. Use the plan of the article on the topic suggested in exercise 5 and the expressions from the box and write the whole article. In tro d u c tio n : P aragraph 1: P aragraph 2: P aragraph 3: C on clusio n:

a b o u t w o rkin g in th e new s how to - s ta rt in fo rm a tio n a b o u t th e jo b U seful e xp e rie n ce e nth u sia sm and hard w o rk fu tu re su cce ss

Personal advice expressions:

Ideas for the main body of the article

It’s no g o o d .... You m ay be able to .... It’s all a b o u t .... The b e st th in g to do is .... M ake sure you .... You m ig h t need to ...

Do so m e th in g u s e fu l/ sp are tim e Train as ju n io r re p o rte r V isit local n e w sp a p e r A s k / p o sitio n s available S how e nth u sia sm Do y o u r b e s t/ v o lu n te e r fo r ta sks

LESSON 89 1. Read or listen to the conversation with a journalist and say what she is talking about: a) types of journalists; b) types of stories; c) types of newspapers. Act out the conversation with your partner. In terview er: A lison, I su p p o se th e q u e stio n m o st p e o p le ask is a b o u t th e s to rie s jo u rn a lis ts w rite . W hat m akes a g o o d sto ry? A lison, a jo u rn a lis t: All g o o d s to rie s need ce rta in co m p o n e n ts , ce rta in fa c to rs th a t m ake th e m in te re stin g fo r th e reader. And th e re are tw o m ain typ e s. Firstly, if s o m e th in g s tra n g e has h ap p e n e d th a t re a d e rs can rela te to. The s to rie s o f stra n g e o r fu n n y situ a tio n s, in w h ich o rd in a ry p e o p le can fin d th e m se lve s, o r th e s to rie s w e can all u n d e rsta n d . Interview er: And th e o th e r type? A lison: th e o th e r typ e c o n c e rn s c e le b ritie s : film stars, th e royal fam ily, p o liticia n s, s p o rts p e o p le . I th in k p e o p le e njo y rea din g a b o u t c e le b ritie s w ho have don e s o m e th in g w ro n g , b e ca u se it show s th e ir hum an side: even if you are rich and fa m o u s, you can still m ake m istakes.

2. Read the text about newspapers in the UK. Find some of the words in bold in the pictures. Journalists

w rite th e sto rie s, but th e editor c o n tro ls th e c o n te n ts o f th e new sp ap er. H e / She d e cid e s w h ich sto rie s sh ou ld go on the front page. E ditors also w rite th e headlines fo r th e

main stories. The Sunday papers have m ore sections th an th e daily papers, fo r e xam ple, th e y have a sports section w ith re p o rts o f d iffe re n t s p o rtin g events, a financial section w ith articles a b o u t m o n e y and a review section. This o fte n has interviews w ith celebrities like film sta rs and sing e rs. N e w sp ap e rs are ch ea p in th e UK and th e y m ake lots o f m o n e y by in clu d in g advertisem ents. Online news is one o f th e fa s te s t g ro w in g areas o f th e m edia in B ritain.

3. Sort out the words and phrases in bold type in exercise 2 in the correct column. People journalists , ...

Things you find in a newspaper main stories, ...

Other the Sunday papers, ...

4. Complete the sentences with quite or rather. Use focus on Grammar (lesson 87) to help you/ 1. ‘ How w as th e m o vie ? ’ ‘__ g o o d . N o t th e b e s t one I have seen th is y e a r’ . 2. She d id n ’t r u n ___fa s t e n o ug h fo r a re co rd . 3. I sp e a k French ___w ell - eno ug h fo r e veryda y p u rp o se s. 4. In o u r te a m , we play____ w ell. 5. He m anaged to do it! It w a s ___in cre d ib le ! 6. M y fa th e r’s new jo b is w e ll-p a id , b u t ___noisy w ith all th o s e m ach ine s. 7. I fo u n d th e w a te r co ol th is a fte r noon at th e sw im m in g pool. 8. It w as ____ expensive to go to S ydney, b u t a g o o d idea! 9. I ___u n d e rsta n d you w h y you had to leave th e c o n c e rt. 10. This e xe rcise w as ____ easy, w a s n ’t it?

5. Take turns to ask and answer the questions. 1. Is the system o f new spapers in Ukraine sim ilar to th a t o f G reat Britain? 2. Do you read a daily new spaper? W hich one? W hat is yo u r favourite section? 3. Do you read a Sunday new spaper? W hich one? W hat are yo u r favourite sections? 4. W ould you like to be a journalist or an editor? W hy or w hy not? 5. Do you believe everything you read in the new spapers? W h y/ W hy not? 6. Are som e o f the new spapers m ore believable than others? W hich ones?

6. Read the s to ry and com plete it with the c o rre c t tense form o f the verbs in brackets. I believe th a t m agazines are n ot useful fo r m e so I s to p p e d reading th e m a long tim e ago. M y h isto ry te a c h e r 1____ (advise) m e to s ta rt rea din g new sp ap ers, w hich can help m e 2___ (u n d e rsta n d ) th e w o rld b e tte r. He 3____(s u g g e s t) to try “The G u a rd ia n ” and 4 ____ (o ffe r) me his co py. I 5___(love) rea din g th e s p o rts p ages b u t I 6____(enjoy) th e p o litic a l and e c o n o m ic new s yet.A nyw ay, I 7____ (p ro m is e ) to read e veryth in g . N ow I 8 _ _ (w ant) to buy so m e m agazines, like “ N e w sw e e k” o r “T im e ” , and see if I 9 ___(enjoy) re a d in g th e m as w ell.

LESSON 90 7. Listen to the second part of the conversation with Alison, a journalist and put the topics she discusses in the order they appear in the conversation. Pay attention to the words in bold. a. b. c. d.

W ritin g a b o u t p e o p le ’s private lives. C e le b ritie s w ho need p u b licity. N e w sp a p e rs w h ich w rite o n ly a b o u t c e le b ritie s. Fam ous p e o p le w ho do so m e th in g w ro n g .

A lison: You know , p e o p le like rea din g a b o u t scandals in a p o litic ia n ’s a ctivity, a c to rs and th e ir bad behaviour and th e s tu ff like th at. In terview er: T here has been a lo t o f c ritic is m o f jo u rn a lis ts fo r w ritin g to o m uch a b o u t p e o p le ’s private life. W h a t’s y o u r opin io n ? Is it rig h t to break into s o m e o n e ’s private life fo r a sto ry? A lison: In m y o p in io n , it d e p e n d s on w ho it is and w h a t is re p o rte d . Is it rig h t to fo llo w n orm al p e o p le on h o lida y and ta ke p h o to s o f th e m and th e ir fa m ily? No, I d o n ’t th in k so. B ut if th e se p e o p le are fa m o u s o r th e y are sp e n d in g public m oney, p o liticia n s, fo r exam ple, w e sh ou ld d e fin ite ly c h e c k w ha t th e y are d o in g . In terview er: So it d e p e n d s on each individual case? A lison: I th in k so, yes. Interview er: B ut w h a t do you th in k o f th o se n e w sp a p e rs w hich fo llo w c e le b ritie s tw e n ty -fo u r hou rs a day and ta ke p ic tu re s o f th e m ? A lison: W ell, th e re are d iffe re n t typ e s o f n ew spapers. S om e are fu ll o f g o ssip and c e le b rity news. T hey d o n ’t co n ta in se rio u s news. T hey sell b e ca u se th e p u b lic w a n ts to see fa m o u s p e o p le in th e ir private m om en ts. In terview er: D o e sn ’t th a t seem w ro n g to you? A lison: I am n ot su re a b o u t th a t. I d o n ’t th in k so. If you b e co m e a film s ta r o r a TV c e le b rity you kn ow w h a t’s g o in g to happen to y o u r life. M any c e le b ritie s need th a t publicity to keep th e m in the public eye. C ele brities need p h o to g ra p h e rs and p h o to g ra p h e rs need celebrities.

2. Match the words or phrases with their definitions. p u b lic ity in th e p u b lic eye sca nd al p u b lic p rivate life

rela tin g to, o r a ffe c tin g all th e p e o p le o r th e w ho le area o f a nation o r sta te o n e ’s p ersonal re la tio n sh ip s and a ctivitie s d is tin c t fro m his o r her p u b lic o r p ro fe ssio n a l life th e m a n n e r o f c o n d u c tin g o n e se lf to e n te r so m e th in g w ith o u t p e rm issio n , usually using fo rc e a tte n tio n th a t is given to so m e o n e o r so m e th in g by new sp ap ers, m agazines, te le visio n new s p ro g ra m s

b eh avio ur

know n and ta lke d a b o u t by m any p e o p le

b re a k into

a ta lk a b o u t th e sh o ckin g o r im m o ra l th in g s th a t p e o p le have don e

4. Read the headlines and say what features differ them from regular sentences. Model:

I can see th a t th e n ouns in th e hea dlin es are usually used w ith o u t a rticle s.

Skirts for men come into fashion. Doctors discover cure for cancer. Brad Pitts star in world’s most expensive film. Talking mouse created by scientists. Healthy chocolate developed by food scientists. Computer virus likely to crash all computers worldwide. Ancient city in Asia discovered by archeologists.

4. Work with your partner. Choose four stories from the headlines in exercise 4 to go on the front page in this week’s Sunday newspaper. Model: A: I believe th e a rtic le a b o u t a new cu re fo r c a n c e r sh ou ld g o on th e fro n t page? B: I am n ot sure a b o u t th a t. It is n ’t in te re stin g fo r all p eo ple . O nly d o c to rs w ou ld like to read it. A: I d o n ’t th in k so. So m any p e o p le in th e w o rld s u ffe r fro m th is d re a d fu l disease. I am sure it m u st be useful fo r e verybo d y. B: All rig h t. You have g o t th e p oint.

5. Fill in the blanks with the words and phrases from exercise 2. The words m ay be used m ore than once. 1. I c o u ld n ’t w a it and ___ th e ir co n ve rsa tio n . 2. W e need to keep e d u c a tio n in th e ___ if we w a n t s u p p o rt fo r im p ro ve m e n ts in o u r sch o o ls. 3. T here w as a m a jo r ____involving th e m a y o r’s tie s w ith th e M ob. 4. I’ m s u rp rise d by her b a d _____to w a rd her frie n d s . 5. She was reserved and shy in _____. 6. Illness ke p t th e a c to r o u t o f ____ fo r e ig h te e n m on th s. 7. An a c c e p ta b le s o c ia l____in one c o u n try m ay be u n a c c e p ta b le in a n o th e r co u n try. 8. She has rece ived a lo t o f ____fo r her la te s t novel. 9. The g o ssip m agazine is fille d w ith ru m o rs a n d ____. 10. He tried to live an ordinary ___ . 11. An a rre s t fo r d ru n k d riving is b a d ____fo r any c e le b rity.

6. Choose the c o rre c t word. 1. L e t’s p u t th is s to ry on th e headline / front page / review section. It’s q u ite a tte n tio n g ra b b in g . 2. Did you read th e interview / report/ celebrity w ith Ani Lorak? 3. T o d a y ’s main story/ front page/ review w as a b o u t a fa m o u s p o liticia n . 4. You can read a b o u t new b o o ks in th e headline / interview / review

section. 5. A lo t o f editors / journalists / reports have interview e d her, b u t w e still know n oth in g a b o u t th is film star.

6. The free press / The Daily papers / Online news on th e In te rn e t is m ore u p -to -d a te than n ew spapers.

LESSON 91 1. Listen to the conversations and act them out with your partner. Have you experienced any of the problems like those mentioned in the conversations? Make up similar dialogues. 1.

A: W h a t’s th e m a tte r? B: The p rin te r’s b ro ken , again. I need to fin ish th is a rtic le fo r th e e d ito r’s ch eck. A: Oh, dear. Shall I call th e e n g in e e r? B: I’d be so g ra te fu l. A: Oh no! M y c o m p u te r keeps fre e zin g ! B: T ry tu rn in g it o ff and on again. A: Thanks. A: W h a t’s w ro n g ? B: The p h o to c o p ie r is n ’t w o rkin g . I th in k th e p a p e r’s run out. A: W hat if th e p a p e r’s s tu c k in it? B: I hope not. A: D o n ’t w o rry. I’ ll deal w ith it.

2. Complete the newspaper headlines using the words below. f saves, inh e rits, ta ke s, e scapes, deliver, survives

t___________________________________________________ _ 1. T ra ffic p o lice o ffic e r in M a d rid h elps a w om an t o ___b ab y in a car. 2. Lost d r iv e r ____a w ro n g tu rn fo r 5 ,0 0 0 m iles. 3. C ircu s m o n k e y ___and d e s tro y s a re sta u ra n t. 4. T op c h e f _ _ g ia n t lo b s te r fro m co o kin g pot. 5. S a ilo r ____fo u r m o n th s a t sea. 6. C a t ____$ 3 5 0 ,0 0 0 house and $ 1 0 0 ,0 0 0 fro m ow ner.

3. Would you read any of the stories under the headlines given in exercise 2? Say which stories and why you would like to read them. Model: I w ou ld like to read a s to ry a b o u t a d riv e r w ho had to drive 5 ,0 0 0 beca use o f th e w ro n g tu rn . I d o n ’t believe th is co u ld happen. So I w o u ld like to c h e c k if th e s to ry is tru e o r invented.

4. Read the texts and match them with the headlines from exercise 2. Then match the stories with the pictures. A. A drive r w ho w e n t on a d a y -trip to Calais ended up in G ibraltar a fte r a fiv e -d a y m ystery to u r. M rs B righ t w as going to France to buy pre sen ts fo r her frie n d s. But, driving around Calais in search o f th e su p e rm a rke t, she to o k a w ro n g tu rn and lost her way. W ith o ut a m ap, unable to speak French, she w as to o em barrasse d to ask fo r d ire ctio n s and fo u n d h erself in G ibraltar. B. A g ia n t lo b ste r, saved fro m th e co o kin g p o t by A n to n y Bizarre, a to p c h e f a t one o f th e re s ta u ra n ts in V icto ria , A ustralia, has been re tu rn e d to th e sea. A n to n y said he w as planning to serve th e lo b s te r a t his expensive re s ta u ra n t, b u t d e c id e d he c o u ld n ’t boil such a fin e cre a tu re . Then th e c re a tu re w as taken to th e c o a s t and fre e d .

C. Philip, a g re y and w h ite cat, has b e co m e B rita in ’s m o st fa m o u s pet. The e ig h t-y e a r-o ld c a t g o t a ve ry expensive house plus $ 100, 000 a fte r his o w n e r’s dea th as a h e rita g e . M rs. B a re la ’s n e ig h b o u rs w ill use $ 1 0 0 ,0 0 0 to buy fo o d fo r her lucky Philip. D. A m onkey, w ho e sca p e d fro m a local c irc u s in Lehre, G erm any, cause $ 1 0 ,0 0 0 o f d a m a g e to a pizzeria a fte r th e o w n e r o f th e re s ta u ra n t trie d to fe e d it on bre ad and salad. It d ro p p e d a vase, th en sta rte d th ro w in g p a p e r to w e ls and fin a lly tu rn e d on th e w a te r ta p s flo o d in g th e re sta u ra n t b a th ro o m .

E. “ He w as e atin g a seagull w hen we fo u n d h im ” , said a m e m b e r o f th e S outh A frica n navy te a m th a t re scu e d a V ie tn am ese im m ig ra n t, Pam Hung Kuk fro m th e A tla n tic O cean. Kuk to o k a d a ytrip fro m C ape Tow n in his boat. He g o t lost in a sto rm , and th en fo u n d fo u r m o n th s later. “ He w as living on se agulls, a tu rtle and rain w ater. It’s a m ira cle h e ’s still a live ” , said th e rescue s h ip s ’s ca p ta in .

F. M a d rid tra ffic p o lice h elped to d e live r a n o th e r b ab y ye ste rd a y. “ I w as ta k in g a b re a k in a ca fe by th e road w hen a taxi d riv e r s h o u te d fo r h e lp ” , said C arlos V enire. His p a sse n g e r w as having a baby. It w as a boy. The w om a n said she w o u ld call him C arlos as a w ay to say “ th a n k you” .

Gi O O T ) s ta k T SOT VOO'Vfc S T « U -

(-,0T ^ WAV*TOGO

5. Read the texts in exercise 4 again and answer the questions. 1. W here did M rs. B rig h t w a n t to go? W hy d id n ’t she ask fo r d ire c tio n s ? 2. W h a t did Pam H ung Kuk eat fo r fo u r m onths? 3. W hy is Philip th e c a t so fa m o u s? 4. W h a t d a m a g e did th e m o n ke y do to th e pizzeria? 5. W hy d id n ’t th e c h e f c o o k th e lo b ste r? W hat did th e c h e f do w ith Billy? 6. W hy did th e taxi d rive r ask fo r help? How d id th e lady e xpress g ra titu d e to th e p o lice o ffic e r?

6. Think of 3 headlines for the tabloid you work as the editor. Write the headlines and choose the only one to go on the front page of your newspaper.

l& S 8 fiS B B S S m

LESSON 92 1. Read or listen to the text and fill in the gaps with the words from the box. The ____ B ritish n e w sp a p e r w as p u b lish e d in 1621, and had th e title “ C ora nte , o r W eekly N ews fro m Italy, G erm an y, H ungary, Poland, B ohem ia, France and Low C o u n trie s ” . It w as a sing le s h e e t o f p a p e r and w as s o l d ____. O th e r n e w sp a p e rs soon sp ra n g up, b u t th e y w e re s tric tly c o n tro lle d by t h e _____ and jo u rn a lis ts w e re n o t fre e to w rite w h a t th e y liked until th e e ig h te e n th ce n tu ry . In 1702, th e firs t d aily n e w sp a p e r w as lau n ch e d . For th e next 150 years th e g o v e rn m e n ts im p o se d heavy taxes on n ew spapers, w h ich m ade th e m to o ____fo r o rd in a ry p e o p le to buy. P rices began to fall in the 1860s, w hen m o re p e o p le w ere able to read and w ere c u rio u s to fin d o u t w h a t w as h a p p e n in g in th e w o rld . M any new n e w sp a p e rs w ere lau n che d a ro u n d th is tim e and th e era o f d aily p a p e r p o p u la rity began. N ow adays th e re are b a sica lly tw o ty p e s o f _____ n e w sp a p e rs in B ritain: se rio u s “ q u a lity ” p a p e rs th a t c a rry new s and analysis (fo r e xam ple, “The Daily T e le g ra p h ” , “The T im e s ” , “ The G u a rd ia n ” ), and p o p u la r “ ta b lo id ” pap ers th a t have som e new s b u t are la rg e ly d evo te d to g o ssip a n d ____ (fo r exam ple, “The S u n ” , “The Daily M irro r” , “The Daily M a il” ). U n fo rtu n a te ly, th e c irc u la tio n fig u re s fo r n e w sp a p e rs in B ritain are now low, b eca use o f t h e _____in re c e n t years o f new s w e b site s, and m any o f th e m are run by th e n e w sp a p e rs th e m se lve s. As soon as you g e t t h e ___to th e In te rn e t fro m c o m p u te rs o r m o b ile phones, you are in sta n tly u p d a te d w ith b re akin g news. H ow ever, n ew sp a p e rs have survived th e invention o f rad io and te levision , and m o s t e xp e rts agree th a t d e s p ite t h e ____th e y now fa ce fro m th e In te rn et, n e w sp a p e rs will never die o u t as th e y are ch e a p , c o n v e n ie n t and easy to c a rry aro un d . Earliest, c o m p e titio n , expensive, g o ve rn m e n t, w eekly, national, a cce ss, e n te rta in m e n t, e m e rg e n c e s______________________________________________________________________________________ >

2. Read the text again and choose the correct answer. 1. The e a rlie st n e w sp a p e r w as p ub lish e d in 1 6 2 1 /1 7 0 2 . 2. In th e se ve n te e n th c e n tu ry th e g o v e rn m e n t/ jo u rn a lis ts c o n tro lle d th e n ew spapers. 3. For m any ye ars o rd in a ry p e o p le c o u ld n ’t b uy n e w sp a p e rs beca use th e p a p e rs c o s t a lo t o f m o n e y / th e g o v e rn m e n t taxed new sp ap ers. 4. “The Daily M a il” is an exam ple o f a q u a lity n e w s p a p e r/ ta b lo id new sp ap er. 5. Sales o f n e w sp a p e rs in B ritain are fa llin g / rising. 6. The w rite r believes th a t n ew sp ap ers w ill/ w o n ’t survive.

3. Read the text about the paparazzi and say who you agree with more, the celebrity or the photographer. Give your reasons. Model:

In m y o pin io n , th e c e le b rity p e o p le s u ffe r m ore. It’s tru e th a t th e y realize th e d isa d va n ta g e s o f fa m e , b u t th e y are p eople, and th e y also need a n orm al p riva te life. I w o u ld n ’t like to be in th e p u b lic eye fo r tw e n ty -fo u r h ou rs a day. I a g re e w ith th e c e le b rity .

The p u b lic e n jo y rea din g a b o u t sta rs in m agazines - and th e y hope to see new p h o to s o f th e m w ith every a rticle . W ho ta ke s th e se p h o to s? T hey are ca lle d th e paparazzi: p h o to g ra p h e rs w ho sp e n d h o u rs each day fo llo w in g fa m o u s p e o p le and w a itin g fo r th e m o u tsid e clu b s, h ote ls and re sta u ra n ts. The Celebrity : I re fu se to c o o p e ra te w ith th e paparazzi. I never a gree to pose fo r p h o to s, and I try not to go to clu b s and re sta u ra n ts. O ften, I c a n ’t leave th e house w ith o u t m a k e up b eca use I kn ow th a t th e y ’re w aitin g fo r m e in th e s tre e t o u tsid e . Of co u rse , I realize th a t th e fa m e has a p rice , and I d o n ’t e x p e c t to lead a c o m p le te ly norm al life - b u t w e have no p riva cy at all. Can you im a g in e th a t? I do believe it ’s rea lly unfair. The Photographer: M ost fa m o u s p e o p le p re te n d to hate th e paparazzi, b u t a lm o st all o f th e m w a n t to be in th e m agazines - sta rs need p u b licity. Ok, th e y lose a lo t o f p riva cy - b u t th e y still m an ag e to have a b e tte r life th a n m o s t o th e r p eo p le . I can say a lo t o f c e le b ritie s e njo y th e a tte n tio n . It’s th e paparazzi w ho have a bad tim e . S o m e tim e s w e sp e n d all n ig h t fo llo w in g c e le b ritie s and fail to g e t a g o o d p ictu re ! ' s::

268

4. Work in groups of four. Two of you are paparazzi, the other two are celebrities. The task for celebrities : th in k o f reasons w h y c e le b ritie s have th e rig h t to privacy, and how paparazzi and c e le b rity n e w sp a p e rs should be c o n tro lle d . M ake notes. The task for paparazzi: th in k o f reasons w h y it is fin e fo r n ew sp a p e rs and m agazines to pub lish p h o to s o f c e le b ritie s and w rite sto rie s a b o u t th e ir private lives. M ake notes. Then to g e th e r in a g ro u p have a d iscu ssio n and p re s e n t y o u r o pin io n s. You m ay use th e p hrase s fro m th e box.

5. Write a list of Ukrainian newspapers you know. You may include both local and national newspapers. Then sort them out into quality and tabloid newspaper types. Give your reasons. Model: I th in k “ B u /va r” is a ta b lo id new sp ap er, b eca use th e re are m any g o ssip s and sca nd al a rtic le s a b o u t fa m o u s sin g e rs, film sta rs and p o liticia n s th e re .

LESSON 93 1. Read or listen to the dialogue and act it out with your partner. Then make up a similar one. Jo u rn a list: G ood evening, M r T om kins. I’ m fro m The Daily M irro r. Can you share w ith m e w h a t h a p p e n e d to you ye ste rd a y? M r. T om kins: W ell... I w as d riving hom e fro m w o rk y e s te rd a y w h e n ... Jo u rn a list: W hen w as it? I m ean, w hen w e re you d riving hom e? M r. T om kins: Oh, I d o n ’t re m e m b e r exactly. It w as q u ite late, p ro b a b ly a ro u n d e ig h t. I w as d riving q u ite slow w hen su d d e n ly so m e th in g fe ll o u t o f th e sky and h it m y car. Jo u rn a list: W ow! W hat w as it? M r. T om kins: You w o n ’t believe it! T hat w as a huge to rto is e ! Jo u rn a list: U nbelievable! M r. T om kins: I s to p p e d th e c a r and g o t out. The to rto is e w as lying on th e road. I w as a b o u t to call th e p o lice w hen I saw tw o p eo ple run nin g to w a rd s m y car. Jo u rn a list: W ho w e re th o s e p eo ple ? M r. T om kins: I th e n fo u n d o u t th e y w e re th e o w n e rs o f th e to rto is e . Luckily th e to rto is e w as n ot h u rt m uch b eca use I w a s n ’t driving fast, you know . B u t m y ca r looks q u ite d a m a g e d now. The o w n e rs o f th e to rto is e p ro m ise d to help in rep airs. T hey le ft th e b a lc o n y d o o r open and th e to rto is e cra w le d o u t o f th e fla t and fe ll o ff th e b a lco n y rig h t o n to m y car. Jo u rn a list: W hat a sto ry! The p e o p le w ill read a b o u t it in to m o rro w ’s p ap er. T ha n k you so m uch, Mr. T om kins.

2. Here are the top 15 Most Popular News Websites. Match them with their logos. Yahoo! New s G o og le N ews H u ffin g to n Post CNN N ew Y orkT im es Fox N ews NBC News M ail O nline The G uardian W a sh in g ton Post W SJ

_ Los Angeles ?virnrç

□BS

NEWS

£l)c Dasljinqton 'ŸAHoOf JJost

H lo ilö

ne guardian ^NEWS ABC N ew s - BBC N ew s - USA T oday - LA T im es

3. Browse the news websites lis te d in exercise 2 and say what kind o f inform ation you can g e t from each In te rn e t resource. Model: CNN news website publishes the news from around the world. I have found articles about the news from the USA, China, Italy and other countries. The articles range from politics to scientific discoveries. There has also been the news about celebrities (the issue I read had an article about Q. Tarantino). 5. Compare a p rin te d new spaper with a news website. Answ er the follow ing questions. Which newspaper gives more news? Which newspaper is more convenient for you to read? Which newspaper do you believe more? Imagine you have a chance to choose to work in a regular newspaper as a journalist or in a news website. What is your choice? Give your reasons. 6. Use the m ind map to speak about the media.

REVISION LESSONS LESSON 94 1. Read the magazine a rticle about Leonardo DiCaprio and choose the w ord th a t b e st com pletes the sentence. ‘Tm going to be famous", Leonardo DiCaprio told himself when he was a child. Here he talks about how being a world film star has, and hasn't 1 his life. He came from a poor family “I didn’t exactly grow up rich” , he said smiling to 2 _. In fact Leonardo lived in quite a dangerous area 3 _ Hollywood. “All my friends at school had much more money than I did” . He doesn't think of himself as a pin-up (a poster showing a famous or attractive person). “There are always going to be new faces - they come and go like everything else. Two of my movies, “Romeo and Juliet” and “Titanic” have 4 __ love stories so people think of me as a pin-up. But I’ve never thought of 5__ as one” . Has he ever been in love? “I’ve been 6__ when you were going to ask me that” . And the answer? “You’ll just have to work that out for 7___ ”. He knows about the problems of being famous “I still live in the same place I’ve always lived and know the same people I’ve always 8__ . But I can’t do all the things I could do when I was younger” . He wants a rest “I’ve been filming non-stop 9__ a long time now and I want to have a rest. I’ve missed a lot of things since I’ve been working in movies. I’ve got lots of interests. So I’m going to take some time off for myself” .

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

A change A myself A of A being AI A wonder A you A knew A by

B changing B himself B by B be B me B wondering B your B knowing B for

C changed C yourself C to C been C myself C wondered C yourself C known C since

2. Put the sentences from the news stories into the Present Simple Active o r Passive. 1. A top politician____ (remove) from office. 2. The boss of HAW S teel___ (give) $ 1,000,000 bonus by company directors. 3. Workers in a car factory in Scotland__ (stop) work for forty-eight hours. 4. Injured football s ta r___ (tell) to rest for three weeks. 5. The body of a famous clim ber__ (find) in Austrian mountains. 6. Philip R oth___ (win) the big prize - again. 7. Tesco supermarkets__ (open) their doors to Sunday night shoppers. 8. A new health report finds that fewer gam es__ (play) at school than ever before. 3. Read the statem ents and express yo ur opinion on them . Use the phrases from the box. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Political news is boring. Newspapers should be free from any censorship. There is too much sport in the media. The Internet has changed the way people find out the news. Journalists shouldn’t write about people’s private lives. I strongly believe that..., I think..., I don’t think so and the reason is that..., In my opinion..., In my view..., To my mind..., I do believe..., I absolutely agree with the idea that...

V________________________________________________________ /

4. Choose the c o rre c t w ord o r phrase. 1. He’s interviewed/ He’s been interviewing/ He interviewed three celebrities so far this week. 2. I am writing/ I’ve written/ I ’ve been writing this short story for three hours now and I still haven’t finished yet. 3. She’s been a journalist from / since/ for 2006. 4. I haven’t read David Beckham’s autobiography ye t/ still/ already. 5. Have you ever gone/ been/ been going to a TV studio? 6. Jake just has sold/ has just sold/ has sold just an interview with Jodie Foster. 7. I still/ y e t/ already don’t understand the difference between present perfect simple and continuous. 5. Complete the sentences using quite + one o f the follow ing: r

a busy day, a good voice, a nice time, a lot of mistakes, a nice day, a long way, a strong wind, a frightening experience S_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

The weather was better than we had expected. It was quite a nice day. Tom often sings. He’s g o t_____ . The bus stop wasn’t very near the hotel. We had to w a lk ____ . I’m tired. I’ve h a d ___ _. Our holiday was OK. We h a d ____ . It’s warm today but there’s . I hope that never happens again. It w a s____ . She speaks English fluently but she m akes_____ .

6. Imagine you are going to interview a famous person. Choose the ce le b rity you would like to interview and g e t ready with possible questions you m ight ask h im / h e r during the interview .

LESSON 95 1. Choose the c o rre c t words to com plete the sentences. 1. “The Big Issue” is a popular magazine, that is / are published every week. 2. Some of the articles is /a r e written by famous people. 3. About 160,000 copies of each issue is / are sold in the UK. 4. The magazine is /a r e sold by homeless people for 1.40 pounds a copy. 5. The people who sell the magazine is/are known as ‘vendors’ (a person offering something for sale, especially a trader in the street). 6. About half of the money from sales is /a re kept by the vendors. 7. Special badges is /a re worn by the vendors. 2. C orrect m istakes in the follow ing sentences. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

The story has told many times. Last week’s article was written our leading journalist. The magazine sold in twenty countries now. This news report been brought to you by Fox Cable News, USA. The newspaper will printed at 3:00 a.m. The World Wide Web invented by Tim Berners-Lee. These days, over 10,000 books published every week. The growth of television can’t stopped.

3. Complete the sentences with the follow ing words o r phrases. '------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- > sections, record, contestant, article, profit, accidents, documentary, plastic surgery, performance, the front page

1. Did you read about the fire? It was on ___ of almost all the newspapers. 2. I saw an interesting___ about Ancient Egypt on TV yesterday. 3. I’m sure that actor’s h a d ___ He looks twenty years younger. 4. W hich__ of the paper do you read? I like the sports pages. 5. The company made a ___ of $ 50, 000 this year. 6. O n e __ on “Who wants to be a millionaire?” created 7. Speeding drivers cause a lot o f ____ . 8. George Michael gave a liv e ___ on MTV. He sang brilliantly. 9. Asafa Powell broke the__ for the 100 metres. He ran it in 9,77 seconds. 10. There’s a n __ about immigrants in the newspapers today.

4. Read the te x t and choose the answer th a t b e st com pletes the sentence. 1___ as a journalist for the last five years, but 2_____freelance for ten years.Before th a t,____ for a newspaper.4 into a new office here in Manchester, which I’m really happy with.5__ all morning to arrange an interview with the famous 100m runner, Carlos Santiago. Unfortunately, so far, his secretary 6__ that he’ll be available next week. I’ll keep trying this afternoon. In the past week, 7__ four interviews, and four stories which I wrote last week 8__ in newspapers and magazines. What are my ambitions? Well, 9__ an award for my work, so I’d like that to happen. I 10__ an interview on TV. That would be great too! 1. 2.

A I am working B I’ve been working C B I’m only A I’ve only been C I’ve only been being B I’ve been working C 3. A. I’ve worked 4. A I just move B I’ve just moved C I was just moving B I’ve been trying C 5. A I try B hasn’t been confirming 6. A didn’t confirm C hasn’t confirmed 7. A I’m doing B I’ve done C I’ve been doing B have been appearing C 8. A have appeared B I’ve never been winning 9. A I’ve never won C I’m never winning A also never did 10. B have also never done C have also never been doing

I worked I worked I’m trying

appear

5. Make up yo ur own sentences (7-10) with the follow ing words and phrases. Model: I wouldn’t like to work as paparazzi - you just have to wait the whole day for one picture of a celebrity. Paparazzi, private life, celebrities, publicity, in the public eye, quality newspapers, tabloids, journalist, gossips, to interview, news section, sports section, review section, editor, front page, magazine.

LESSON 96 1. Read o r listen to the te x t and say what the a u th o r’s opinion about magazines fo r teenagers is. A lot of us like buying magazines, don’t we? We enjoy reading about films, fashion and sport. And for girls, magazines are also a good place to find out about important things like health and relationships. From magazines, you can learn how to put on make-up and how to stop biting your nails. They suggest the way to lead a healthy lifestyle and give practical tips: how to give up eating sweets and how to start doing exercise at home. They advise us to do those things but the advice comes together with the adverts which tell us to buy various things: body lotions that will help you to lose weight, shoes that will make you look more attractive and energy drinks that will keep you active all night. Of course, advertisers know that we are important customers, but I think we should stop and think what we are buying. Don’t be manipulated by rich companies which worry about their money, but not how healthy you are. You should decide to be yourself! 2. 1. 2. 3.

Take turns to ask and answer questions. Do you buy magazines? Which ones? Give the titles. What kind of articles do you usually look for in your favourite magazine? How often do you read teenager magazine/ Do you read them online or in a printed form? 4. What was the last article you read in a magazine about? 3. Shark attacks always hit the news. Here are two stories from summer 1983. One is from “ The Times” (the quality paper), the other one is from “ The Daily Express” (the tabloid). Read the articles and guess which is from which newspaper.

Shark kills two off Barrier Reef

Melbourne - The skipper of a trawler, wrecked off the Northern Queensland coast near the Barrier Reef on Sunday night is recovering in hospital after a 36hour fight during which his two-member crew were taken by a shark.

Jaws is dead. The incredible monster of the deep which has been terrorizing America’s Eastern Seaboard was killed in a terrifying battle. And it was just like a scene from the famous horror movies.

4. In te rv ie w y o u r frie n d . U se th e q u e s tio n s b e lo w . Would you Tike to be famous? Why?/Why not?

Which famous person

Is it important to read a

How often do

would you like to meet

newspaper regularly?

you use the

most? Why?

Why?/Why not?

internet? What

Have you ever seen

What have you

Is TV just for

do you use it

or met a famous

been reading

entertainment, or does

for?

person in real Irfe?

recently?

it educate us too?

5. Look a t the inform ation about three magazines and com plete the sentences using the follow ing words in the c o rre c t form .

cost: size: popular: comes out:

$1.20 100 pages vw _________ once a month

95 pages w w v ______ once a week

1. “Now!” is ___ magazine (expensive). Now!” is the most expensive magazine. 2. “Yes!” is ___ “Hi!” (cheap). 3. “Hi!” is _____ “Yes!” (cheap). 4. “Hi!” is _____ magazine (big). 5. “Yes!” is ____ “Hi!” b u t_____ “Now!” (big). 6. “Yes!” is _____ magazine (popular). 7. “Now!” i s ____ (popular). 8. “Hi!” is ____ “Yes!” (popular). 9. “Yes!” comes o u t____ “Hi!” and “Now!” (often) 10. “ Hi!” comes o u t___ “Now!” (often).

$1.50 75 pages once a month

LESSON 97 1. Read o r listen to the jo k e and a c t it o u t with your p a rtn e r. Mum: Wake up! You’re going to be late for school! Son: I don’t want to go to school today. Mum: Why not? Son: The teachers don’t like me, and the children don’t like me. Mum: But you must go to school. Son: Why? Mum: Because you’re the headmaster. 2. Work in pairs. Practise speaking about your favourite and le a st favourite music styles and singers. You can use the words amusing, boring, depressing, exciting, great, impressive, irritating, moving, passionate, relaxing, sad, silly, lovely s__________________________________________________________ Model: A: B:

A: B:

What do you think about rap? I don’t like it, it’s rhythmic but repetitive. It’s my least favourite music style. What about you? I love opera. It’s soft and beautiful. I think it’s boring. And it’s not soft. It can be very loud.

3. Read o r listen to what the schoolchildren say about th e ir school life and m atch the names and the statem ents about them. 1. A teenager who likes doing projects in a lesson 2. A teenager who doesn’t like maths 3. A teenager who does very well in all subjects except one 4. A teenager who likes meeting school friends but doesn’t enjoy doing homework 5. A teenager who likes sports activities at school

Linda At the moment, there’s a competition at school and one of the events is lip synching. You do a dance routine to music. It looks like you’re singing, but you’re not. I confess that I like school very much. I’m good at all of my subjects, but not geography. I never do well in it. Steve I don’t like home assignment, but I like coming to school to see my friends. I play football and volleyball at school after lessons. I started playing volleyball three years ago. It’s a lot of fun. I’ve got some awards for it. I’m also good at science, but I don’t like it. Jane Drama is an incredible class because you can be someone else. You have to understand how other people feel. It’s like the childhood fantasy of being a princess. My teacher is really easy-going. I hate algebra because I don’t understand it and it’s boring. I don’t like sport. Max I really like my English teacher. I can ask her anything. I like the stories we read and the projects we do. Sometimes we act out the stories. At the moment, we’re studying Greek mythology. I enjoy the activities at school, like the special football game we play once a year. The girls play football and the boys are cheerleaders. Last year, I was a cheerleader and it was a lot of fun.

280

4. M atch each future a ctivity with a p re d ictio n . Then w ork in pairs and take turns to ask follow -up questions and a c t o ut the sh o rt conversations with yo ur partner. 1. My cousin’s getting married in May. 2. We’re going trick-or-treating on Halloween. 3. My parents are going to get me something special on Christmas. 4. My sister’s graduating from law school soon. 5. I’m going to get my dad a tie for his birthday. a. I think he’s going to love it! b. She’s going to be a great lawyer. c. It’s going to be a fun wedding. d. It’s going to rain, but we don’t care. e. I think they’re going to get me a laptop. 5. The In te rn e t is a pow erfu l to o l and means o f com m unication around the world. Develop your website in which you should p u t inform ation on what y o u ’ve le a rn t in English this year. Use the steps to follow. -

Look through your English textbook and copy books and make notes on the most important information you could include in your website. Choose the most interesting in your opinion. Draw a scheme for your website. Think about the titles for different pages of your website. Prepare a three-minute presentation about your future website and share it with your classmates. Think of three reasons why your website might be interesting for other English learners your age. Develop your website and include the information you’ve chosen.

LESSONS 98-105 (OPTIONAL)

GRAMMAR SECTION

ADJECTIVE Adjective opposites: the prefixes un-, in-, dis-, im -, il-. Un-

In-

Dis-

fair

unfair

competent

incompetent

honest

dishonest

friendly

unfriendly

dependent

independent

loyal

disloyal

important

unimportant

direct

indirect

reliable

unreliable

flexible

inflexible

Im patient

impatient

mature

immature

NUMERAL Cardinal numerals in English are read like this: 123 - one hundred and twenty-three; 407 - four hundred and seven; 3,538 - three thousand five hundred and thirty-eight; 73,005 - seventy-three thousand and five; 5,300,050 - five million three hundred thousand and fifty. Hundred, Thousand, Million The words "hundred, thousand, million" can be used with "one" or "a" (if "one" is meant). But only "one" is used before these words if they are followed by numerals in order to express an exact number. Examples: I saw about a hundred people there. One hundred thirty-five people were present at the meeting. The lake is about a hundred and fifty miles from the nearest city. The lake is at a distance of one hundred fifty-two miles from the nearest city. Their house is almost a hundred and ten years old. Their house is one hundred ten years old. The words "hundred, thousand, million" do not take the plural ending "s" when they are followed by numerals in order to express an exact number. But the words "hundred, thousand, million" can take the plural ending "s" when they are followed by "o F + noun, and have the meaning "a great number, a lot of". Examples: We need three hundred volunteers. - We saw hundreds of people there. They sold two thousand cars. - There are thousands of books in her collection. The population of Britain is about 60 million people. - The new radio program attracted millions of listeners.

GRAMMAR SECTION

PRONOUNS AND ADVERBS

Places

Things

People

Indefinite Pronouns and Adverbs Affirmative Form (offers requests) somebody, someone Somebody knocked at the door. Someone wanted to see you today. something Something interesting happened to me yesterday. Would you like something else? Adverb: somewhere You should look for him somewhere else.

Negative Form (questions) anybody, anyone Is there anybody in the hall? 1don’t know anybody so clever. anything Is there anything in the fridge? There isn’t anything interesting in this book. Adverb: anywhere Enemies can come from anywhere.

As a Subject nobody, no one Nobody came to see them. No one wanted to ask questions. nothing Nothing could cheer him up.

Adverb: nowhere We went nowhere last weekend.

A s ... as, Not as ... as constructions — How do you find my cake? —* Well, it is as good as the one I tried in the restaurant. — What do you think of this computer? — I am afraid, it is n o t as fa s t as that one. —* Why don’t you want to go to the Strand Theatre? — It’s n o t as com fortable as the Odeon. — When can you complete the project? — Early next week. We are working as fa st as we can! — Do you play tennis well? — I don’t play it as w ell as my sister does. — Why do you work so slowly? — You are kidding! I am working as quickly as Paul. — This meal is very hot! I can’t eat it. — Try this one. It is n o t as spicy as that one.

GRAMMAR SECTION

Adverbs of degree: Quite / Rather / Almost Quite is often used to show the degree of certain quality. Besides, we can use some other adverbs. Both quite and rather are used to modify adjectives and adverbs to mean "more than a little, but not very": He's quite well-known. She greeted me quite cheerfully. You seem ra th e r unhappy today. It was a ra th e r sad story. Rather has less force than quite. Rather means "to a degree." Quite, in contrast, means "to a significant degree". When someone is rather sad, the degree of sadness is less than if the person is quite sad. Is he well-known? Oh yes, quite! I quite agree with you! We can use rather with comparatives. Quite is never used with them. Their new house is rather smaller than their old one. (NOT: Their house is quite smaller than the old one.) Almost means ‘nearly’, ‘not quite’ ‘not completely’. It is an adverb of degree. When almost modifies a verb, it normally goes before it. I have alm ost finished the job. If the verb is a form of be, almost goes after it. There were alm ost sixty people there. Almost can modify an adjective, and then almost goes before it. I am alm ost ready to leave. He is alm ost certain to win. Almost can be used with every, all, nothing and no one. He calls him mom alm ost every day. She has broken alm ost a ll of her toys. A lm ost no one wished him on his birthday. There was alm ost nothing to do. Almost can be used with expressions of time and quantity. I spent alm ost two months (OR nearly two months) in Australia. That used laptop costs alm ost 3000 hrn. (= ... nearly 3000 hrn.) Almost can be used with always and never. It cannot be used with sometimes, occasionally or often. He is alm ost always late for work. She is alm ost never on time for school.

GRAMMAR SECTION

VERB P re s e n t C o n tin u o u s w ith F u tu re M e a n in g

P re s e n t C o n tin u o u s : future

plans and arrangements I am meeting Jane tomorrow morning. V ^ B e g o in g to :

intentions and predictions based on what we see 1 am overweight. 1am going to exercise more. Watch out! You are going to fall down!

P re s e n t S im p le :

Future actions on the timetable My bus leaves at 5:30.

Speaking about the future

J r F u tu re S im p le : Promises and prediction based on what we know I’ll buy some milk on the way home. You don’t need to worry. Computers will replace people at work some day. V

GRAMMAR SECTION

M o d a ls : S H O U L D , M IG H T , C O U LD

We use " s h o u ld " to make recommendations or give advice. We can also use it to express obligation. Examples: When you go to Berlin, you should visit the palaces in Potsdam. People with high cholesterol should eat low-fat food. recommendation You should focus more on your healthy habits. You really should start eating better. Your brother shouldn’t smoke. It’s not good for his health. - advice I should be in the school by 9:00 AM. You shouldn’t eat before swimming. - obligation /prohibition We use " m ig h t " to express possibility. We can also use "might" to make suggestions or requests. Examples: Your English book might be in the living room. She might not be in the kitchen. I saw her in the living room a few minutes before. - possibility You might eat more fruit if you want to improve your lifestyle. You might try the cheesecake. - suggestion Might I borrow your pen? Might I have something to drink? request We use " c o u ld " to express possibility or past ability as well as to make suggestions and requests. Examples: Much fat in the food you eat could cause high blood pressure. possibility Linda could ski very well by the age of 11. - past ability You could eat more fruit and vegetables if you want to lose weight. - suggestion Could I use your computer to email my friend? - request

GRAMMAR SECTION

Past Continuous: Interrogative and Negative Forms Affirmative

Interrogative

When Linda met Victor he w a s e x e rc is in g in the gym. They w e re w a tc h in g TV at p.m. yesterday.

Victor e x e rc is in g in the gym when Linda met him? What w a s Victor d o ing in the gym when Linda met him? Who w a s e x e rc is in g in the gym when Linda came there? W e re they w a tc h in g TV at 7 p.m. yesterday? What w e r e they w a tc h in g at 7 p.m. yesterday? W as

Negative Victor

w a s n ’t e x e rc is in g in

the gym when Linda met him. They w e re n o t w a tc h in g TV at

p.m. yesterday.

M odal Verb WILL The verb will is a modal verb. We use it: o

to talk about or predict the future. Example: You’ll be in time if you hurry. You’ll be unfit if you eat too much chocolate.

to ask somebody to do something - as a request. Example: Will you send this letter for me, please? You’ll water the plants while I ’m away, won’t you?

to order somebody to do something - as an order. Example: You’ll do it this minute! Will you be quiet!

GRAMMAR SECTION

Present Simple Passive sub ject

verb

object

He opens the door.

iO O

Thed

Participle II (3rd form)

- ed

1 ?opened by him.

subject

verb

agent

(modal verb) + be + past participle

Past Participle______ modal + be + Past Participle

Future Simple Active: The headmaster will take (should take) an important decision about the school organization. Future Simple Passive: An important decision about the school organization will (should) be taken by the headmaster. Future Simple Passive Interrogative Form The pupils will be given two new books this semester. Will the pupils be given two new books this semester? What will the pupils be given this semester? When will the pupils be given new books? Negative Form The pupils will NOT be given two new books this semester.

GRAMMAR SECTION

Past Simple Passive Form Affirmative

Interrogative

Negative

subject + form of the verb to be (was/ were) + past participle

form of the verb to be (was/were) + subject + past participle

subject + form of the verb to be (was/ were) + NOT + past participle

The book was taken to the classroom.

Was the book taken to the classroom?

Those songs weren’t chosen by DJ.

Present Perfect Passive Read the sentence in bold type in the second paragraph of the text in exercise 2. Compare it with the previous sentence. What can you say about these two sentences? The present perfect passive is useful when you want to describe something that was done in the past without a lot of information about when it was done, how, why, etc. S + (has or have) + been + past participle Compare: Active: Thomas has written many books. Passive: Many books have been written by Thomas. Interrogative form (has or have) +S + been + past participle PREPOSITIONS Prepositions o f Time in a t on in the morning (afternoon, evening) in August (months) in summer (seasons) in 1992 (years) in the 20th century

in a t on at 8 o’clock at noon (night, midnight) at Easter at Christmas at the weekend

in a t on on on on on on on

Fridays Wednesday (days) January 27th (dates) Monday morning a cold day a summer night

IRREGULAR VERBS

Infinitive to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to

be bear beat become begin bite blow break bring build burn buy catch choose come cost cut do draw drink drive eat fall feed feel fight fly forbid forget forgive

Past Simple

Past Participle

was / were bore beat became began bit blew broke brought built burnt / burned bought caught chose came cost cut did drew drank drove ate fell fed felt fought flew forbade forgot forgave

been born / borne beaten become begun bitten blown broken brought built burnt / burned bought caught chosen come cost cut done drawn drunk driven eaten fallen fed felt fought flown forbidden forgotten forgiven

Переклад бути нести бити ставати починати вкусити дути ламати приносити будувати горіти купляти хапати вибирати приходити коштувати різати робити малювати пити керувати їсти падати годувати відчувати боротися літати забороняти забувати пробачати

IRREGULAR VERBS

to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to

freeze get give go grow hang have hear hide hit hold hurt keep know lead leave let lose make mean meet pay put read ride ring rise run say see seek sell send

froze got gave went grew hung had heard hid hit held hurt kept knew led left let lost made meant met paid put read rode rang rose run said saw sought sold sent

frozen got / gotten given gone grown hung had heard hidden hit held hurt kept known led left let lost made meant met paid put read ridden rung risen run said seen sought sold sent

заморожувати отримувати давати йти рости висіти мати (щось) чути ховатися вдаряти тримати завдавати болю тримати знати вести полишати дозволяти втрачати робити, створювати означати зустрічати платити класти читати їхати дзвонити підніматись бігти казати бачити шукати продавати надсилати

IRREGULAR VERBS

to set to shake to shoot

set shook shot

to show

showed

to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to to

shut sang sank sat slept smelt spoke spent stood stole swam took taught tore told thought threw understood woke wore won wrote

shut sing sink sit sleep smell speak spend stand steal swim take teach tear tell think throw understand wake wear win write

set shaken shot shown/ showed shut sung sunk sat slept smelt spoken spent stood stole swum taken taught torn told thought thrown understood woken worn won written

встановлювати трясти стріляти показувати закривати співати опускатися сидіти спати пахнути розмовляти витрачати стояти красти плисти брати вчити рвати розповідати думати кидати розуміти прокидатися одягати вигравати писати

VOCABULARY

REVISION LESSONS appetizer bar breakfast brunch buffet chef cook dessert dinner dishwasher fancy fast-food lunch non-smoking salad smoking soup tip waiter platform approach delay announcement depart passport customs arrival departure timetable fare ticket go on a diet intend UNIT ONE. MY FRIENDS answering machine to answer the phone caller cellular phone / cell phone cordless phone

dial (v) hang up pick up mobile phone receiver ring (n) dial tone busy signal horoscope honest generous hospitable sociable patient stubborn lazy decisive brave intelligent greedy friendly welcoming determined unreasonable confidence courage cheat steal sociable greedy independent generous lazy calm patient hardworking reliable organized eager punctual flexible weakness dishonest unreliable

disorganized indifferent tardy inflexible impatient mature immature Rooster Ox unsociable generous arrogant Capricorn Aquarius Pisces Aries Taurus Gemini Cancer Leo Virgo Libra Scorpio Sagittarius option special delivery courier airmail guarantee overnight sign for gadget selfless. body language computer network email blog face-toface conversation intranet micro-blog netbook postal service instant messaging

VOCABULARY

sign language texting (sms) landline telephone smart phone telegraph tablet UNIT TWO. HEALTHY LIFESTYLE

increase junk food pizza snacks chips stuff chips definitely cocoa sunscreen addiction fit to be kidding to go rollerblading couch potato otherwise wave machine and flumes eyesight. headphones volume immune system virus embarrassing intelligence generally TV addicts unfit addiction proteins vitamin fibre amazing crater backyard

punch check printout make sure match repair rocket climb fortnight. UNIT THREE. AT THE LIBRARY. READING BOOKS

bilingual study area enquiry desk tail of a book foredge book spine front cover protective covering bookworm hardcover(book) cardboard leather book jacket dizzy attend the library turn a book upon its clear face fold dog’s ear cover foredge inform violations e-books similar structure screen menu instructions objectives content

assessments in-between reference librarian magazine videocassette reference desk newspaper CD (compact disc) library book online catalogue record microfilm reader card catalogue checkout desk microfilm media section library clerk / assistant periodical section audiocassette encyclopaedia a detective story narrator crime murder suspect genre fiction witness suspicion guilty innocent deliberately stimulating captivating gripping dynamic vigorous forceful squire cloth scoundrels tremble software

VOCABULARY

sword delighted sense sensibility mutual enchanting tear-jerker sentimental tenderness sadness nostalgia happy end story tragic extreme distress sorrow dramatic noticeable science fiction insects Time Traveller Morlock mankind check out rare valuable encouraged clay tablets papyrus scroll temple magnificent emperor access contain myths exist byphrase front cover head tail front and back boards text block

foredge spine UNIT FOUR. SCHOOL LIFE full-time nursery primary school secondary school uniform compulsory Science Information Technology get a job continue education Physics Chemistry Schooling locker cafeteria rubbish handwriting. medical clinic audio-visual centre labour lesson workshop concert hall teacher’s pet have one’s nose in a book take the roll cow college count noses constituent full range campus facilities located cosmopolitan town walkable medieval well-equipped

communicate. M.A. M.S. Ph.D. UNIT FIVE. MUSIC IN OUR LIFE jazz trumpet woodwind instrument flute brass instrument string instrument percussion instrument keyboard instrument accordion harpsichord geometric rhythmic melodic complex rhythms country music musical genre improvise harmonic framework hip hop rap origin rural timeless relaxed nostalgic concertos sonatas quartets opera deaf solo piano organ musician Baroque Variations Mass in B minor

VOCABULARY

Passion cantata be regarded (as) composer pianist conductor ethnomusicologist folksong principal sources kobzar despite fame prosperity substantial successful extravagant prodigious infancy kidney failure single pieces interpretation award appreciation. interviewer ethnic music mentality psychology characterize songwriter producer musical conductor multiinstrumentalist voice actress social activist repertoire includes songs performed composer conductor ethnologist scholarship conservatory compositions banned obstacle

orchestration hate to stage followed footsteps cello viola violin acoustic guitar bass ukulele electric guitar mandolin harp banjo piccolo clarinet oboe bassoon saxophone recorder trombone French horn tuba kettle drum bongos conga drums cymbals xylophone organ digital / electric piano grand piano synthesizer accordion UNIT SIX. GREAT BRITAIN AND ITS PEOPLE

The Midlands East Anglia Muslim Currency

Internet country code Telephone country code boring crowded dull peaceful ugly island Iceland Eire be washed apply citizens qualify swear oath allegiance compulsory citizenship civic dignitaries regalia common practice opponent undue pressure newcomers tunnel Belief surrounding varied climate maritime portion enclose blockbuster scientific television invent emblems landmarks stereotypes Danube Rhine influence

VOCABULARY

humans moderate greenhouse effect carbon dioxide greenhouse oxygen otherwise UNIT SEVEN. UKRAINE Desna Dnister Prypyat Siverian Donets Southern Buh Crimea the Black Sea the Sea of Azov Slovakia Austria Moldova swan flamingo crane partridge lark steppe eagle camels lama zebras wild horses canyon cave hill plain six times world champion maple subtropical

mild pond steppe coastline temperate belt continental highland lake elm lowland pine mountain slope weeping willow waterfall rainfall Independence absorbed prophecy abide fail adhere enhance deliverance worldwide screenwriter game designer UNIT EIGHT. MASS MEDIA: NEWSPAPERS AND MAGAZINES glamorous dew celebrities film star royal family politician sportspeople journalists editor

front page headlines main story section daily paper sports section financial section articles review section interviews celebrity advertisements online news mass media scandal behaviour private life break into public publicity in the public eye differ archaeologists. tabloids paparazzi FINAL REVISION LESSONS atlas autobiography cookbook dictionary guidebook manual play bullycide judge pork pasta

CONTENTS

REVISION LESSONS.................................................................3 UNIT I MY FRIENDS............................................................................. 22 UNIT II HEALTHY LIFESTYLE............................................................... 56 UNIT III AT THE LIBRARY. READINGBOOKS...................................... 83 UNIT IV SCHOOL LIFE ........................................................................... 114 UNITV MUSIC IN OUR LIFE.................................................................151 UNIT VI GREAT BRITAIN AND ITSPEOPLE......................................... 190 UNIT VII UKRAINE.................................................................................... 224 UNIT VIII MASS MEDIA: NEWSPAPERS AND MAGAZINES................253 GRAMMAR SECTION............................................................... 282 IRREGULAR VERBS.................................................................. 290 VOCALABULARY

293

ɇɚɜɱɚɥɶɧɟ ɜɢɞɚɧɧɹ Ɇɨɪɫɶɤɚ Ʌɿɥɿɹ ȱɜɚɧɿɜɧɚ

ȺɇȽɅȱɃɋɖɄȺ ɆɈȼȺ (8-ɣ ɪɿɤ ɧɚɜɱɚɧɧɹ)

ɉɿɞɪɭɱɧɢɤ ɞɥɹ 8 ɤɥɚɫɭ ɡɚɝɚɥɶɧɨɨɫɜɿɬɧɿɯ ɧɚɜɱɚɥɶɧɢɯ ɡɚɤɥɚɞɿɜ Ɋɟɤɨɦɟɧɞɨɜɚɧɨ Ɇɿɧɿɫɬɟɪɫɬɜɨɦ ɨɫɜɿɬɢ ɿ ɧɚɭɤɢ ɍɤɪɚʀɧɢ Ƚɨɥɨɜɧɢɣ ɪɟɞɚɤɬɨɪ ȱɜɚɧ Ȼɿɥɚɯ Ɋɟɞɚɤɬɨɪ ȱɝɨɪ Ɇɢɤɨɥɿɜ Ⱦɢɡɚɣɧ ɿ ɤɨɦɩ’ɸɬɟɪɧɚ ɜɟɪɫɬɤɚ Ⱥɧɚɬɨɥɿɹ ɋɚɝɚɧɚ, Ɇɚɪɿʀ Ʌɨɝɨɲ ɏɭɞɨɠɧɢɤ Ɇɚɪ’ɹɧɚ Ⱦɹɱɢɧɫɶɤɚ Ɉɛɤɥɚɞɢɧɤɚ ȱɜɚɧɚ ɒɟɜɰɿɜɚ

ɉɿɞɩɢɫɚɧɨ ɞɨ ɞɪɭɤɭ _________ 2016 ɪ. Ɏɨɪɦɚɬ 70ɯ100 1/16. ɉɚɩɿɪ ɨɮɫɟɬɧɢɣ. Ƚɚɪɧɿɬɭɪɚ Arial. Ⱦɪɭɤ ɨɮɫɟɬɧɢɣ. ɍɦɨɜɧɨ-ɞɪɭɤ. ɚɪɤ. _______. Ɉɛɥɿɤ.-ɜɢɞɚɜɧ. ɚɪɤ. _____. Ɍɢɪɚɠ ______ɩɪ. Ɂɚɦ. ʋ____. ɌɡɈȼ «ȼɢɞɚɜɧɢɰɬɜɨ Ⱥɫɬɨɧ» 46006, ɦ. Ɍɟɪɧɨɩɿɥɶ, ɜɭɥ. Ƚɚɣɨɜɚ, 8 ɋɜɿɞɨɰɬɜɨ ɩɪɨ ɜɧɟɫɟɧɧɹ ɞɨ Ⱦɟɪɠɚɜɧɨɝɨ ɪɟɽɫɬɪɭ ɫɭɛ’ɽɤɬɿɜ ɜɢɞɚɜɧɢɱɨʀ ɫɩɪɚɜɢ ɌɊ ʋ28 ɜɿɞ 09.06.2005 ɪ.